spr users guide

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide November 2001 Version 4.2.2

DEA517761

Copyright Copyright © 2001 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license.

No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartPlant, and FrameWorks are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. PDS is a trademark of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft, Visual Basic, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of AutoDesk. All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

SmartPlant Review User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents Preface ......................................................................................................................... 17

Introducing SmartPlant Review ............................................................................... 18 What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2?............................................... 18 Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview .............................................. 19

API Module................................................................................................................. 20 Collaboration Module ................................................................................................. 20 Construction Module................................................................................................... 22 On-Site Drawing Generation Module ......................................................................... 23 Photo-Realism Module................................................................................................ 24 Simulation and Visual Effects Module ....................................................................... 25

Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview....................................................... 26 Display Set Changes ................................................................................................... 27 Function Key Changes ................................................................................................ 28 Measurement Changes ................................................................................................ 29 Position Control Changes............................................................................................ 29 VUE File Changes....................................................................................................... 30

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review: An Overview........................................ 31 Opening a Model File: An Overview.................................................................... 31

Create Project Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 31 Search Path Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 34 Design File Search Path .............................................................................................. 35 Open Model from Command Line .............................................................................. 36 Open a Model File....................................................................................................... 37 Save As a .VUE File ................................................................................................... 39 Refresh Data................................................................................................................ 39

Understanding Project Databases: An Overview.................................................. 40 Working with Large Datasets...................................................................................... 42 Sharing the Project Database Over the Network ........................................................ 42

Supporting Other Software: An Overview............................................................ 43 MicroStation Design File Working Units ................................................................... 45 AutoCAD Design File Working Units ........................................................................ 45 SAT Design File Working Units................................................................................. 46 Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files............................................................... 46 SmartPlant Review Files ............................................................................................. 47

Working with Views: An Overview.......................................................................... 49 Arrange All Views ...................................................................................................... 50 Refresh All Views....................................................................................................... 50 Refresh View............................................................................................................... 51 Single Pane Layout ..................................................................................................... 51 Three Pane Layout ...................................................................................................... 52 Four Pane Layout ........................................................................................................ 52 Full Screen Display Mode........................................................................................... 53

Table of Contents

4 SmartPlant Review User’s Guide

Changing View Settings: An Overview................................................................ 53 Set Background Color ................................................................................................. 54 Set Display Tag........................................................................................................... 54 Set Textures................................................................................................................. 55 Set Lighting Intensity.................................................................................................. 55 Set Sun Bearing Angles .............................................................................................. 56 Set Range Reject ......................................................................................................... 56 Set View Options ........................................................................................................ 57 Set Stroking Tolerance................................................................................................ 58 Define Display Order .................................................................................................. 59 Maintain Display Options ........................................................................................... 59 View Settings Dialog Box........................................................................................... 60 Set Brightness Level Dialog Box................................................................................ 68 Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box ......................................................................... 68 Set Light Direction Dialog Box .................................................................................. 69 Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box .............................................................. 69 Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box ............................................................................ 70

Rendering Views: An Overview ........................................................................... 70 Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe..................................................................... 71 Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line ..................................................................... 71 Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe ..................................................................... 72 Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line........................................................................... 72 Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded........................................................................... 73 Maintain Render Settings............................................................................................ 73

Fitting Views: An Overview ................................................................................. 74 Fit All Views to Model ............................................................................................... 74 Fit View to Model ....................................................................................................... 75 Fit View to Object....................................................................................................... 75 Fit View to Display Set............................................................................................... 75 Fit View to Volume..................................................................................................... 76 Zoom In ....................................................................................................................... 76 Zoom Out .................................................................................................................... 77

Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview.......................................................... 78 View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates .................................................. 79 Rename Group ............................................................................................................ 80 Delete Group ............................................................................................................... 80 Create Group ............................................................................................................... 81 Select All..................................................................................................................... 81 Edit Selected Views .................................................................................................... 82 Delete View................................................................................................................. 82 Move View.................................................................................................................. 83 Copy a View................................................................................................................ 83 Modify Frame Numbers .............................................................................................. 84 Add Current View....................................................................................................... 84 Set Up Partial View Recall ......................................................................................... 85 Recall Partial View ..................................................................................................... 86 Recall a View.............................................................................................................. 86 Generate a ModelView View File .............................................................................. 87 Save and Recall Views Dialog Box ............................................................................ 87 Rename Group Dialog Box......................................................................................... 89

Table of Contents


Create Group Dialog Box............................................................................................ 89 Edit View Dialog Box................................................................................................. 89 Copy Selected View Dialog Box ................................................................................ 96 Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box .......................................................................... 97 Setup Partial View Recall Dialog Box........................................................................ 97 Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box.............................................................. 98

Selecting Level Settings: An Overview ................................................................ 99 Hide Levels ................................................................................................................. 99 Edit Levels .................................................................................................................. 100 View Current Level Settings....................................................................................... 100 Match Files.................................................................................................................. 101 Hide Level Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 101 Level Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 102 Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box ............................................................... 103 Match Files Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 103

Viewing in Stereo: An Overview.......................................................................... 104 Stereo Distances Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 105 Set Stereo Settings ...................................................................................................... 106 Set Stereo Settings Interactively ................................................................................. 106

Working with Elumens: An Overview.................................................................. 107 Working in Elumens Display Mode............................................................................ 108 Toggle the Elumens Display Mode On or Off ............................................................ 109 Elumens Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 109 Edit Elumens Display Mode Settings ......................................................................... 111

Using the View Cone: An Overview ......................................................................... 112 Position Control Toolbar....................................................................................... 113

Set Eye Point ............................................................................................................... 114 Set Center Point .......................................................................................................... 115 Set Clipping Planes ..................................................................................................... 116 Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box.............................................................................. 117 Set View Cone Perspective ......................................................................................... 117

Placing 3D Points: An Overview .......................................................................... 118 Define a Bore Sight..................................................................................................... 118 Place a Data Point ....................................................................................................... 118 Snap to an Element...................................................................................................... 119

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview........................................................ 120 Examining Motion Devices: An Overview........................................................... 121

Using the Mouse: An Overview.................................................................................. 122 Work with Mouse Drag Modes................................................................................... 124 Auto-Highlight ............................................................................................................ 124 Forward/Back, Left/Right ........................................................................................... 125 Pan............................................................................................................................... 125 Rotate .......................................................................................................................... 125 Manipulate the View Cube ......................................................................................... 126 Set Priority Mode ........................................................................................................ 126 Set Center Mode.......................................................................................................... 126 Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse............................................................................. 127

Table of Contents


Step Using the IntelliMouse........................................................................................ 127 Using the Keyboard: An Overview............................................................................. 128 Using the Joystick: An Overview ............................................................................... 132 Install a Joystick on Windows NT .............................................................................. 134 Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000 ............................................... 134 Set Joystick Options.................................................................................................... 135

Exploring Motion Types: An Overview ............................................................... 136 Set Continuous Motion ............................................................................................... 137 Set Single Step Motion ............................................................................................... 137 Set Toggle Step Direction ........................................................................................... 138

Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview........................... 138 Using Lateral Motion .................................................................................................. 139 Set Horizontal Encircle Motion .................................................................................. 139 Set Vertical Encircle Motion ...................................................................................... 140 Set Surface Encircle Motion ....................................................................................... 141

Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview ........................... 142 Set View Dependent Mode ......................................................................................... 142 Set View Dependent Level Mode ............................................................................... 143 Set View Independent Mode....................................................................................... 143 Set Plant North Mode.................................................................................................. 143

Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview........................................................ 144 Motion Settings Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 145 Set Motion Rates......................................................................................................... 150 Set Display Options .................................................................................................... 150 Set Bearing Angles...................................................................................................... 151 Set Joystick Options.................................................................................................... 151 Set Motion Control to Display Set.............................................................................. 152 Set Motion Control to Eye Point................................................................................. 153

Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview ...................................................... 153 Display Key Frame Motion......................................................................................... 153 Play Key Frame Motion .............................................................................................. 154 Pause Key Frame Motion............................................................................................ 155 Stop Key Frame Motion.............................................................................................. 155 Snapshot Key Frames.................................................................................................. 156 Setup Partial Key Frame Recall .................................................................................. 156 Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box ..................................................................... 157 Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box .............................................................................. 158 Setup Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box .............................................................. 159

Using Project Manager: An Overview ..................................................................... 162 Display or Hide the Project Manager.......................................................................... 164 Move the Project Manager Window ........................................................................... 164 View Items in the Model with Project Manager ......................................................... 165 Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager............................................ 165 Show or Hide Items in a Model with Project Manager............................................... 166 Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager ............................................................. 167 Add a Display Set in the Project Manager.................................................................. 168 Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager .................................................................. 168 Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager............................. 169 Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager ............................................. 169

Table of Contents


Review a Construction Sequence in the Project Manager .......................................... 170

Working with Display Sets: An Overview ............................................................... 171 View Display Sets ....................................................................................................... 172 Display Sets - Show Only ........................................................................................... 172 Display Sets - Hide Only............................................................................................. 173 Delete Display Sets ..................................................................................................... 174

Defining Display Sets: An Overview.................................................................... 174 Create a Display Set Definition .................................................................................. 175 Sub-definitions ............................................................................................................ 176 Edit a Display Set Definition ...................................................................................... 177 Assign Material to a Display Set................................................................................. 178 Automatically Define Display Sets............................................................................. 179 Import Display Sets..................................................................................................... 179 Export Display Sets..................................................................................................... 180 Find an Object ............................................................................................................. 180 Display Sets - Reverse Dim ........................................................................................ 180 Edit Display Set Dialog Box....................................................................................... 181 Edit Definition Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 181 Find Volume Inside Dialog Box ................................................................................. 186 Find Volume Overlap Dialog Box .............................................................................. 187 Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box................................................................ 187 Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box........................................................................ 188 Pick Objects Dialog Box............................................................................................. 189 Import Display Sets Dialog Box ................................................................................. 189 Export Display Sets Dialog Box ................................................................................. 190 Find Object Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 190 Define Search Criteria for Pipes ................................................................................. 194

Editing Positions: An Overview ........................................................................... 195 Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box......................................................................... 195 Edit Display Set Position ............................................................................................ 199 Move Display Set........................................................................................................ 199 Rotate Display Set....................................................................................................... 201

Taking Snapshots: An Overview .............................................................................. 202 Snapshot View Dialog Box................................................................................... 203

Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch................................................................................. 205 Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot........................................................................ 206

Placing Measurements: An Overview ...................................................................... 207 Snaplock Measurement ............................................................................................... 207 Surface Measurement.................................................................................................. 208 Move Measurement..................................................................................................... 209 Restore Position .......................................................................................................... 210 Delete Last Measurement............................................................................................ 210 Delete Active Collection Measurements..................................................................... 211 Delete All Measurements............................................................................................ 211 Delete All Collections................................................................................................. 212

Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview ............................................... 212

Table of Contents


Measurement Collections Dialog Box ........................................................................ 213 Create a New Measurement Collection ...................................................................... 217 Edit a Measurement Collection................................................................................... 217

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................. 218 Communicating with Tags: An Overview ............................................................ 218

Place Tag With Leader................................................................................................ 219 Place Tag Without Leader........................................................................................... 220 Edit Tag....................................................................................................................... 221 Delete Tag ................................................................................................................... 221 Find Tag ...................................................................................................................... 222 Next Tag...................................................................................................................... 222 Previous Tag................................................................................................................ 223 Go To Tag ................................................................................................................... 223 Activate Display of Tags............................................................................................. 224 Display Active Tag Only ............................................................................................ 224 Display All Tags ......................................................................................................... 224 Display No Tags.......................................................................................................... 225 Display Action Comments .......................................................................................... 225 Import Tags ................................................................................................................. 225 Edit Tags Dialog Box.................................................................................................. 226 Delete Tag Dialog Box................................................................................................ 226 Find Tags Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 227 Show Matches Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 227 Go To Tag Dialog Box................................................................................................ 227

Placing Data Annotations: An Overview.............................................................. 228 Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................... 228 Create a Data Annotation............................................................................................ 230 Edit a Data Annotation File ........................................................................................ 231 Edit a Data Annotation Position ................................................................................. 231 Display Data Annotations ........................................................................................... 232 Delete Data Annotations ............................................................................................. 232

Attaching External Data: An Overview ................................................................ 233 The Get External Data Database................................................................................. 233 Attach External Data to a PDS Project ....................................................................... 235 Edit Types ................................................................................................................... 237 Edit Attachments Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 238 Getdata Filename / Argument Dialog Box.................................................................. 238 Edit Types Dialog Box................................................................................................ 238

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview.......................................................... 240 Default Material Palette ........................................................................................ 241

Assign Materials to Elements ..................................................................................... 242 Create Materials from Color Table ............................................................................. 243 Define Search Path for Material Files......................................................................... 244 Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box.................................................................. 244 Edit Materials Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 246 Adjust Pattern Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 249 Adjust Bump Dialog Box............................................................................................ 250

Table of Contents


Create Materials Dialog Box....................................................................................... 251 Search Path Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 252

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview................................................... 254 Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview....................................................... 254

Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box............................................................................ 255 Background Option (Environment Tab) ..................................................................... 256 Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab).............................................................. 257 Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab).................................................................. 258 Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) ....................................................... 258 Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) ........................................................... 260 Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab) ................................................................................... 260 Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab)................................................................................ 261 Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab).................................................................. 263 Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab) ................................................................................. 263 OpenGL Lighting ........................................................................................................ 264

Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview.......................................................... 266 Global Lighting Dialog Box........................................................................................ 266 Time Zones Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 269 World Map Dialog Box............................................................................................... 270 Cities Dialog Box........................................................................................................ 271 Solar Vector Dialog Box............................................................................................. 271 Set Global Lighting..................................................................................................... 272

Placing Source Lights: An Overview.................................................................... 273 Place a Source Light ................................................................................................... 273 Edit a Source Light ..................................................................................................... 274 Delete Source Light .................................................................................................... 275 Lighten Shadows......................................................................................................... 275 New Source Light Dialog Box.................................................................................... 276 Edit Source Lights Dialog Box ................................................................................... 282 Delete Source Lights Dialog Box ............................................................................... 283

Raytracing: An Overview...................................................................................... 283 Raytrace a View .......................................................................................................... 284 Define a Raytrace Range............................................................................................. 284 Edit Raytracing Options.............................................................................................. 285

Detecting Collisions: An Overview ........................................................................... 286 Collision Detection Dialog Box............................................................................ 288

Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ..................................................... 288 Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ........................................................ 289 Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ............................................. 291 Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box).............................................................. 292 Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)............................................................. 293 Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ................................................................ 294 Select Filters for Collision Types ............................................................................... 295 Select Graphic Element Types.................................................................................... 296 Select Objects and Range............................................................................................ 297 Select Collision Display Colors .................................................................................. 298 Select Collision Sounds .............................................................................................. 299

Table of Contents


Run Collision Detection.............................................................................................. 300 Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box ................................................... 301

View Collision Reports............................................................................................... 302

Collaborating with Others: An Overview................................................................ 304 Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review............................................................... 305 Passenger Settings....................................................................................................... 306 Collaboration Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................. 307 Establish a Collaboration Session............................................................................... 308 Rejoin a Collaboration Session................................................................................... 309 Edit Collaboration Settings ......................................................................................... 310

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ...................................................................... 311 ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box .................................................................. 312

Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) .................................................. 312 Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) ........................................... 313 Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) ............................................ 314 Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)............................................... 315 Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) ................................................. 316 Set ScheduleReview Project Settings ......................................................................... 317 ScheduleReview Task Symbology.............................................................................. 318 Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings.................................................................... 318 Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings ...................................................................... 319 Set ScheduleReview Review Settings......................................................................... 320 Create a New ScheduleReview Project....................................................................... 320 Delete a ScheduleReview Project ............................................................................... 321 Set Active ScheduleReview Project............................................................................ 321 Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project .................................................................... 321 Import ScheduleReview Project.................................................................................. 322 ScheduleReview Auto Association............................................................................. 322 Add a ScheduleReview Association ........................................................................... 323 Remove a ScheduleReview Association..................................................................... 323 Create a ScheduleReview Query................................................................................. 323 Edit a ScheduleReview Query .................................................................................... 324

New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box............................................................. 326 Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box.............................................................. 327 Task Symbology Dialog Box ................................................................................ 328 Auto-Association Dialog Box............................................................................... 329 Add Association Dialog Box ................................................................................ 330 New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box ........................................................... 330 Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box ....................................................... 330 Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box........................................................ 331 Utilizing ScheduleReview Controls: An Overview .............................................. 331

ScheduleReview Play.................................................................................................. 331 ScheduleReview Pause................................................................................................ 332 ScheduleReview Stop.................................................................................................. 332 ScheduleReview Forward ........................................................................................... 333 ScheduleReview Back................................................................................................. 333 ScheduleReview Go To Start ...................................................................................... 334

Table of Contents


ScheduleReview Go To End ....................................................................................... 334 ScheduleReview Go To Date ...................................................................................... 335 ScheduleReview Record ............................................................................................. 335 ScheduleReview Percent Complete ............................................................................ 336

Printing: An Overview............................................................................................... 337 Change Page Setup Options ........................................................................................ 337 Quick Print the Main View ......................................................................................... 338 Quick Print the Full View ........................................................................................... 338 Print the Main View at a High Resolution.................................................................. 339

Page Setup Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 340 Print Preview Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 341 Print Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 342

Using Accessories: An Overview............................................................................... 344 Modifying the Accessories Menu ......................................................................... 344 Starting Programs Automatically.......................................................................... 346 Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview..................... 346

Place Annotation Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 347 Place Text Annotations ............................................................................................... 347 Move Text Annotations .............................................................................................. 348 Edit Text Annotations ................................................................................................. 349 Delete Text Annotations ............................................................................................. 349 Display Text Annotations ........................................................................................... 350

Setting Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE): An Overview ........................................ 350 Set Window Size Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 350 Set Window Size ......................................................................................................... 351

Creating Display Set Movement (MOVEDSET.EXE): An Overview ................. 351 Move Display Set Dialog Box .................................................................................... 353 Move and Rotate Display Sets .................................................................................... 354

Command Reference: An Overview ......................................................................... 356 File Menu .............................................................................................................. 356

Open Command (File Menu) ...................................................................................... 356 Save Command (File Menu) ....................................................................................... 357 Save As Command (File Menu).................................................................................. 357 Import Display Sets Command (File Menu) ............................................................... 358 Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu) .......................................... 359 Import Tags Command (File Menu) ........................................................................... 359 Export Display Sets Command (File Menu)............................................................... 359 Export ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu) .......................................... 360 Export Tags Command (File Menu) ........................................................................... 360 Page Setup Command (File Menu) ............................................................................. 361 Print Preview Command (File Menu) ......................................................................... 361 Print Command (File Menu) ....................................................................................... 361 Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)............................................................... 362 Exit Command (File Menu) ........................................................................................ 362

Edit Menu.............................................................................................................. 363

Table of Contents


Undo Command (Edit Menu)...................................................................................... 363 Redo Command (Edit Menu) ...................................................................................... 363 Cut Command (Edit Menu)......................................................................................... 363 Copy Command (Edit Menu)...................................................................................... 364 Paste Command (Edit Menu) ...................................................................................... 364 Find Object Command (Edit Menu) ........................................................................... 365

View Menu............................................................................................................ 366 All to Model Command (View Menu)........................................................................ 366 View to Model Command (View Menu) .................................................................... 366 View to Object Command (View Menu) .................................................................... 366 View to Volume Command (View Menu).................................................................. 367 View to Display Set Command (View Menu) ............................................................ 367 View by Eye Point Command (View Menu) .............................................................. 367 View by Center Point Command (View Menu).......................................................... 368 Eye Point Only Command (View Menu).................................................................... 368 Center Point Only Command (View Menu) ............................................................... 369 Zoom In 1.5 Command (View Menu)......................................................................... 369 Zoom In 2.0 Command (View Menu)......................................................................... 369 Zoom In 4.0 Command (View Menu)......................................................................... 370 Zoom Out 1.5 Command (View Menu) ...................................................................... 370 Zoom Out 2.0 Command (View Menu) ...................................................................... 371 Zoom Out 4.0 Command (View Menu) ...................................................................... 371 Settings Command (View Menu)................................................................................ 372 Display Commands: An Overview.............................................................................. 372 Wireframe Command (View Menu) ........................................................................... 374 Wireframe, Hidden Line Command (View Menu) ..................................................... 374 Flat Shading Command (View Menu) ........................................................................ 374 Coarse Facets Command (View Menu) ...................................................................... 375 No Specular Command (View Menu)......................................................................... 375 Full Shading Command (View Menu) ........................................................................ 375 Object Textures Command (View Menu)................................................................... 376 Backfaces Command (View Menu) ............................................................................ 376 End Caps Command (View Menu) ............................................................................. 377 Annotations Command (View Menu)......................................................................... 377 Measurements Command (View Menu) ..................................................................... 377 Axis Command (View Menu) ..................................................................................... 377 Dashed View Cone (View Menu)............................................................................... 378 Perspective Command (View Menu) .......................................................................... 378 Perspective Angle Command (View Menu) ............................................................... 378 Wireframe Background Color Command (View Menu)............................................. 378 Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu).............................................................. 379 Direction Command (View Menu) ............................................................................. 379 Ambient Command (View Menu)............................................................................... 379 Brightness Command (View Menu) ........................................................................... 379 Range Rejection Activate Command (View Menu) ................................................... 380 All Command (View Menu) ....................................................................................... 380 Main Command (View Menu) .................................................................................... 380 Plan Command (View Menu) ..................................................................................... 381 Elevation Command (View Menu) ............................................................................. 381 Show Settings Command (View Menu) ..................................................................... 381 Advanced Commands: An Overview.......................................................................... 382

Table of Contents


Redraw on Refresh Command (View Menu).............................................................. 383 Buffer Updates Command (View Menu).................................................................... 383 Stereo Activate Command (View Menu).................................................................... 383 Distances Command (View Menu)............................................................................. 384 Left View Command (View Menu) ............................................................................ 384 Right View Command (View Menu) .......................................................................... 385 Far to Near Clip Ratio Command (View Menu)......................................................... 385 NetMeeting Command (View Menu) ......................................................................... 385 Elumens Activate Command (View Menu) ................................................................ 386 Elumens Settings Command (View Menu)................................................................. 386 Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu)....................................................... 386 Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu) ..................................................... 387 New Point Light Command (View Menu).................................................................. 387 New Distant Light Command (View Menu)............................................................... 388 New Spot Light Command (View Menu) ................................................................... 388 Edit Source Light Command (View Menu) ................................................................ 389 Delete Source Light Command (View Menu) ............................................................ 389 Raytrace Command (View Menu) .............................................................................. 389 Raytrace Range Command (View Menu) ................................................................... 390 Save and Recall Command (View Menu)................................................................... 391 Snapshot Command (View Menu).............................................................................. 391 Full Screen Command (View Menu) .......................................................................... 392 Toolbars: An Overview............................................................................................... 392 Standard Toolbar......................................................................................................... 392 Common Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 393 Tools MiniBar ............................................................................................................. 395 ScheduleReview Toolbar ............................................................................................ 396 Views Toolbar............................................................................................................. 397 Tools Toolbar.............................................................................................................. 398 Motion Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 399 Tags Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 401 Window Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 402 Photo-Realism Toolbar ............................................................................................... 403 Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu) .................................................... 404 Perspective Toolbar..................................................................................................... 404 Encircle Radius Toolbar ............................................................................................. 405 Using Key-In Commands ............................................................................................ 405 Customizing Toolbars: An Overview ......................................................................... 405 Customize Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 406 Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 406 Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) ................................................................... 407 New Toolbar Dialog Box............................................................................................ 407 Create a Toolbar.......................................................................................................... 408 Reset a Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 408 Using the Status Bar: An Overview............................................................................ 409 Status Bar Command (View Menu)............................................................................ 409 Show or Hide the Status Bar ....................................................................................... 409 Project Manager Command (View Menu).................................................................. 410

Tools Menu ........................................................................................................... 411 Show Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................................... 411 Shade Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................................. 411

Table of Contents


Dim Command (Tools Menu) ..................................................................................... 411 Material Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................................. 412 Move Command (Tools Menu)................................................................................... 412 Show Only Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................... 413 Hide Only Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................................... 413 Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu).................................................................... 414 Display Sets Assign Material Command (Tools Menu) ............................................. 414 Edit Position Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................... 415 Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu)........................................................................ 416 Folder Command (Tools Menu).................................................................................. 416 Display Set Command (Tools Menu) ......................................................................... 416 Display Sets Delete Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................ 417 Rename Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................... 417 By Name Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................. 417 By ID Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................................. 418 Reverse Dim Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................... 418 Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu)................................................................. 418 Edit Materials Command (Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box)...................... 419 Create Materials Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................. 420 Snaplock Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................................. 421 Surface Command (Tools Menu)................................................................................ 421 Move Measurement Command (Tools Menu) ............................................................ 422 Restore Position Command (Tools Menu).................................................................. 422 Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu) .................................................................. 423 New Collection Command (Tools Menu)................................................................... 423 Delete Last Measurement Command (Tools Menu)................................................... 423 Delete Active Collection Measurements Command (Tools Menu)............................ 424 Delete All Measurements Command (Tools Menu) ................................................... 424 Delete All Collections Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................ 424 Hide Level Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................... 424 Level Settings Command (Tools Menu) ..................................................................... 425 Collision Detection Command (Tools Menu)............................................................. 425 Display Order Command (Tools Menu) ..................................................................... 426 ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu) ................................................... 427 Query New Command (Tools Menu).......................................................................... 427 Query Edit Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................... 428 Review Play Command (Tools Menu)........................................................................ 428 Review Pause Command (Tools Menu) ..................................................................... 429 Review Stop Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................... 429 Forward Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................................. 429 Back Command (Tools Menu).................................................................................... 430 Go To Start Command (Tools Menu) ......................................................................... 430 Go To End Command (Tools Menu) .......................................................................... 430 Go To Date Command (Tools Menu) ......................................................................... 431 Record Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................................ 431 Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................. 431 Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu)................................................................ 432 Add Association Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................. 432 Remove Association Command (Tools Menu)........................................................... 433 New Project Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................................ 433 Delete Project Command (Tools Menu) ..................................................................... 433

Table of Contents


Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu)............................................................... 434 Refresh Active Project Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................... 434 Data Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu) .................................................... 434 Data Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu).......................................................... 435 Delete One Command (Tools Menu).......................................................................... 435 Delete All Command (Tools Menu) ........................................................................... 435 Refresh Data Command (Tools Menu) ....................................................................... 435 Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu) ................................................................ 436 Edit Types Command (Tools Menu)........................................................................... 436 Open Database Command (Tools Menu).................................................................... 436 Collaboration Run Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................. 437 Collaboration Edit Command (Tools Menu) .............................................................. 437

Motion Menu......................................................................................................... 438 Eye Point Command (Motion Menu).......................................................................... 438 Display Set Command (Motion Menu)....................................................................... 439 Continuous Command (Motion Menu)....................................................................... 439 Single Step Command (Motion Menu) ....................................................................... 440 Toggle Step Direction Command (Motion Menu)...................................................... 440 Motion Settings Command (Motion Menu)................................................................ 441 Auto-Highlight Command (Motion Menu)................................................................. 441 Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu)................................................ 442 Pan Command (Motion Menu) ................................................................................... 442 Rotate Command (Motion Menu)............................................................................... 443 View Cube Command (Motion Menu) ....................................................................... 443 Priority Mode Command (Motion Menu)................................................................... 444 Center Mode Command (Motion Menu) .................................................................... 444 Positioning Modes Command (Motion Menu) ........................................................... 444 Lateral Command (Motion Menu) .............................................................................. 445 Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu).......................................................... 445 Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu) .............................................................. 446 Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu)............................................................... 447 Clip to Encircle Sphere Command (Motion Menu).................................................... 448 Maintain Encircle Clipping Command (Motion Menu) ............................................. 448 View Dependent Command (Motion Menu) .............................................................. 449 View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu) ................................................... 449 View Independent Command (Motion Menu) ............................................................ 449 Plant North Command (Motion Menu)....................................................................... 450 Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar)....................................................... 450 Key Frame Play Command (Motion Menu) ............................................................... 451 Key Frame Pause Command (Motion Menu) ............................................................. 451 Key Frame Stop Command (Motion Menu) ............................................................... 451 Snapshot Command (Motion Menu)........................................................................... 452

Tags Menu............................................................................................................. 453 Leader Command (Tags Menu) .................................................................................. 453 No Leader Command (Tags Menu) ............................................................................ 453 Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu) .............................................................................. 454 Tags Delete Command (Tags Menu) .......................................................................... 454 Tags Find Command (Tag Menu)............................................................................... 454 Next Command (Tag Menu) ....................................................................................... 455 Previous Command (Tags Menu) ............................................................................... 455 Go To Command (Tags Menu) ................................................................................... 456

Table of Contents


Display Activate Command (Tags Menu) .................................................................. 456 Active Only Command (Tags Menu).......................................................................... 456 Display All Command (Tags Menu)........................................................................... 457 Display None Command (Tags Menu) ....................................................................... 457 Action Comments Command (Tags Menu) ................................................................ 457

Accessories Menu ................................................................................................. 458 Load Accessories Command (Accessories Menu)...................................................... 458

Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview..................... 458 Move Command (Accessories Menu)......................................................................... 459 Text Annotations Edit Command (Accessories Menu) .............................................. 459 Moving or Editing Text Annotations .......................................................................... 459 Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview .............................................. 460 Place One Command (Accessories Menu).................................................................. 461 Place Many Command (Accessories Menu) ............................................................... 461 Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview............................................. 461 Delete One Command (Accessories Menu)................................................................ 462 Delete All Command (Accessories Menu) ................................................................. 462 Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview............................................................... 462 Display On Command (Annotations Menu) ............................................................... 463 Display Off Command (Annotations Menu)............................................................... 463 Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu) ...................................................... 463 Move Display Set Command (Accessories Menu) ..................................................... 464 Paint Command (Accessories Menu).......................................................................... 464

Window Menu....................................................................................................... 465 Arrange All Command (Window Menu) .................................................................... 465 Refresh All Command (Window Menu)..................................................................... 465 Refresh Command (Window Menu) ........................................................................... 465 Pane Layout Command (Window Menu) ................................................................... 466 Single Command (Window Menu) ............................................................................. 466 Three Command (Window Menu) .............................................................................. 467 Four Command (Window Menu)................................................................................ 467 Restore Command (Window Menu) ........................................................................... 467

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................... 468 Solutions to Common Problems ........................................................................... 468 System Performance Tips ..................................................................................... 471 Accessing Support Resources ............................................................................... 472

Index ............................................................................................................................ 474

Preface


Preface This document is a user’s guide for SmartPlant Review 4.2.2. It explains various procedures and commands needed to review a complex model.

This user’s guide is intended for users who are experienced with computer fundamentals. Knowledge of 3D design systems is helpful, but not necessary.

Designed as a reference, this guide’s organization does not strictly follow a typical SmartPlant Review workflow. For the first-time user, it provides a step-by-step description of using SmartPlant Review. For a more experienced user, it serves as a reference tool for information on a specific topic.

Introducing SmartPlant Review


Introducing SmartPlant Review Intergraph® SmartPlant® Review provides a robust set of review-oriented tools for the clear and concise communication of spatial design. Going beyond low-end viewer capabilities, SmartPlant Review provides tools for visual analysis and simulation (dynamic walk through), tagging, and model queries, as well as an API for complete customization. Advanced features include construction simulation, stereo viewing, and sophisticated image generation using textures, reflection maps, and lighting. The familiar, easy-to-use Windows ® interface allows you to navigate through the 3D models with a joystick, mouse, or keyboard control.

SmartPlant Review displays and manipulates Intergraph Plant Design System (PDS) 3D models as well as AutoCAD®, MicroStation®, and ACIS® SAT files without translation and is specifically designed to meet the process and power industry's requirements to dynamically visualize computer-generated 3D plant models. With SmartPlant Review walk-through and interrogation features, process plant models can now remain live throughout the life cycle of the facility from conceptual design studies to de-commissioning.

What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2? The following new functionality and changes can be found in this version of SmartPlant Review.

New Eye Point Adjustment Behavior - To help eliminate the perceived View Cone jumpiness while adjusting Far and Near clipping planes in the Plan and Elevations views, the defaults for delaying the activation of the eye point mouse drag are increased to an 8 pixel buffer zone (8 pixels in every direction) and 1.0 seconds.

New Positioning Mode Commands - To maintain clipping plane settings when entering or exiting the Encircle positioning modes, the follow toggle commands have been added to the Motion > Positioning Modes menu.

• Clip to Encircle Sphere - When toggled On (the default), the Far clipping plane clips to the encircle sphere and the Near clipping plane is turned off whenever you enter one of the Encircle positioning modes. When toggled Off, the Far and Near clipping planes will not be reset when entering one of the Encircle positioning modes.

• Maintain Encircle Clipping - When toggled On (the default), all clipping plane values set in any of the Encircle positioning modes are maintained when you return to the Lateral positioning mode. When toggled Off, all clipping plane values set in any of the Encircle positioning modes are reset when you return to the Lateral positioning mode to the values they had before entering any of the Encircle positioning modes.



Position Control Update - When using any Encircle positioning mode, the View Cone now rotates about the center point by default, instead of eye point, when a Bearing or Elevation control is used. This behavior is similar to the Position Control behavior in DesignReview. To rotate about the eye point, press the Ctrl key while using a bearing or elevation angle control.

Display Set Color Correction Utility - Corrects a minor problem involving reversed red/green pixels in the display set color swatches (the little colored squares by the display sets in the Project Manager display set tree) in project databases created prior to version 4.2. See the README file in the ..\SmartPlant Review\Utilities\DisplaySetColor folder on your computer for more information about using this utility.

Merge Tag Utility - Allows you to merge multiple tag files into a single tag file. This utility helps you to identify duplicate tags and handle the resolution of these duplicates. See the README file in the ..\SmartPlant Review\Utilities\TagMerge folder on your computer for more information about using this utility.

SmartPlant Review User's Guide - The SPR online Help file is now available in a manual-like layout in .pdf format. During product installation, the SPRUsersGuide.pdf file is delivered to the ..\SmartPlant Review\resdlls\0009 folder on your computer.

Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes, page 138 • Position Control Changes, page 29 • Set Clipping Planes, page 116

Using SmartPlant Review Modules: An Overview The following add-in modules further enhance the functionality found in SmartPlant Review.

Tip

• To see which modules are currently installed on your computer, click the Modules list on the About SmartPlant Review dialog box available on the Help menu.



API Module The Application Programming Interface (API) module includes programming libraries that allow developers to create custom programs that run with SmartPlant Review. The API module is not a requirement to run the custom programs, only to create a custom program for SmartPlant Review. The online SmartPlant Review Programmers Guide contains a complete list of function calls and programming examples.

Key Features: • API Library - The API is a C library function interface that can be

linked into your application program to control SmartPlant Review functions. These functions give your applications direct control over the working of SmartPlant Review instead of just sending commands that a user would enter. This gives your application more control and flexibility. Your VB programs may also be linked in a similar fashion.

• Save VUE file - Ability to create a VUE file while inside SmartPlant Review. This does not include the ability to create VUE files in a batch mode.

• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Includes support for standard output types like bmp and jpg.

Related Topics • Save As a .VUE File, page 39 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202 • Using Accessories: An Overview, page 344

Collaboration Module SmartPlant Review's Collaboration module allows multiple users in different locations to view and interrogate the model simultaneously. The Collaboration module allows enterprise-wide coordination of design reviews for more effective communication and improved efficiency. This feature reduces travel time and expenses.

This module serves to enhance both SmartPlant Review and NetMeeting as an add-on service to both products. The collaboration module extends the use of NetMeeting by reducing network traffic and improving performance during the session.



Key features: • Collaboration - Lets all team members join efforts by working

together in a single design review session. You can analyze the three-dimensional model and data as the driver or become a passenger by passing control to someone at another location. Everyone sees the latest version of the model and everyone sees the same thing.

• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

Benefits of Collaboration module: • Reduces administration and training costs as an add-on feature to

NetMeeting. The NetMeeting toolkit allowed customization of NetMeeting to accommodate SmartPlant Review and the extensive data requirements of the process industry. The basic capabilities of NetMeeting include security, network neighborhood, white boarding, chat, cursor tracking, passenger and driver controls. Customization provides improved performance and reduced network traffic.

• Improves performance with no waiting for a large set of pixels to distribute through the network each time that the view changes. The software updates the view immediately when a small set of instructions reach the passenger computer. Processing occurs at each passenger computer so performance depends on each computer - not the network. This feature allow the Collaboration module to support dynamic navigation with the mouse or joystick at all passenger computers. All participants see the entire collection of data with no waiting.

• Reduces network traffic. This improvement occurs because only small sets of instructions transmit to each passenger computer. The result is excellent response times and allows collaboration even to remote locations that have less than ideal network connections.

Related Topics • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • NetMeeting Command (View Menu), page 385 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305



Construction Module The Construction module extends SmartPlant Review's capabilities with integrated project scheduling and collision detection functionality. For project scheduling, ScheduleReview turns data from your project planning software into a visual display of the construction or demolition progress. Use ScheduleReview together with the collision detection functionality to plan safe and timely equipment installation. Review collisions as equipment moves dynamically through the plant. Hear sounds and see objects highlight as collisions occur. ScheduleReview supports two popular planning programs: Primavera Project Planner® and Microsoft® Project.

Key features: • ScheduleReview - Helps analyze and visualize the process by

showing objects in the context of the overall project schedule. You can display the project as it should appear on a specified day, or fly through the model while displaying the construction sequence. It also allows you to visualize the construction or demolition cycle in a single step - by day, week, or month - or continuously. ScheduleReview supports two popular planning programs: Primavera Project Planner® versions 2.0B and 3.0, and Microsoft® Project 98.

• Collision Detection - Includes static and dynamic collision detection. Colliding objects can be highlighted in a user definable color. Users can play a sound file each time objects collide. Collisions can be recorded as an object (or group) is driven through the 3D model with precision controls or moved freely with a mouse or joystick. Collision information is written to a log file for review. Collision detection does not take into account non-model tolerances, such as construction tolerances, or soft boundaries, such as pipe insulation. Collision detection runs only in an interactive mode. Batch processes are not available. For these reasons, collision detection does not replace the PDS clash reporting detection capabilities.

• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

Related Topics • Detecting Collisions: An Overview, page 286 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



On-Site Drawing Generation Module The SmartPlant Review On-Site Drawing Generation module is a powerful, versatile product that allows you to bring design and drawing capabilities from the office to your project site. This module features fast, intelligent hidden line display capability - your drawing maintains intelligence even when displayed in hidden-line mode. The module also improves communication, because you control the way the drawing will appear to others. Additionally, by reducing the time required to process and display hidden line removal from hours to a fraction of a second, the On-Site Drawing Generation Module saves time and money.

This module includes a wizard that places the hidden line view on a drawing border inside the SmartSketch product. You can use the wizard to easily and quickly produce drawings for the engineering design office or the construction site. In SmartSketch, you can update the drawing in several ways:

• Add notes to drawing borders • Insert overlay comments • Quickly print a drawing at a scale that you define • Add symbols

You can combine the On-Site Drawing Generation module with the Simulation and Visual Effects module to create hidden line animations to improve the quality of your presentations.

Key features: • Hidden Line Mode - Provides capabilities of a display model to

navigate the model by using the joystick, mouse, or keypad

• Labels - Assign identifying phrases to objects in the hidden line view with tags, text annotation, and measurements.

• Drawing Package - Includes a full copy of SmartSketch with each module for adding notes, comments, symbols, and drawing borders

• Snapshot - Creates an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

Benefits of the On-Site Drawing Generation module: • Saves time by eliminating the wait for the hidden line display to finish

• Improves communication by presenting your designs in a clear and understandable way as you control the display of the objects in the view and their display method on the drawing

• Easy to use because casual users can navigate the three-dimensional model and quickly produce a hidden line drawing that is ready for printing



Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202 • Using Annotations: An Overview, page 218

Photo-Realism Module SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides features for creating realistic, photo-quality images from a 3D model. A realistic image, rendered using textures, patterns, bump maps, background images, environment boxes, and raytraced lighting, helps you to visualize designs during each stage of the development process and to create powerful presentations that communicate and sell your ideas to clients and managers.

Key features: • Display Textures - Creates a more realistic display by assigning

textures to a materials and then applying them to objects.

• Material Editor - Provides complete material editor functionality for creating new material definitions and palettes.

• Lighting - Supports global (ambient, flashbulb, solar, and fog), spot, distance, and point lights.

• Raytracing - Creates more realistic 3D effects by adding reflections and shadows to images.

• High resolution - Captures the image at high resolution to produce near photo-quality plots of the model.

• Snapshot - Creates an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

• Stereo Viewing - Adds dramatic depth perception to models.

• Patterns Plus CD - Includes several pre-defined material definitions.

Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview, page 266 • Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview, page 254 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202 • Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview, page 254 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview, page 104



Simulation and Visual Effects Module SmartPlant Review's Simulation and Visual Effects module brings life to your 3D model by simulating the placement or removal of equipment, reviewing physical clearances, performing motion studies, and developing complex motion scenarios. This module works with the Construction module to visually simulate the construction process where you can review the simulation on-screen or create animations for output to video.

Key features: • Animation - Create animation paths - one or many - through your

models by defining key frames. Start with an aerial view of your facility, for example, and then dive into it, moving along the animation path for an impressive flythrough. Save your animation at the resolution and size you need, and apply anti-aliasing to produce sharp, clear images. Import animation frames into the non-linear digital video editor product VizFx Web Pro, provided with this module.

• VizFx Web Pro - A non-linear digital video editing product that includes a collection of high-end special effects that you can use to create dynamic and original graphics, animation, and video. Output file types include .avi, .bmp, .gif, .jpg, .pict, .tga, and .tiff. The product includes a wide range of effects categories to include the following items:

12 Deforms,12 Composites,9 Waves,13 Blasts,6 Concentric Blinds,10 Embosses,2 Chromators.

• Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen. Can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

• Snapshot Animation - Used to create high quality animation sequences. Snapshot is compatible with the Construction module for SmartPlant Review to record the simulation of the construction process. Snapshot can be used to create high quality anti-aliased images of any resolution. The module includes support for standard output types like .bmp and .jpg.

Related Topics • Construction Module, page 22 • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview, page 153 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202



Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands much easier to use by making them accessible from the regular menus and toolbars, SmartPlant Review continues to support the Key-In commands found in DesignReview.

For more information about any SmartPlant Review command, click the Search tab in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of the command or browse the Command Reference section in the Help Table of Contents.

For more information about how to get started with SmartPlant Review, you can read the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide (SPRInstall.pdf). This guide is delivered on the SmartPlant Review CD and is installed on your machine during typical and minimal setup.

Backward Compatibility After you open your project in SmartPlant Review, you cannot go back and open the project in DesignReview. There is no backward compatibility between SmartPlant Review and DesignReview.

New Naming Convention for Label Files Label files generated by DesignReview Integrator must be in a name:value format. Although you can output any string from DesignReview Integrator, you can use only those entries in the name:value format.

Project Databases SmartPlant Review no longer uses the various text files that DesignReview used. When you open an existing model document, SmartPlant Review creates a new project database, with an .MDB extension, for you. If your project contains label data, the software also creates an additional database, .mdb2, for your project. These databases have the same name as your project. These databases contain view settings and all other data associated with your project. Each project has at least one database. For more information, see Understanding Project Databases.

Related Topics • Command Reference: An Overview, page 356 • Display Set Changes, page 27 • Function Key Changes, page 28 • Measurement Changes, page 29 • Position Control Changes, page 29 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40 • VUE File Changes, page 30



Display Set Changes SmartPlant Review contains the following display set behavioral changes.

Unlimited number of user-defined display sets DesignReview is limited to 500 user-defined display sets per .DST file. A project can have multiple .DST files, if needed. In DesignReview, the memory for these display sets is allocated during each DesignReview session even if no display sets are defined. SmartPlant Review removes these restrictions by supporting an unlimited number of user-defined display sets and creating a memory management scheme that allocates memory only for those display sets that exist.

Restrictions removed regarding display set user assigned ids In DesignReview, the user cannot assign a display set ID outside the range of 1 - 500. To provide the ability to assign display set ids with meaningful criteria based upon their particular discipline, usually the key in some foreign database table, SmartPlant Review allows the user to determine the numbering for the display sets. The user ID number is no longer restricted to 1-500.

Lowest user ID number determines controlling display set In DesignReview, the display set with the highest user ID number takes precedence. In SmartPlant Review, the display set with the lowest user ID number is the controlling display set.

Do not assign display set user id numbers starting at 1 When assigning display set user id numbers in SmartPlant Review, start display set numbers at a high number to allow manipulation at a future date. Do not start at 1 since a display set with a user ID number = 1 has the highest priority and would prevent you from creating a controlling display set down the road. In other words, the controlling display set would not be able to take priority because the lowest number is already in use. The project length will need to be taken into consideration when the start number is determined. A number of 1000 or greater is recommended.

API interface issues recommend using user ID numbers greater than 512 Reserve user IDs 1 - 512 for SmartPlant Review API custom interface programming. The existing SmartPlant Review API interface does not handle unlimited display sets. If there are no plans for API programming, then those numbers can be used. Please note that this suggestion does not mean the first 512 display sets created, but display sets with user IDs between 1 and 512.



Display set information stored in a database table DesignReview stores display set information in ASCII .dst files. This convention forces you to insure that all files are delivered with a particular project. SmartPlant Review stores display set information in the .mdb2 database along with other project information. All that is needed to publish a project is the .vue and .mdb files.

Related Topics • Defining Display Sets: An Overview, page 174 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview, page 171

Function Key Changes The following table lists the changes from function keys in DesignReview to function keys in SmartPlant Review.

Key Old Command New Command

F2 Full Screen Toggle Assign Materials to Elements

Ctrl + F3 Manipulation Display Sets Move Display Set

F4 Assign Materials to Elements Hide Level (Object)

F5 Main View Settings Refresh

Ctrl + F5 Save and Recall Views Refresh All

F6 Hide Object View Settings

F8 Motion Settings Snaplock Measurement

Ctrl + F8 Measurement Surface Measurement

F11 Copy Main View to Clipboard Full Screen Toggle

Ctrl + F11 Copy Full View to Clipboard Arrange All

F12 Print Main View Collision Detection

Related Topics • Function Keys, page 128



Measurement Changes In DesignReview, you could only measure the distance between two snaplock points or two surface measurement points, and you could only measure between two objects in the current view. DesignReview would not allow you to move to another location in between measurement point selection.

In SmartPlant Review, you can measure the distance between two highlighted snaplock points, two surface points, or a surface point and a snaplock point. SmartPlant Review allows you to move to another location in between the selection of measurement points, and shows you the two points you selected, a line between the two points, and the distance between the points.

Related Topics • Placing Measurements: An Overview, page 207

Position Control Changes The DesignReview Position Control dialog box is now the Position Control toolbar. To display the Position Control toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Position Control. The Position Control toolbar appears docked by default, but can be undocked and moved around in the Main view.

Several commands from the DesignReview Position Control have been moved to other menus and toolbars.

Old Position Control Command

New Commands

Motion Modes Motion > Positioning Modes

Motion > Directional ModesMotion toolbar

Select Display Sets and Reference Points

Project Manager

Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position

Encircle Point View > Place > Center Point Only



Encircle Radius View > Toolbars > Encircle Radius

Step Motion Motion > Move > Single Step

Motion toolbar

View Independent Motion Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent Motion

Motion toolbarSet motion reference angles on the Position Control > Motion tab

Rotate about the Center Point or the Eye Point

When using any of the Encircle positioning modes, you can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. Rotating around the center point is the default. To rotate around the eye point, press Ctrl while using these controls.

Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 113

VUE File Changes If you make new material assignments while running from a VUE file, you must save a new VUE file to retain those new assignments.

The VUE file saves the materials that it had when it was created. You can edit materials while running from a VUE file. The edits are displayed as long as the VUE file is running. However, those edits are not permanently saved to the existing file. You must save a new VUE file and use the new VUE file to see the new material assignments in subsequent sessions of the software.

Related Topics • Command Reference: An Overview, page 356 • Save As a .VUE File, page 39

Getting Started with SmartPlant Review: An Overview



After installing SmartPlant Review, you are ready to start the application and open your model. Before opening your model, you will need to know the location of your model file, the design file search path and the materials search path for any associated palette, pattern, or bump map files.

Related Topics • Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 31 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40

Opening a Model File: An Overview When you open your model for the first time in SmartPlant Review, SmartPlant Review creates a new project database for you (using, by default, the Microsoft Access 97 format). All the data concerning your project is stored in the database. An additional database with an .mdb2 extension is created if the project contains label data.

Related Topics • Open a Model File, page 37 • Open Model from Command Line, page 36 • Refresh Data, page 39 • Save As a .VUE File, page 39

Create Project Dialog Box Allows you to view current database information, including the origin of the database. You can also use the Options tab on this dialog box to set DIR file parameters for PDS large plant monument and DGN file elements.



Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) The following options apply to all model files being opened for review.

Name - Displays the name of the database associated with the project. The name is based on the .dri, .dgn, .dwg, .dxf, or .sat document name. This box is read-only. When using the GUI to create a project database, the path and base file name of the database are always the same as the path and base file name of the project file. From the GUI, you cannot change the name of the database unless you change the base name of the project file. If you change the name of the .dri, .dgn, .dwg, .dxf or .sat document, the Create Project dialog box appears again, allowing you to create a new database. Command line options are available to allow the user to create or use a database in a remote location.

Project schema - Displays the name of the project schema file. The schema file defines the layout of tables in the database. Click the Browse button to select another project schema file. Although the schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.

Label schema - Displays the name of the label schema file. The label schema file defines the table layout in the label database. Click the Browse button to select another label schema file. Although the label schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.

Site Name - Sets the site name. The site name is stored in the site table and helps you to identify the database or its origin. This fact is helpful if you want information from different sites for activities, such as merging tables or tags.

Site ID - Sets an abbreviation for the site name identifier. You can type a maximum of four letters or numbers in this box.

Access 2000 database format - Creates the project database in Microsoft Access 2000 format. If left unchecked, the project database will be created in Access97 format. You will notice a significant file size increase in the Access 2000 files because Access 2000 uses Unicode rather than ANSI format. However, creating the databases in Access 2000 enhances performance. If disk space is limited and other project parameters do not require the use of Access 2000, you may want to create your project databases in the default Access 97 format.

Notes

• SmartPlant Review versions prior to 4.2 cannot use Access 2000 format.

• Although you can open and review the project and label databases in Access 2000, do not edit or alter these files using Access 2000. Doing so will render your databases unreadable by SPR.



• If you open a SmartPlant Review Access 97 database in Access 2000 and you wish to use the database with SmartPlant Review 4.1 or earlier versions, do not convert the database to Access 2000 format. Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by SmartPlant Review versions 4.1 and earlier.

Related Topics • Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 42 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40 • Working with Large Datasets, page 42

Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) The following options affect the transformation and range of the geometry when a Large Plant Monument point is present in the .dri document. These options can also affect the range of the model, impacting Fit and other SmartPlant Review operations for MicroStation and PDS projects.

Use transform - Uses the transform matrix if the PDS project contains a defined large plant monument.

Use old and new origin - Uses the old and new origin for PDS projects if the PDS project contains a defined large plant monument. For each dimension, x, y, or z, the current limit on the maximum new origin is the range -2147483647 to +2147483648. The maximum origin effectively doubles the range of the MicroStation design plane or range cube.

Keep construction text - Uses the construction text in the model. For better view manipulation, do not check this option if you have placed construction text at extreme points in the MicroStation model or PDS project.

Keep lines and line strings - Uses the lines and lines strings in the MicroStation model or PDS project. The model display rate will be slower when this option is used, depending on the number of lines or lines strings in the model.

Important

• Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data such as display sets, tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant monument format to regular format.

Notes

• Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the .set file are read in and used in database creation upon initial readin to SmartPlant Review. These settings include ignore_dri_old_new_origin, ignore_dri_transform, and ignore_construction_text.



• If you do not have a .set file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text settings, you can define it during the initial readin of the initial database creation by selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box.

Related Topics • Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 42 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40 • Working with Large Datasets, page 42

Search Path Dialog Box Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated with your project.

Note

• The Search Path dialog box will appear while SmartPlant Review is opening your design file for the first time if it cannot find, in the Design File Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to the model.

Directory - Allows you to specify a directory containing the pattern or bump map file that you are assigning to the current object.

Browse - Allows you to specify a different directory path.

Search Path - Displays the directories currently in the search path and allows you to add and remove directories, and to re-order the list of directories.

Add - Adds the current directory to the bottom of the search path list of directories to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.

Delete - Removes the selected directory from the search path list of directories to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.

Move Up - Moves the selected directory up one level in the search path list of directories. SmartPlant Review searches first for directories listed closer to the top. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.

Move Down - Moves the selected directory down one level in the search path list of directories. SmartPlant Review searches last for directories listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.



Related Topics • Design File Search Path, page 35 • Open a Model File, page 37 • Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 31

Design File Search Path The Design File Search Path defines where the related .DGN files are stored for your project. This feature allows you to store design files and label data files in a directory other than where the project files are stored. Multiple users sharing the same design data will find this feature useful.

The Design File Search Path is defined in the SmartPlant Review interface (.DRI) file. To use the Design File Search Path feature with your own projects, edit the .DRI file with a text editor such as Notepad.

SmartPlant Review looks for design and label files in the directory paths defined in the .DRI file dgn_search_path entry. Use a semicolon (;) to separate multiple paths. For example:

dgn_search_path{d:\samples\dgndata\example;e:\projects\example;c:\dgnfiles}

SmartPlant Review first searches for the file name as specified in the .DRI file. If the file name is not found, it then looks for the file in the project directory (where the .DRI file resides), then searches in the list of directories in the order given in the path entry. SmartPlant Review reads the first file found and stops the search.

SmartPlant Review assumes that the label file is in the same directory as the design file.

Note

• Defining the Design File Search Path is not the same as defining the search paths to the pattern, palette, or bump map files associated with your project. To define the search paths to these files, use the Search Path dialog box.

Related Topics • Open a Model File, page 37 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40 • Working with Large Datasets, page 42



Open Model from Command Line You can start SmartPlant Review from a command line prompt.

Syntax: SPR.exe [input file] [-a] [-c (y|n)] [-d] [-e (y|n)] [-f (y|n)] [-g (y|n)] [-h (y|n)] [-i database file name] [-j database schema file name] [-k database site name] [-l log file name] [-n database site id] [-o] [-q value] [-r value] [-s] [-t] [-v]

Where: -a Uses PDS area corner clip coordinates from the DRI file.

-c (y|n) Keeps construction text.

-d Specifies that design file is being input.

-e (y|n) Uses DRI file transform.

-f (y|n) Uses DRI file old and new origin.

-g (y|n) Turns on (y) or off (n) the use of Software GL. This option allows you to use the Microsoft generic software OpenGL implementation instead of a specialized hardware video driver. Use this option only as a last resort if there are problems with the hardware video accelerator. This option should be necessary only for video accelerators that do not allow you to turn off hardware acceleration. Most video accelerators allow you to control this option from Control Panel > Display program.

-h (y|n) Keeps lines and line strings.

-i [database full path file name]

Project database file name.

-j [database schema file name]

Project database schema file name.

-k [database site name]

Project database site name field.

-l [log file name] Writes text window data to a log file using [log file name].

-n [database site id] Project database site id field, limited to field size in schema.



-o Turns range rejection off. This option will be overridden by .set file or database settings.

-q [integer value] Specifies the subsequent index allocation in pages. -q 20 recommended.

-r [integer value] Specifies the initial index allocation in pages, 50 pages per MB of design data recommended.

-s Uses default settings (not ones currently in .set file).

-t Skips loading of textures for this session. If you use this flag, you cannot view textures for the entire session.

-v Uses the optional Access 2000 database format to create the project database.

-? Displays this usage statement.

Related Topics • Open a Model File, page 37

Open a Model File 1. Click File > Open. 2. Select the .dri, .dgn, dwg, .dxf, .dgn, or .sat document for which you want to

create a project. 3. On the Create Project dialog box, set the options that you want for the project

and label databases.

Caution

• Be sure to choose the options that you want. The only way to set these options again is to delete the project database files (.mdb and .mdb2) and then re-open the model file to create a new project database. You can also change the name of the model file to start over with a new name.




Notes

• The Create Project dialog box provides options for creating the project and label databases. The project database file has an .mdb extension and the label database has an .mdb2 extension.

• The project and label databases are created in Access 97 by default. Access 2000 is also supported. If you want to create these databases using Access 2000, check the Access 2000 database format box on the Database tab.

• You cannot change the names of the databases. The names are based on the name of the model document.

• The Options tab on the Create Project dialog box displays special options for MicroStation and PDS models.

• SmartPlant Review does extensive range validation on geometric elements in .dgn files. Elements that are off the design plane are considered bad elements. To accommodate large plant monument data, the current validation range is +/- 4294967294 UORs. SmartPlant Review alerts the user to the problem element with a message in the text view. You can log text view messages to a text file for later review.

• If SmartPlant Review encounters a bad element, a message appears in the text view indicating that the software found an element of a particular geometric type. The message also gives the block and byte location of the element in the .dgn file. You can use a tool like MicroStation EDG to repair many bad elements.



Caution

• Although SmartPlant Review continues, in some cases data corruption can occur in RAM.

Related Topics • Open Model from Command Line, page 36 • Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 31



Save As a .VUE File 1. Open the model that you want to save as a .VUE file. 2. Click File > Save As. 3. Type a file name.

Tip

• To avoid confusion, assigning the same name to the .DRI and .VUE files (for example, mymodel.dri and mymodel.vue) is recommended.

4. Select a destination folder. 5. Click Save.

Important

• To use this functionality, you must install the Application Programming Interface (API) module.

Notes

• The Save As command only allows you to save a file in .VUE format. A .VUE file can read in large models, and all of the data associated with the model, in less time.

• If you modify your .DRI file by adding or removing files, you need to start over with this workflow by reading in the .DRI file again. This action confirms that all of the new data related to the .DRI file is properly read in, which allows the .VUE file to save the correct information.

• If you make new material assignments while running in a .VUE file, you have to save a new .VUE file to retain those new material assignments.

Related Topics • Save Command (File Menu), page 357

Refresh Data Click Tools > Refresh Data.

Note

• The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, provides brief messages that state the actions of the software during the refresh operation.

Related Topics • Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321



Understanding Project Databases: An Overview The project database is crucial to any SmartPlant Review session. It contains information regarding on-going modifications to tags and measurements, display sets and saved views, material assignments, project settings, as well as any other project-critical data.

The project database supports information from existing DesignReview or SmartPlant Viewer sessions. During a project's initial creation, information from existing support files (for example, .dvf, .set, .tag, and .dst files) is written to the project database.

When SmartPlant Review initially opens a new 3D model, it creates two project database files. One database file (<project name>.mdb2) contains all PDS label data information linked to in the .drv file, while the other database file (<projectname>.mdb) contains all non-graphical or project information. Because this data must be read into these databases during the initial entry, project load time can be affected. However, this is a one-time occurrence and load time should not be impacted once the project database files exist.

Important

• You should back up the project databases regularly. The .mdb and .mdb2 database files contain all the project data for each project and if the database files are lost or corrupted, you will have to re-open your model file and let SmartPlant Review re-create the database files. Not only will load time be impacted, but all data previously written to ASCII text support files (tags, measurements, display sets, saved views, etc.) will be lost.

• When you open your model document for the first time, the Create Project dialog box opens, allowing you to set several options for the project database.

Notes

• The Create Project dialog box opens only when the model file is being opened for the first time, before the file or project has a database associated with it. After setting these options on the Create Project dialog box, you cannot change these options unless you delete the existing project databases and open the original .dri file.

• Setting these options when the Create Project dialog box opens is especially important when you review MicroStation or PDS projects (especially those containing Large Plant Monument settings) because these options appear only on the Create Project > Options tab. If you do not set these options when you first open the model files in SmartPlant Review project, you will need to delete the newly created databases and re-open the model files to access the Create Project dialog box again.





SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet Access 97 database engine by default to create the project databases. SmartPlant Review also supports Access 2000 and provides an option to create the project databases in the Access 2000 database format when you open your model for the first time.

Caution

• If you open an Access 97 database in Access 2000, do not convert the database to Access 2000 format within Access 2000. Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by Access 97. However, SmartPlant Review can read either format.

• Because Access 2000 databases are much faster than Access 97 databases, use the Access 2000 format databases instead of the Access 97 format. However, Access 2000 is in UniCode, which makes the database file size up to twice as large as Access 97 because the UniCode format doubles the size of text fields. The actual Access 2000 database size will depend on the amount of text data in the database. This change means that if you have a database in the 250-300MB range, the size could increase up to the 500-700MB range with Access 2000. Therefore, if you have the space and need the speed, use the Access 2000 format.


Related Topics • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • Open a Model File, page 37 • Open Model from Command Line, page 36 • Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 42 • Working with Large Datasets, page 42



Working with Large Datasets When you work with large datasets, you can improve the performance of your computer by adjusting the Index allocation. Use the following command-line modifiers to adjust the Index allocation:

• -r specifies that the initial index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-per-page.

• -q specifies that the subsequent index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-per-page.

The initial -r allocation will be executed when the master index is created just before the design data is read in. Any additional allocations will use the -q argument for additional indexes to allocate. For example: SPR.exe -r 15000 -q 20. The previous example command sets up 15,000 pages for indexes. Additional indexes will be available in 20-page increments.

Recommendations • Estimate 50 pages (r and q units) per megabyte of SmartPlant Review

data.

• Set the -r allocation up much higher than the -q allocation. Use this feature cautiously as you do not want to waste memory.

• The default values are -r 75, -q 20 if these options are not used on the command line. This size should accommodate smaller models like the Example model delivered with SmartPlant Review.

Related Topics • Sharing the Project Database Over the Network, page 42 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40

Sharing the Project Database Over the Network SmartPlant Review supports sharing a common project database on a server among multiple users so that all users can share data. Although, by default, the project databases and the graphics are kept in the same directory, you can share a remotely located database among multiple users.

To do this, make sure each user has a VUE file (or any project data set) on their own machines. This way they can share and create tags in a common database and still use VUE files. The VUE file is limited to a single user at a time due to the nature of the file, thus, for best performance, each user should have their own copy of a VUE file. The SmartPlant Review Publisher product is a convenient tool to distribute VUE files to users.

To open your view file with a remote database, use the command line functionality. For example:



SPR "C:\ProjectData\abc\abc.vue" -i "\\LIGHTNING\Database\abc.mdb"

This allows you to use a database on any accessible share or directory. Multiple users can easily have a VUE file on their own machines and a share to a project database so they can have communal tags.

This approach works for all supported file types.

Notes

• For other users to be able to share your project databases, you must give those users read/write permissions to the directory where the databases are stored, read/write permissions to the databases themselves, and read/write permissions to any necessary palette and material files.

• If performance appears sluggish while sharing a database over the network, modify the registry entry for the Microsoft Jet database PageTimeout setting to a value less than the default 5 seconds (for example, 1/2 second). Some users have found that this default value adversely impacts performance for frequent database accesses. Reducing this value may improve performance.Any changes to the registry are at your own risk.

Related Topics • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40 • Working with Large Datasets, page 42

Supporting Other Software: An Overview SmartPlant Review supports the following file types, databases, and software.

MicroStation SmartPlant Review supports Bentley Systems' MicroStation SE 05.07.01.14 and MicroStation/J 07.01.01.57 files.

SmartPlant Review displays MicroStation/J SmartSolids in shaded mode if you change the display setting to Surfaces using the MicroStation/J Change SmartSolid Display tool on the 3D Utilities tool strip prior to opening the project in SmartPlant Review.

AutoCAD • SmartPlant Review supports AutoCAD files through version 14 and

AutoCAD 2000.

• Support also includes AutoCAD solids in .dwg files created as ACIS (.sat file) solids.



• Most common geometry types are now supported.

• Single line and multi-line text are now supported using SmartPlant Reviews standard wireframe font.

While most common geometry types are now supported, there are some limitations. Items not supported include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hatch lines 2. Arrowheads on leader lines 3. Dimensions 4. Line styles 5. True type fonts 6. Arc aligned text 7. Attribute definitions. 8. Image/raster files or wipe out images 9. Paper space entities 10. Special classes or proxy objects 11. Shape files 12. Layer names or number of layers greater than 63. If the number of layers is

greater than 63, the layer number is computed modulo 63, and the geometry will still be displayed.

SAT Files SmartPlant Review supports SAT files ACIS version 5.3 or earlier.

Databases Microsoft Jet Access 97 is the engine used by default for creating the SmartPlant Review databases. Access 2000 is also supported. Therefore, projects can be created using either format.

Planning Software ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft Project 98, Primavera Project Planner 2.0B, and Primavera Project Planner 3.0.

NetMeeting You can establish an online conference among computer users by using Microsoft NetMeeting, Version 3.01. With NetMeeting you can conduct a review session simultaneously with multiple users in different locations. SmartPlant Review offers a Collaboration module that extends the power of a conference by performance improvement, reduction of network traffic, and decrease in response time.



SmartSketch SmartPlant Review On-Line Drawing Generation module supports Intergraph SmartSketch 03.00.89.03 (service pack 1).

Related Topics • Introducing SmartPlant Review, page 18 • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305 • Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files, page 46

MicroStation Design File Working Units When MicroStation 3D based design files are first created, working units are defined. Working units are coordinate units that correspond to the position and definition of a point in a design file. These coordinates appear in the message field as you work in SmartPlant Review. There are a fixed number of points on each axis of a design file. The idea in establishing working units is to make sure that the objects you want to draw can be entered with adequate precision, and at the same time fit in the design plane. Working units include master units (the largest unit in use in a design), sub-units (a portion of a master unit), and positional units (a portion of a sub-unit). Positional units are the smallest degree of accuracy possible in your design. Working units are usually referred to as MU:SU:PU. Most models in SmartPlant Review use feet or meters as master units, inches or millimeters as sub-units, and thousandths of an inch as positional units. For example, in a plant with the following:

MU : feet

SU : inches

PU : .001 inch (one thousandth)

An 8 3/4-foot pipe would be measured as 8:9:0. You can change your working units at any time through using MicroStation.

Related Topics • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Understanding Project Databases: An Overview, page 40

AutoCAD Design File Working Units The AutoCAD translator looks for units saved in the AutoCAD file. In versions prior to AutoCAD 2000, engineering and architectural English units could be saved in AutoCAD design files. If no units are found in the AutoCAD file, then meters are assumed.



Starting with AutoCAD 2000, a more extensive set of units became available and are supported. However, some of the more exotic units such as parsecs, angstroms, and so forth are converted to their equivalent values in meters for measurement. The AutoCAD 2000 "unit less" type is displayed as inches.

Related Topics • Introducing SmartPlant Review, page 18 • Open Command (File Menu), page 356 • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files, page 46

SAT Design File Working Units SAT uses the SATacis.ini file to set your choice of scale units. Because the SAT coordinates are very small, it is important to scale them. The line in this file that SmartPlant Review uses is: Read Default Units=61 SmartPlant Review can read one SATacis.ini file at a time.

Related Topics • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files, page 46

Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files SmartPlant Review now has the ability to open and load .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT file formats. You may manipulate these file types in the same way you manipulate standard SmartPlant Review files (such as .DGN). Following is a brief description of each of these new file types.

• The .DXF format is the standard Drawing Exchange Format file that many 3D design systems use. SmartPlant Review reads 3D .DXF format files directly; you do not need to convert the files to another format.

• The .DWG format is the standard file type for AutoCAD ™. SmartPlant Review reads 3D .DWG format files directly; you do not need to convert the files to another format.

• The Acis .SAT format allows you to exchange intelligent 3D objects and related data between applications.

Related Topics • SAT Design File Working Units, page 46 • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43



SmartPlant Review Files SmartPlant Review accesses and creates several different files that are associated with a model. The descriptions of these files are below:

.dgn The MicroStation-based design files that you bring into SmartPlant Review. Several design files are referenced by one SmartPlant Review interface (.dri) file. For example, model.dri references 40pipe01.dgn, 40eqp01.dgn, sarea39.prp, and others. (A .prp file is another type of design file created by plant design applications.) Each design file can have a label file associated with it. Label files are text files that contain database information. Label files are given the design filename with a three-character extension. For example, in the example model (model.dri), the label files for 40pipe01.dgn, 40eqp01.dgn, and sarea39.prp are named 40pipe01.drv, 40eqp01.drv, and sarea39.drv, respectively.

.dri This is an ASCII text files and the primary way you enter SmartPlant Review. The .dri file references all the design files, label data files, and other files that are associated with a model. You can create a .dri file from scratch or by converting old .pvi files. (See the SmartPlant Review Programmers online help for more information on file formats.) This file is given the model name with a .dri extension.

label data Text files that contain database information about elements in the design file. There is a one-to-one correspondence with the design file. They can have any name, and any extension or no extension. You must use a .dri file to indicate which label files go with which design files.

tagseed.txt An ASCII text file SmartPlant Review uses to establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command. You create this file, and it should be called tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review looks first in the directory specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it isn't found there, SmartPlant Review tries the directories specified by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH variables. If the file isn't found in any of these locations, SmartPlant Review tries c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.

.mat Text files that contain the material assignments to objects in the corresponding design file. There is one .mat file for each design file with material assignments. An example material file might be sarea38.mat. This file would contain the object level and color numbers, along with the material assigned to them. For example, all elements in the file on level 8 with color number 12 might be assigned to bronze. The material file is given the design filename with a .mat extension.



.pal Palette files that contain material definitions. A palette file can be used with a number of models. An example palette file might be metal.pal. This palette file would contain all the material definitions for items such as bronze, iron, aluminum, and so on. Any file with elements using these materials will reference this palette file.

.rgb Intergraph image files with a color file format that stores the red, green, and blue (rgb) data values of a screen image in a single file.

.pvi Files that you can access when you enter SmartPlant Review. This is an old file type that was created by plant design applications and is in a proprietary non-text format. The .pvi file references all the .dgn files, label data files, and other files that are associated with a model.

.vfa Contain the view parameters set up for the model, such as eye point, lighting, and perspective. The file is given the design filename with a .vfa extension. This file is used by the Intergraph ModelView ™ software.

.vue File created in SmartPlant Review. A new container file called .vue rapidly reads in and manipulates data. You can create .vue files from the Save As option within SmartPlant Review. To use this functionality, you must install the API module.

.dwg AutoCAD design file. Because AutoCAD design files do not contain intelligent data with the graphics, label files are not available for use with .dwg files.

.dxf AutoCAD design file. Because AutoCAD design files do not contain intelligent data with the graphics, label files are not available for use with .dxf files.

.sat These files allow you to exchange intelligent 3D objects and related data between applications.

Related Topics • AutoCAD® Design File Working Units, page 45 • MicroStation® Design File Working Units, page 45 • SAT Design File Working Units, page 46 • Supporting Other Software: An Overview, page 43 • Working with .DWG, .DXF, and .SAT files, page 46

Working with Views: An Overview


Working with Views: An Overview The primary SmartPlant Review user interface consists of a set of image displays that appear within views. Images and information are displayed in the following view types.

Main View - Serves as the primary working view and is always displayed (unless the Single pane layout option is turned on and the view is switched from the Main view). Most of the review and positioning changes you make appear here. The Main view can be displayed in either shaded or wireframe form. See View Settings for more information on changing what and how objects display in the Main view.

Plan View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working, your position, and a View Cone. The Plan view displays the top view (how the model appears when you look down on it from directly above) and appears only in wireframe form.

Elevation View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working, your position, and a View Cone. The elevation view displays the front view of the model and appears only in wireframe.

Text View - Displays information appropriate to the current command context, such as, but not limited to, the text for the active tag, label search data, measurement data, and component attribute data. You can copy text from the Text view to the clipboard for pasting into another key-in field or application.

Notes:

• You can resize each view. Views are updated according to the action you are performing in the views. There are times when all the views are updated, and other times when some of the views are not updated. This selective updating improves productivity by avoiding unnecessary image updates.

• The Copy command is available for copying text from the Text view. The Copy command is also available in the graphical views for copying the view image to the clipboard.

• When copying the contents of a graphical view, the focus rectangle, if present, is removed. If the focus rectangle is not present, it is added to the copied image. In other words, the focus rectangle is always redrawn before and after the Copy command. This erases it from the copied image if the view already has a focus rectangle and adds it otherwise.

• You can use the Pane Layout commands to display or cycle through one, three, or all four views.



Related Topics • Arrange All Views, page 50 • Four Pane Layout, page 52 • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53 • Refresh All Views, page 50 • Refresh View, page 51 • Single Pane Layout, page 51 • Three Pane Layout, page 52

Arrange All Views Click Window > Arrange All.

Notes

• Arranges the Main, Plan, Elevation, and Text views to fit the SmartPlant Review window. Arrange All also docks all opened toolbars.

• You can select Arrange All on the Window toolbar.

Related Topics • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • Window Toolbar, page 402 • Working with Views: An Overview, page 49

Refresh All Views Click Window > Refresh All.

Notes

• The Refresh All command redraws all of the views to update the window contents.

• Press Esc to stop a view update in progress.

• Any item, such as a window, dialog box, or toolbar, that overlaps the Main, Plan, or Elevation view during a refresh will be included in the saved (backing store) image. Therefore, to improve system performance and to ensure that you obtain a valid saved image, you should use caution when placing these items.

Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Arrange All Views, page 50 • Refresh View, page 51



Refresh View Click Window > Refresh.

Notes

• The Refresh command redraws the selected view to update its contents.



Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Arrange All Views, page 50 • Refresh All Views, page 50

Single Pane Layout Click Window > Pane Layout > Single.

Tip

• You can also click Single Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or press Shift + 1 on your keyboard.

Notes

• Repeatedly selecting the Single Pane Layout command will cycle through the following alternative layout arrangements:

1. Main view only (default) 2. Plan view only 3. Elevation view only 4. Text view only

• If the Main view is not visible, the Print, Snapshot, and Raytrace Render commands are disabled.

Related Topics • Four Pane Layout, page 52 • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53 • Three Pane Layout, page 52



Three Pane Layout Click Window > Pane Layout > Three.

Tip

• You can also click Three Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or press Shift + 3 on the keyboard.

Note

• Repeatedly selecting the Three Pane Layout command will cycle through the following alternative layout arrangements: 1. Main view in left; Plan view in top right; Elevation view in bottom right

(default) 2. Main view in right; Plan view in top left; Elevation view in bottom left

Related Topics • Four Pane Layout, page 52 • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53 • Single Pane Layout, page 51

Four Pane Layout Click Window > Pane Layout > Four.

Tip

• You can also click Four Pane Layout on the Views toolbar, or press Shift + 4 on the keyboard.

Note

• Repeatedly selecting the Four Pane Layout command will cycle through the following alternative layout arrangements: 1. Main view in top left; Text view in bottom left; Plan view in top right;

Elevation view in bottom right (default) 2. Text view in top left; Main view in bottom left; Plan view in top right;

Elevation view in bottom right 3. Text view in top right; Main view in bottom right; Plan view in top left;

Elevation view in bottom left 4. Text view in bottom right; Main view in top right; Plan view in top left;

Elevation view in bottom left

Related Topics • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53 • Single Pane Layout, page 51 • Three Pane Layout, page 52



Full Screen Display Mode 1. Click View > Full Screen.

2. Click the Full Screen icon to return to the normal display mode.

Notes

• Full Screen mode expands the Main, Plan, Elevation, and Text views to occupy the entire monitor screen.

• If you have a dual monitor system, Full Screen uses both monitors. Turning Full Screen off causes SmartPlant Review to display only on the left monitor of dual monitor systems.

• The menu bar, the toolbars, and Project Manager are hidden when Full Screen mode is activated.

• Full Screen mode is particularly useful to enhance stereo viewing.

• You can also activate Full Screen mode by clicking the button on the Views toolbar or by pressing F11.

Related Topics • Four Pane Layout, page 52 • Single Pane Layout, page 51 • Three Pane Layout, page 52

Changing View Settings: An Overview SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project.

View settings allow you to define simple details, such as the shaded or wireframe background color in the model, as well as more complex settings such as the amount of non-directional light that displays in the model.

The software also provides range rejection options for reducing the number of small graphical elements that SmartPlant Review draws, thus improving display time. You can specify different range rejection criteria for each view.

Related Topics • Define Display Order, page 59 • Maintain Display Options, page 59 • Set Background Color, page 54 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56



Set Background Color 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. Click Edit in the Background color > Shaded box. 4. Click a color. 5. Click OK on the Color dialog box. 6. Click Edit in the Background color > Wireframe box. 7. Click a color. 8. Click OK on the Color dialog box. 9. Click OK on the View Settings dialog box.

Note

• You can also change the wireframe background color by clicking View > Display > Wireframe Background Color.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372

Set Display Tag 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. Select Tags from Options. 4. Click OK.

Note

• The Display Tag command allows you to display the actual tags in the model.

Related Topics • Display Active Tag Only, page 224 • Display All Tags, page 224 • Display No Tags, page 225 • Maintain Display Options, page 59



Set Textures 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. Click Object textures.

Tip

• The textures defined in Material Editor display in the Main view.

Notes

• To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

• If you started SmartPlant Review from a command line using the -t option, you cannot view textures until you restart SmartPlant Review without using the -t option.

Related Topics • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview, page 240 • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372

Set Lighting Intensity 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Select the Lighting tab. 3. Move the Ambient from 0 to 100 slider to change the ambient lighting level. 4. Move the Brightness from 0 to 10 slider to change the brightness level. 5. Click OK.

Notes

• The ambient light is the light that surrounds everything and does not appear to come from a single source in the display. You can set the ambient light from low (0), which displays a darker image, to high (100), which displays a whiter image. A high ambient light level creates lighter shadows, while a low ambient light level creates darker shadows.

• The brightness setting determines the exposure of light on the model which changes the intensity of the image's colors. If you select a low brightness (exposure), the colors become darker. If you select a high brightness, the colors become brighter.

• You can also set the lighting intensity by clicking View > Display > Lighting.



Related Topics • Maintain Display Options, page 59 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56

Set Sun Bearing Angles 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Select the Lighting tab. 3. Move the Horizontal from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting. 4. Move the Vertical from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting. 5. Select Relative to plant north to align light from the plant north setting.

Notes

• Sun bearing angles allow you to determine the horizontal and vertical light angles in degrees.

• You can also set the sun bearing angle by clicking View > Display > Lighting > Direction.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55

Set Range Reject 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Range Reject tab. 3. Select Activate to use range rejection. 4. Type the Main view X coordinate. 5. Type the Main view Y coordinate. 6. Type the Plan view X coordinate. 7. Type the Plan view Y coordinate. 8. Type the Elevation view X coordinate. 9. Type the Elevation view Y coordinate.

Tip

• You can also access the range rejection commands by clicking View > Display > Range Rejection.



Notes

• The objects are rejected both on X, Y and Y, X approximate pixel ranges. In other words, if you reject X=20 by Y=100 you are also rejecting X=100 by Y=20. The pixel ranges given are approximate.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372

Set View Options 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. Click Redraw on refresh to turn this option on or off. 4. Click Buffered updates to turn this option on or off. 5. Click NetMeeting to turn this option on or off. Select the NetMeeting option

only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software.

Tip

• For best performance, clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session.

6. Click Time display to turn this option on or off. 7. Click Perspective to turn this option on or off.

Important


Tip

• You can also access the Advanced commands by clicking View > Advanced.

Notes

• To activate stereo viewing you must have installed the display driver for your graphics card and you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on.

• If the Stereo command is grayed, ensure that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box on the Video Configuration Control Panel in Windows Program Manager.




• If your saved image contains overlapping images that you do not want, make sure items, such as windows, dialog boxes, and toolbars, are not overlapping the view. You can then press Ctrl+F5 to completely redraw the saved image using Redraw on Refresh.

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Module, page 24 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58

Set Stroking Tolerance 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Type a Stroking tolerance. 4. Click OK.

Tip

• You can also set the stroking tolerance by clicking View > Display > Stroking Tolerance.

Notes

• The stroking tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes, flanges, valves, and elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increases the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set View Options, page 57



Define Display Order 1. Click Tools > Display Order. 2. Select the object you want to display first. 3. Continue selecting objects you want to display, in order, until the entire list is

complete. 4. Right-click to save the list.

Tip

• You can also select Display Order on the Tools toolbar.

Notes

• Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are interested in particular elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to display first.

• Only one list can exist at a time. Each time you select this command you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the existing list.

Related Topics • Set Background Color, page 54 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56 • Set View Options, page 57

Maintain Display Options 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. Select the Options to display. 4. Click OK on the View Settings dialog box.

Related Topics • Set Background Color, page 54 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56 • Set View Options, page 57



View Settings Dialog Box Allows you to fully customize the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project.

The default settings allow for a rapid display at a lower stroking resolution. However, the View Settings dialog box contains several tabs that offer options that may affect speed and display quality. You can use these options to choose between a more rapid update with a lower display quality or a slower update with a higher display quality. This choice is similar to that offered on printers with draft quality and letter quality printing. For example, selecting Backfaces and Endcaps on the View Settings > Display tab, gives you a slower update with a higher display quality for views that include pipes, valves, flanges and elbows. On the other hand, leaving Backfaces and Endcaps unchecked, increases the display quality but decreases the update time.

Important

• Turning off Backfaces may cause some special elements to display partially or completely disappear. This occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position.

For faster updates, the following settings are recommended: • On the Display tab, leave Backfaces and Endcaps unchecked.

• On the Advanced tab, enter 16 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 edit box.

• Check Activate on the Range Reject tab.

• From the Window menu, select Single pane layout . This saves rendering time for the other panes.

For the highest quality updates, the following settings are recommended:

• On the Display tab, check Backfaces and Endcaps.

• On the Advanced tab, enter 100 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 edit box.

• On the Range Reject tab, leave Activate unchecked.

You can use these commands in any combination. The default display settings allow rapid movement through the file with a reduction in display quality. For some models, turning Backfaces on and Endcaps off provides a reasonable combination of speed and display quality. In other cases, you may find that the highest display quality is required for the best possible visual appearance.



Display Tab Allows you to modify view display options.

Render Shaded - Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe. This checkbox is not available if you have selected Hidden Line.

Hidden line - Displays the Main view with hidden line wireframe. This checkbox is not available if you have selected Shaded.

Quality - Specifies the quality of the shading in the Main view. You can choose from Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update.

• Full shading, the highest quality for shaded display, produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of the selected color across the surface of the element. This type of shading is also known as "smooth shading the Gouraud Shading algorithm." This type of shading is the slowest to update.

• No Specular also provides smooth shading, but is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface.

• Coarse Facets turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still shaded, but the display of circular objects are very faceted. For example, pipes look like they are composed of flat sides.

• Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors. This is the fastest to update.

Background Color Shaded - Displays the shaded background color.

Wireframe - Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering.

Note

• Click Edit to display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded or Wireframe color.

Tags - Specifies whether or not the tags display.

Active tag only - Specifies whether or not only the active tag displays.

Object textures - Determines whether textures display while you are manipulating the model. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.



Note


Backfaces - Specifies whether or not to display backfaces on valves, pipes, elbows, and flanges in the view.

Endcaps - Specifies whether or not to display endcaps on pipes and other round shapes.

Notes

• Update performance is faster if the Backfaces and Endcaps are turned off. However, turning Backfaces off may cause special elements to display partially or completely disappear. This occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position.

• Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily forced on during display set moves and for all Collision Detection displays. However, all other elements will be maintained and updated according to your specifications in the View Settings dialog box. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and Endcap settings does not affect normal updates or eye movement.

Annotations - Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.

Measurements - Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Only measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.

Axis - Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the top right corner of the view showing which direction is X (East), Y (North), and Z (Elevation). The Y arrow always points in the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view direction.

Levels - Contains a button that displays the Level Settings dialog box. When editing multiple saved views, this group also contains the option to define common level settings for all selected views.

Edit - Displays the Level Settings dialog box, allowing you to specify current level settings for the Main view.

Related Topics • Settings Command (View Menu), page 372 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

View Cone Tab Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. The View Cone changes as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion using the motion/orientation controls.



Eye Point in MU:SU:PU • North - Specifies the eye point position of the View Cone in relation

to the north direction (y coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing a new north coordinate.

• East - Specifies the eye point position of the View Cone in relation to the east direction (x coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing a new east coordinate.

• Elevation - Specifies the height of the eye point of the View Cone in relation to the model (z coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing in a new elevation.

Center Point in MU:SU:PU • North - Specifies the center point position of the Track in relation to

the north direction (y coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing a new north coordinate.

• East - Specifies the center point position of the Track in relation to the east direction (x coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing a new east coordinate.

• Elevation - Specifies the height of the center point of the Track in relation to the model (z coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing in a new elevation.

Clipping Plane distances in MU:SU:PU Near - Specifies the location for the near clipping plane.

Far - Specifies the location for the far clipping plane.

Reference - Displays the real distance from the eye point to the clipping plane center point or just the distance in each particular coordinate. It does not show the actual coordinates of the center point of the clipping plane.

The clipping planes are defined as a distance from the eye point (the plane being perpendicular to the viewing direction). The Reference list lets you see either the real distance from the eye point to the clipping plane center point or just the distance in each particular coordinate. It does not show the actual coordinates of the center point of the clipping planes.

Therefore, when you select Eye from Reference list (the default), Near and Far display the actual absolute distance value from the eye point to the center point of the respective (near or far) clipping plane. When you select North, East, or Elevation from the Reference list, the clipping plane fields display the absolute difference for only that particular eye point coordinate and the center point coordinate of the respective (near or far) clipping plane. The difference between this coordinate and the corresponding coordinate of the eye point defines the distance.



For example, the Eye Point is at 100 North, -500 East, 200 Elevation and is looking straight down. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. To accomplish this, you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15. SmartPlant Review calculates the actual clipping distance to the eye as 185.

When Reference is set to Eye, a value of 0 in Near or Far specifies no clipping for that plane. A 0 in both fields displays the entire model.

Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160 - Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the View Cone. Move the slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command.

Dashed - Displays the View Cone using dashed lines instead of solid lines. The dashed View Cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some notebook computers.

Related Topics • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

Lighting Tab Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded model. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model, which changes the intensity of the image's colors.

Ambient from 0 to 100 - Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. A common percentage of ambient light is 25%.

Brightness from 0 to 10 - Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the intensity of the colors in the image. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a camera. The value for this field is between 0 and 10.

Horizontal from -180 to 180 - Defines the horizontal angle of light coming into the model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0.

Vertical from -180 to 180 - Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0.

Relative to plant north - Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are relative to Plant North.

Related Topics • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60



Range Reject Tab Allows you to disregard very small graphical elements. This improves display time by reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws. You can specify different range rejection criteria for each view.

You specify the range in X, Y pixels for each view. Objects smaller than the range (less than or equal to the dimensions specified) are not drawn. However, you still can highlight these small objects.

Activate - Enables range rejection in any view with non-zero X, Y range rejection settings.

Main view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to reject in the Main View.

Plan view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X pixel size for objects to reject for display in the Plan View.

Elevation view X - Specifies the approximate maximum delta X size for objects to reject for display in the Elevation View.

Main view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y pixel size for objects to reject for display in the Main View.

Plan view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to reject for display in the Plan View.

Elevation view Y - Specifies the approximate maximum delta Y size for objects to reject for display in the Elevation View.

Notes


• You can activate range rejection without changing the settings. If range rejection is on, it is on for all views. You can turn range rejection off for specific views by setting the X, Y pixels for that view to 0, 0.

Related Topics • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Settings Command (View Menu), page 372 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60



Advanced Tab Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review, such as NetMeeting and fine tuning stereo glasses.

Between Eyes - Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2.2:00 if MU is feet; 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). You will need to convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.

Focal - Specifies the distance to the selected object. The Focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects will appear to be coming out of the screen and objects that are further away will appear to be behind the screen.

Redraw on refresh - Redraws everything in the selected view on refresh. For large models, turn off this option for better performance. When this option is off, the backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh. If this option is off and you have dialog boxes or toolbars "floating" over a view, you may see ghost images of the floating item. Press F5 to refresh the view and remove the ghost image.

Buffered updates- Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. When this option is on, you will not see the model being "drawn" during updates.

Notes

• While each option can be used independently, if both Redraw on refresh and Buffered updates options are turned on, the entire view is, on refresh, redrawn to the buffer and then displayed all at once. If neither option is turned on, the backing store is used to repair the view and updates are drawn to the window.





Stereo - Activates stereo viewing. The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option:

• RealiZm or Wildcat graphics card and display driver.

• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes ® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or CE-1).

• CrystalEyes infrared transmitter (model E-1).

• In addition, Electrohome has projection systems that support stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.

Notes

• Stereo Viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.

• Set the video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review.

• If the Stereo option is disabled, verify that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced Video Attributes dialog box in the Video Configuration application in Control Panel.

• If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is grayed out, make sure your video driver is set to stereo. In some driver versions/configurations, the menu selection may be visible, not grayed out, even when the stereo is not enabled on the driver.

• You do not have to remove the StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses when switching between stereo mode and regular mode. SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when you select a menu command or dialog box.

NetMeeting - Specifies whether to enable the NetMeeting display capability for high-end graphics cards like Intergraph RealiZm and Wildcat cards that have private client video drives instead of standard low-end video drivers. Select the checkbox only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software. For best performance, clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session.

Time display - Toggle on to display the time it takes to update the Main view. The update time is displayed in the Text View.

Perspective - Specifies whether to display the perspective information.



Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 - Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes, flanges, valves, and elbows. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increases the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. For faster updates, the recommended tolerance is 16. For the highest quality update, the recommended tolerance is 100.

Far to near clip ratio - Adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards (for example, with some video cards, some elements may appear cracked or pieces of elements may be missing). In most cases, reducing this value using powers of 2 (such as, 1024, 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16) will improve the display quality. If some of your elements have a poor display quality, such as appearing cracked, lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so on until the display quality is acceptable.

Aspect - Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (x to y value). If you recall a view, the aspect ratio is that of the current view. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored.

Related Topics • Edit View Dialog Box, page 89 • Save and Recall Command (View Menu), page 391

Set Brightness Level Dialog Box Specifies the amount of brightness to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0.0 to 10.0.

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the brightness in the model.

Related Topics • Brightness Command (View Menu), page 379 • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55

Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box Specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0 to 100.

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the ambient or ground light in the model.



Related Topics • Ambient Command (View Menu), page 379 • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55

Set Light Direction Dialog Box Specifies the horizontal or vertical direction of light in the model in degrees. The light angle can range from -180 to +180.

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the direction of light in the model.

Next - Accepts the current horizontal value and prompts you for the vertical value.

Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Perspective Angle Command (View Menu), page 378 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • SPR Shortcut Keys, page 130 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, prompting you to specify display rejection criteria for each view.

Main x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view x coordinate.

Main y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Main view y coordinate.

Plan x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view x coordinate.

Plan y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Plan view y coordinate.

Elevation x value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view x coordinate.

Elevation y value - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the Elevation view y coordinate.

Next - Accepts the current values and prompts you for the next requested value.

Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values.



Notes


Related Topics • All Command (View Menu), page 380 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468

Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box Allows you to specify the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects.

Tolerance - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the stroking tolerance. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view update time.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58 • Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu), page 379

Rendering Views: An Overview SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project.

View settings allow you to specify the type of rendering, as well as the display quality of the Main view. You can choose from several shade quality options. These options range from a low to a high display quality. However, a higher display quality requires a longer update time. You can choose the options that best suit your individual needs. For example, you may choose a slower update time with a higher display quality for one model and choose a quicker update time with a lower display quality for another.

Related Topics • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72 • Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 72 • Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 71



Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe You can toggle between shaded and wireframe by using any of these methods:

• Clicking View > Display > Wireframe or Full Shading.

• Clicking Shaded/Wireframe on the Views toolbar. • Right-clicking in the view, and selecting Display > Wireframe or

Full Shading.

Notes

• The Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe command allows you to display the model in shaded form or in wireframe form in the Main view window. The default form is wireframe. You cannot shade an image in the plan or elevation views.

• You can control the amount of time it takes for an image to appear shaded by defining a shading quality on the Display tab of the Edit Motion Settings dialog box. The Quality field defaults to Full Shading, however, you can also choose No Specular, Coarse Facets, or Flat Shading.

• You can click View > Settings to ensure the box next to Shaded under Render is either enabled or disabled.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372

Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line 1. Click View > Settings. 2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Hidden Line in the Render box of the

Display tab.

Note

• You can also change the model to hidden line by clicking View > Display > Wireframe, Hidden Line.

Related Topics • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72 • Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 72



Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe 1. Click View > Settings. 2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Hidden Line in the Render box of the

Display tab.

Notes

• When you click Hidden Line, the model changes to wireframe. Neither checkbox is selected now on the View Settings dialog box, because Hidden Line was selected when the dialog box opened.

• Hidden Line mode remains active, even when you recall a saved view. For example, you have a view in Wireframe, Hidden Line mode. When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame animation, the view remains in hidden line mode. You can recall all other settings in the normal manner.

Tip

• You can also change the model to wireframe by clicking View > Display > Wireframe.

Related Topics • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73 • Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 72 • Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 71

Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line 1. Click View > Settings. 2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Hidden Line in the Render box of the

Display tab.

Notes

• When you click Hidden Line, the Shaded option is no longer available.

• Hidden Line mode remains active, even when you recall a saved view. For example, you have a view in Wireframe, Hidden Line mode. When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame animation, the view remains in hidden line mode. You can recall all other settings in the normal manner.

Related Topics • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72



Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded 1. Click View > Settings. 2. On the View Settings dialog box, click Shaded in the Render box of the Display

tab.

Note

• When you click the Shaded checkbox, the Hidden Line checkbox is no longer selected.

Tip

• You can also switch from a hidden line to a shaded view by clicking View > Display > Flat Shading.

Related Topics • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72 • Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 72 • Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 71

Maintain Render Settings 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Display tab. 3. Select Shaded to display the model as shaded in the active display. 4. Select the Quality of shading.

Tip

• You can also also switch between shaded or wireframe modes by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Shade.

Note

• The Quality selections include: Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, or Flat Shading.

Related Topics • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73 • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72 • Switch from Shaded to Hidden Line, page 72 • Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 71



Fitting Views: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides several options for manipulating a view. For example, you can adjust all the windows to display the entire model, adjust only the active window to display the entire model, or adjust the active window to display a selected object or display set.

You can also increase or decrease the viewing area. Decreasing causes everything within the window to appear larger, while increasing causes everything within the window to appear smaller.

In most cases, view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Fit, affect the Active Window only. Therefore, the Active Window must be selected prior to using any of the view related commands.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74 • Fit View to Display Set, page 75 • Fit View to Model, page 75 • Fit View to Object, page 75 • Fit View to Volume, page 76 • Zoom In, page 76 • Zoom Out, page 77

Fit All Views to Model 1. Click View on the Menu bar. 2. From the drop down menu, click Fit. 3. Click All to Model.

Related Topics • Fit View to Display Set, page 75 • Fit View to Model, page 75 • Fit View to Object, page 75 • Fit View to Volume, page 76



Fit View to Model You can fit the view to your model using one of these methods:

• Click View > Fit > View to Model.

• Click Fit View to Model on the Common toolbar.

Note

• The Fit View to Model command adjusts the view window so the entire model is displayed. The View Cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74 • Fit View to Display Set, page 75 • Fit View to Object, page 75 • Fit View to Volume, page 76 • Zoom In, page 76 • Zoom Out, page 77

Fit View to Object 1. Click View, point to Fit, and click View to Object. The software prompts you to

select an object in the model. The pointer changes to crosshairs. 2. Move the crosshairs pointer over the object and click on the object. 3. Left-click again to accept or right-click to reject the object and select the next

object (if any) behind the currently selected object.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74 • Fit View to Display Set, page 75 • Fit View to Model, page 75 • Fit View to Volume, page 76

Fit View to Display Set 1. Select one or more display sets in the Project Manager to fit to the current view.

While clicking, use the Shift or Control keys to select multiple display sets. 2. Click View > Fit > View to Display Set.

Notes

• The Project Manager displays items associated with the model when you open a document. If a model document is not open, the Project Manager does not display any items.



• Double-clicking a display set in the Project Manager displays the Edit Display Set Definition dialog box.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74 • Fit View to Model, page 75 • Fit View to Object, page 75 • Fit View to Volume, page 76

Fit View to Volume 1. Click View > Fit > View to Volume. 2. Place the first 3D point to select the first corner of the volume to which the view

will be fit. 3. Place the second 3D point to select the second opposite corner of the volume to

which the view will be fit.

Tip

• You can also click Fit View to Volume on the Common toolbar.

Note

• The Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume selected. The View Cone in the plan and elevation views adjusts accordingly.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74 • Fit View to Display Set, page 75 • Fit View to Model, page 75 • Fit View to Object, page 75 • Zoom In, page 76 • Zoom Out, page 77

Zoom In 1. Click in the view you want to zoom in (if that view is not already active). 2. Click View > Zoom In. 3. Click the desired detail factor.

Tip

• You can access the Zoom In by 1.5 command by clicking on the Views toolbar.

• You can access the Zoom In by 2.0 command by clicking on the Views or Common toolbars.



Notes

• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time you zoom in, you increase the detail by the chosen factor. For example, if you click View > Zoom In > 1.5, the detail will increase by 1.5 each time you zoom in.

• You can change the Perspective Angle of the Main view to produce zoom effects without changing the Eye Point position.

Related Topics • Zoom Out, page 77

Zoom Out 1. Click in the view you want to zoom out of (if that view is not already active). 2. Click View > Zoom Out. 3. Click the desired viewing area factor.

Tip

• You can access the Zoom Out by 1.5 command by clicking on the Views toolbar.

• You can access the Zoom Out by 2 command by clicking on the Views or Common toolbars.

Notes

• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all the Window Zoom Out commands, except that each time you zoom out, you increase the viewing area by the chosen factor.

• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. You can also produce zoom effects without changing the Eye Point position simply by changing the Perspective Angle of the Main view.

Related Topics • Zoom In, page 76



Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview The Save and Recall Views command allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows, depending on the group. This command also allows you to define the animation path for a movie.

Note

• Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. Thus, you can save a Plan or Elevation view, then zoom in/out or pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view, and then recall the saved view. The model position will be restored as if the zoom and pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point.

You can use the Save and Recall Views command to save any display in the view window that you might want to recall later. Simply save the views (you must set up the view the way you want to save it before you use this command) without a frame number (Frame Number = 0). A frame is a saved view. The frame will not be included in a movie; it is just a still image. You can incorporate the saved view in an animation later by changing the frame number.

You can also create an animation path by saving a series of views displayed in the Main view window. Each frame saves the current view parameters, such as the position of the eye, lighting and the direction the eye is looking. SmartPlant Review uses these parameters and a 4th-Order B-Spline Curve to calculate transitional frames. These transitional frames (or "tween" frames) are used to make a smooth transition from one saved view to the next. You can adjust the number of "tween" frames by modifying frame numbers with addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division.

This list of saved views is only the definition of the path for the movie. To generate raster images for a movie, you must create output images with the View Snapshot or Snapshot Key Frames commands.

Important

• To use the Snapshot Key Frames command, you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.

You save each frame with a name and assign it a number. This frame number determines the order of the saved views and also the number of transitional frames that SmartPlant Review creates between each saved view. The number of transitional frames between each saved view determines the rate at which SmartPlant Review makes the transition from one saved view to the next. The greater the span, the more transitional frames that are needed. Therefore, the longer the transition. If you use this frame list to make a video recording later, remember that 30 frames is equal to 1 second of video.



Use the Display Key Frame Motion command to view the animation path as it would appear in the movie. This command displays those saved views with a frame number greater than zero and the transitional frames. The View Cone updates as the frames advance.

When you create or modify saved views, they are saved to the database.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Recall a View, page 86 • Recall Partial View, page 86

View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates The backing store and buffered updates are completely independent of each other. The backing store is used to quickly repair holes in the display. Buffered updates (also known as double-buffering) control where the graphics are drawn. If double-buffering is off, the graphics are drawn directly to the front buffer and you can watch each element as it is drawn. If double-buffering is on, SmartPlant Review draws to the hidden back buffer. In this case, you will not see the new graphics until the entire display is complete.

The backing store is a picture of the current display. This picture is updated at the end of any command that updates the data (except during Motion commands). Think of the backing store as a piece of wallpaper. Dialog boxes and other application windows that have been on top of SmartPlant Review graphics displays will leave a white hole in the display when dismissed. To repair the hole, SmartPlant Review wallpapers over it with the backing store.

Double-buffering is the a difference in where SmartPlant Review draws the graphics. OpenGL supports a front buffer and a back buffer. The front buffer is what you see. The back buffer is always hidden. If SmartPlant Review draws to the front buffer, you can watch it draw each element. If we draw to the back buffer, you will not see the graphics drawing. When using double buffering, SmartPlant Review draws to the back buffer and "swaps" the buffers when the picture is complete. Double-buffering makes animations and motion look smoother since you do not see the individual elements draw.

Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Set View Options, page 57 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



Rename Group 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a View Group Name. 3. Click Rename. 4. Type a new group name in the To field. 5. Modify the Description for the new group name.

Note

• To use this functionality, you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.

Related Topics • Create Group, page 81 • Delete Group, page 80

Delete Group 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a View Group Name. 3. Click Delete. 4. Click Yes to delete the View group.

Caution

• If you delete a group, all of its saved views are deleted as well.

• You are prompted to verify deletion of the group.

Note


Related Topics • Create Group, page 81 • Rename Group, page 80 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78



Create Group 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Click Create Group. 3. Type a new group Name. 4. Type the Description for the new group name. 5. Select the Type of view. 6. Click OK.

Note

• Use groups to categorize saved views for future reference.

Related Topics • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete Group, page 80 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Move View, page 83 • Rename Group, page 80 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Select All 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Click Select All.

Note

• Select All select all the frames and names under Group Views. To use this functionality, you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects Module.

Related Topics • Create Group, page 81 • Rename Group, page 80



Edit Selected Views 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select the view to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Type a Frame Number. 5. Type a Description. 6. Verify the Eye point settings. 7. Verify the Center point settings. 8. Verify the Clipping Planes settings. 9. Verify the Stereo Distances settings.

Tip

• To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module. 10. Verify the Perspective settings. 11. Verify the Background settings. 12. Verify the Levels settings. 13. Click OK.

Related Topics • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete View, page 82 • Move View, page 83 • Recall a View, page 86

Delete View 1. Click View > Save and Recall Views. 2. Select a View Group Name. 3. Select a Main Views Frame to delete. 4. Click Delete. 5. Click Yes.

Notes

• When the confirmation dialog box appears, click Yes if you do indeed want to delete the view.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Copy a View, page 83 • Move View, page 83



Move View 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a View Group Name. 3. Select a Frame to move.

Tip

• Hold the Shift key and click on views to select multiple frames. 4. Click Move. 5. Select a group to move the frame view To. 6. Click OK.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Recall a View, page 86

Copy a View 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a View Group Name. 3. Select a Frame to copy.

Tip

• Hold the Shift key and click on views to select multiple frames. 4. Click Copy. 5. Select a group or view to copy the frame To. 6. Select the new Group Name to receive the copy. 7. Click OK.

Note

• The Copy button allows you to copy one or more saved views to another group.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Delete View, page 82 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78



Modify Frame Numbers 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select one or more Frames to modify. 3. Click Modify Frame Numbers. 4. Select the Operator (+, -, *, /) to modify the frame number. 5. Type the Amount to modify the frame number.

Notes

• If you want to modify a range of frame numbers rather than just the selected frames, check the Use range instead of the selected frames box and specify a range of frame numbers using the Start and Stop boxes.

• You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box. Once you have applied your changes, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Add Current View 1. Set the view to be saved in the Main View. 2. Click View > Save and Recall. 3. Click Add Current View. 4. Type a View Name. 5. Type a Description for the view. 6. Type a Frame Number. 7. Verify the View Properties. 8. Click OK.

Notes

• You can modify any of the View Properties. If the view is a still image, the frame number should remain at zero (0), which is the default value. If the view is part of an animation, assign the frame number accordingly.

• Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. Thus, you can save a Plan or Elevation view, then zoom in/out or pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view, and then recall the saved view. The model position will be restored as if



the zoom and pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point.

Related Topics • Delete View, page 82 • Fitting Views: An Overview, page 74 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

Set Up Partial View Recall 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Click Setup Partial. 3. Select the settings you want to recall. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• The Setup Partial button configures settings for recalling a partial view.

• Select which view properties you want to restore when recalling a view.

• You should complete these steps before selecting Recall Partial View for the first time.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Move View, page 83 • Recall a View, page 86



Recall Partial View 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a Frame number. 3. Click Recall Partial View.

Notes

• The Recall Partial View button recalls one or more view parameters of the selected view based on the configuration set up using Setup Partial View Recall.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Copy a View, page 83 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Recall a View, page 86

Recall a View 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Select a Frame number. 3. Click Recall View.

Notes

• The Recall View button recalls the selected view.

• Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. Thus, you can save a Plan or Elevation view, then zoom in/out or pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view, and then recall the saved view. The model position will be restored as if the zoom and pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point.

• All prior changes are saved at the time you complete these steps.

Related Topics • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Recall Partial View, page 86 • Set Up Partial View Recall, page 85



Generate a ModelView View File 1. Click View > Save and Recall. 2. Click Generate ModelView View File. 3. Type a ModelView file name.

Tip

• The filename defaults to the same filename as the .dri file but with a .vfa extension.

4. Select a ModelView default view. 5. Select a Saved view group name if you selected Use saved view. 6. Select a Saved view name if you selected Use saved view. 7. Select a View group for ModelView key frames. 8. Select Generate ModelView "DgnData" section if you want to pick a

SmartPlant Review view group.

Note

• The Generate ModelView "DgnData" section allows you to pick a SmartPlant Review view group. All the saved views in the group are included in the ModelView view file as key frames. If you want to render an animation, use this field. If you do not select this field, no key frames are written.

Related Topics • SmartPlant Review Files, page 47

Save and Recall Views Dialog Box Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows, depending on the group. You can also use this dialog box to define the animation path for a movie.

Note


View Group Name - Specifies the name of the active group.

Rename - Displays the Rename Group dialog box, allowing you to rename a group.

Delete - Removes the selected group and any associated views.



Create Group - Displays the Create Group dialog box, allowing you to add a new group.

Description - Displays the description of the selected view in the view group.

Group Views Main views - Specifies the view type associated with the active group.

Select All - Selects all of the saved views in the active group.

Clear All - Removes all of the frames and names listed in Group Views.

Edit - Allows you to change one or more of the saved views.

Delete - Removes the selected group and any associated views.

Move - Moves selected views from one group to another.

Copy - Displays the Copy Selected View dialog box, allowing you to copy one or more of the saved views to another group.

Modify Frame Numbers - Displays the Modify Frame Numbers dialog box, allowing you to change the frame numbers associated with the selected view.

Add Current View - Adds the current view to the active group.

Description - Displays the description of the active group.

Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial View Recall dialog box, allowing you to specify the settings for recalling a partial view.

Recall Partial View - Recalls one or more view parameters from the selected view based on the configuration specified in the Setup Partial View Recall dialog box.

Recall View - Recalls the selected view and then closes the dialog box.

Generate ModelView View File - Displays the Generate ModelView View File dialog box, allowing you to save a new view in the ModelView format.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Delete Group, page 80 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Move View, page 83 • Recall a View, page 86 • Recall Partial View, page 86 • Save and Recall Command (View Menu), page 391



Rename Group Dialog Box Allows you to rename a group.

From - Allows you to enter the name of the view group you want to change.

To - Allows you to enter the new name for the view group.

Description - Allows you to add descriptive text to the new name of the group.

Related Topics • Rename Group, page 80 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Create Group Dialog Box Allows you to create a new group.

Name - Displays the name of the new group.

Type - Allows you to choose the type of the new group.

Description - Allows you to enter a description for the new group.

Related Topics • Create Group, page 81 • Delete Group, page 80 • Rename Group, page 80 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Edit View Dialog Box Provides options for editing one or more of the saved views.

Description Tab Provides options for editing the frame number, name, and description associated with the saved view.

Frame number - Displays and allows you to edit, the current frame number associated with the saved view.

Name - Edits the current name associated with the saved view.

Description - Edits the current description associated with the saved view.



Related Topics • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Edit View Dialog Box, page 89 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Display Tab Allows you to modify view display options.

Render Shaded - Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe. This checkbox is not available if you have selected Hidden Line.

Hidden line - Displays the Main view with hidden line wireframe. This checkbox is not available if you have selected Shaded.

Quality - Specifies the quality of the shading in the Main view. You can choose from Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update.

• Full shading, the highest quality for shaded display, produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of the selected color across the surface of the element. This type of shading is also known as "smooth shading the Gouraud Shading algorithm." This type of shading is the slowest to update.




Background Color Shaded - Displays the shaded background color.

Wireframe - Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering.

Note

• Click Edit to display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded or Wireframe color.

Tags - Specifies whether or not the tags display.

Active tag only - Specifies whether or not only the active tag displays.



Object textures - Determines whether textures display while you are manipulating the model. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.

Note


Backfaces - Specifies whether or not to display backfaces on valves, pipes, elbows, and flanges in the view.

Endcaps - Specifies whether or not to display endcaps on pipes and other round shapes.

Notes

• Update performance is faster if the Backfaces and Endcaps are turned off. However, turning Backfaces off may cause special elements to display partially or completely disappear. This occurs most commonly when the moved display set has been rotated or moved at an angle to its original position.


Annotations - Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.

Measurements - Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Only measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.

Axis - Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the top right corner of the view showing which direction is X (East), Y (North), and Z (Elevation). The Y arrow always points in the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view direction.

Levels - Contains a button that displays the Level Settings dialog box. When editing multiple saved views, this group also contains the option to define common level settings for all selected views.

Edit - Displays the Level Settings dialog box, allowing you to specify current level settings for the Main view.

Related Topics • Settings Command (View Menu), page 372 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60



View Cone Tab Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. The View Cone changes as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion using the motion/orientation controls.

Eye Point in MU:SU:PU • North - Specifies the eye point position of the View Cone in relation

to the north direction (y coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing a new north coordinate.

• East - Specifies the eye point position of the View Cone in relation to the east direction (x coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing a new east coordinate.

• Elevation - Specifies the height of the eye point of the View Cone in relation to the model (z coordinate). You can use this field to change the eye point by typing in a new elevation.

Center Point in MU:SU:PU • North - Specifies the center point position of the Track in relation to

the north direction (y coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing a new north coordinate.

• East - Specifies the center point position of the Track in relation to the east direction (x coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing a new east coordinate.

• Elevation - Specifies the height of the center point of the Track in relation to the model (z coordinate). You can use this field to change the center point by typing in a new elevation.

Clipping Plane distances in MU:SU:PU Near - Specifies the location for the near clipping plane.

Far - Specifies the location for the far clipping plane.

Reference - Displays the real distance from the eye point to the clipping plane center point or just the distance in each particular coordinate. It does not show the actual coordinates of the center point of the clipping plane.

The clipping planes are defined as a distance from the eye point (the plane being perpendicular to the viewing direction). The Reference list lets you see either the real distance from the eye point to the clipping plane center point or just the distance in each particular coordinate. It does not show the actual coordinates of the center point of the clipping planes.

Therefore, when you select Eye from Reference list (the default), Near and Far display the actual absolute distance value from the eye point to the center point of the



respective (near or far) clipping plane. When you select North, East, or Elevation from the Reference list, the clipping plane fields display the absolute difference for only that particular eye point coordinate and the center point coordinate of the respective (near or far) clipping plane. The difference between this coordinate and the corresponding coordinate of the eye point defines the distance.

For example, the Eye Point is at 100 North, -500 East, 200 Elevation and is looking straight down. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. To accomplish this, you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15. SmartPlant Review calculates the actual clipping distance to the eye as 185.

When Reference is set to Eye, a value of 0 in Near or Far specifies no clipping for that plane. A 0 in both fields displays the entire model.

Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160 - Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the View Cone. Move the slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command.

Dashed - Displays the View Cone using dashed lines instead of solid lines. The dashed View Cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some notebook computers.

Related Topics • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

Lighting Tab Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded model. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model, which changes the intensity of the image's colors.

Ambient from 0 to 100 - Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. A common percentage of ambient light is 25%.

Brightness from 0 to 10 - Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the intensity of the colors in the image. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a camera. The value for this field is between 0 and 10.

Horizontal from -180 to 180 - Defines the horizontal angle of light coming into the model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0.

Vertical from -180 to 180 - Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0.

Relative to plant north - Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are relative to Plant North.



Related Topics • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

Advanced Tab Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review, such as NetMeeting and fine tuning stereo glasses.



Redraw on refresh - Redraws everything in the selected view on refresh. For large models, turn off this option for better performance. When this option is off, the backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh. If this option is off and you have dialog boxes or toolbars "floating" over a view, you may see ghost images of the floating item. Press F5 to refresh the view and remove the ghost image.

Buffered updates- Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. When this option is on, you will not see the model being "drawn" during updates.

Notes

• While each option can be used independently, if both Redraw on refresh and Buffered updates options are turned on, the entire view is, on refresh, redrawn to the buffer and then displayed all at once. If neither option is turned on, the backing store is used to repair the view and updates are drawn to the window.





Stereo - Activates stereo viewing. The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option:


• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or CE-1).


• In addition, Electrohome has projection systems that support stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.

Notes




• If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is grayed out, make sure your video driver is set to stereo. In some driver versions/configurations, the menu selection may be visible, not grayed out, even when the stereo is not enabled on the driver.


NetMeeting - Specifies whether to enable the NetMeeting display capability for high-end graphics cards like Intergraph RealiZm and Wildcat cards that have private client video drives instead of standard low-end video drivers. Select the checkbox only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software. For best performance, clear the NetMeeting check box after you complete a NetMeeting Application Sharing session.

Time display - Toggle on to display the time it takes to update the Main view. The update time is displayed in the Text View.

Perspective - Specifies whether to display the perspective information.



Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 - Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes, flanges, valves, and elbows. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100. For faster updates, the recommended tolerance is 16. For the highest quality update, the recommended tolerance is 100.

Far to near clip ratio - Adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards (for example, with some video cards, some elements may appear cracked or pieces of elements may be missing). In most cases, reducing this value using powers of 2 (such as, 1024, 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16) will improve the display quality. If some of your elements have a poor display quality, such as appearing cracked, lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so on until the display quality is acceptable.

Aspect - Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (x to y value). If you recall a view, the aspect ratio is that of the current view. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored.

Related Topics • Edit View Dialog Box, page 89 • Save and Recall Command (View Menu), page 391

Copy Selected View Dialog Box Allows you to copy one or more of the saved views to another group.

Note


View Group From - Allows you to specify the view group with the selected view to copy.

To - Allows you to specify the view group with the selected view to copy.

View Name From - Allows you to specify the view name with the selected view to copy.

To - Allows you to specify the view name with the selected view to copy.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Delete View, page 82 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78



Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box Allows you to change the frame numbers associated with the selected view.

Operator - Determines the type of operation to perform on frame numbers for the specified views. Examples are addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), or division (/).

Amount - Determines the amount to apply to the frame numbers of specified views using the current operation.

Use range instead of the 0 selected frames - Determines if the selected operation applies to the specified range or to the selected views on the Save and Recall Views dialog box.

Start - Indicates the starting frame number of a range using the specified operation and amount for the current application.

Stop - Indicates the stopping frame number of a range using the specified operation and amount for the current application.

Notes

• You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box. Once you have applied your changes, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.

Related Topics • Modify Frame Numbers, page 84 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Setup Partial View Recall Dialog Box Allows you to specify the settings for recalling a partial view.

Note

• To use this functionality you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.

Eye point - Displays the eye point setting from the saved settings.

Center point - Displays the center point setting from the saved settings.

Perspective angle - Displays the perspective angle setting from the saved settings.

Clipping planes - Displays the clipping planes setting from the saved settings.

Level settings - Displays the level settings setting from the saved settings.



Stereo eye separation - Displays the stereo eye separation setting from the saved settings.

Stereo focal distance - Displays the stereo focal distance setting from the saved settings.

Background color - Displays the background color setting from the saved settings.

Sun - Displays the sun setting from the saved settings.

Ambient - Displays the ambient setting from the saved settings.

Brightness - Displays the brightness setting from the saved settings.

Display quality - Displays the display quality setting from the saved settings.

View shaded - Displays the shaded setting from the saved settings.

Display tags - Displays the tag setting from the saved settings.

Display active tag only - Displays the active tag setting from the saved settings.

Related Topics • Save and Recall Command (View Menu), page 391 • Set Up Partial View Recall, page 85

Generate ModelView View File Dialog Box Allows you to save a view file in a ModelView format.

ModelView view file (.vfa) file name - Allows you to type a name for the ModelView file. The file name defaults to the same file name as the .dri file but with a .vfa extension.

Browse - Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.

Use current view - Creates the ModelView file using the currently selected view.

Use saved view - Creates the ModelView file using a saved view.

Saved view group name - Allows you to select the view group that contains the saved view that you want to use to create the ModelView file.

Saved view name - Allows you to select the view that you want to use to create the ModelView file.

View group for ModelView key frames - Selects a view group for the ModelView key frames.



Generate ModelView "DgnData" section - Allows you to select a SmartPlant Review view group. All the saved views in the group are included in the ModelView view file as key frames. If you want to render an animation, use this field. If you do not select this field, no key frames are written.

Related Topics • Generate a ModelView View File, page 87

Selecting Level Settings: An Overview The Level Settings command selects the categories (or levels) you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category; or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You can also read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or Main view and change the level settings for designated views.

The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or levels, can be thought of as stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each pane. For example, SPRdemo.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on another, ladders on another, and so on. You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual level or you can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You can also view any combination of these levels.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Hide Levels, page 99 • Match Files Dialog Box, page 103 • View Current Level Settings, page 100

Hide Levels 1. Click Tools > Hide Level. 2. Select the object whose level you want to hide. 3. Select the views in which you want to turn off the levels. 4. Click Apply.

Notes

• You can select another object by clicking Pick Object.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100



Edit Levels 1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Select the view for which you want to edit levels. 3. Select the files for which you want to edit levels. 4. Click Current to see the currently defined level settings. 5. Select the levels you want on or off. 6. Click Apply.

Notes

• The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or levels are similar to stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each pane. For example, model.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on another, ladders on another.

• You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual levels.

• You can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You can also view any combination of the levels.

• Click the Current button to view the View Current Level Settings.

Related Topics • Hide Levels, page 99

View Current Level Settings 1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Select the view for which you want to see the current level settings. 3. Select the file for which you want to see the current level settings. 4. Click the Current button.

Note

• If conflicting level settings exist, the Resolve Current Level dialog box will display. You then can reduce level selections or select one of the level combination buttons.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Hide Levels, page 99



Match Files 1. Click Tools > Level Settings. 2. Click Match. 3. Type the matching criteria in the Matching file name field.

Tip

• You do not have to know the design file name to find a specific file. You can click Pick Object to select an item in a view, and the design file name containing the selected object is returned.

4. Click Select to highlight the matched files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.

Note

• The Clear button allows you to unselect all selected files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Hide Levels, page 99 • View Current Level Settings, page 100

Hide Level Dialog Box Allows you to determine the views in which to hide a selected object.

Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or view level settings.

Number - Indicates the level on which the current selection object exists.

Category or level name - Displays all the level names and numbers for the selected design files.

File - Allows you to select the design files for which you want to view or change level settings.



Pick Object - Allows you to select an object with a level that you want to hide.

Related Topics • Hide Level Command (Tools Menu), page 424 • Hide Levels, page 99

Level Settings Dialog Box Allows you to select the levels that you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting the category. Or, If you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You can also read the current level settings in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views.

Views - Allows you to select the views for which you want to view or change level settings.

Names - Allows you to select the project files in which to change the level settings.

Select All - Allows you to select all of the listed project files in which to change the level settings.

Clear All - Allows you to unselect all of the listed project files.

Match - Displays the Match Files dialog box, which allows you to specify which objects in the design files will be affected by the level settings edits.

Levels - Shows which levels are selected. Each button represents an available level, and an indented button indicates that the level is displayed.

All On - Allows you to turn on all the levels at once for the selected views and project files.

All Off - Allows you to turn off all the levels at once for the selected views and project files.

Current - Displays the current levels for the selected views and project files.

Category or Level Name - A multi-column table that displays all the level names and numbers for the selected design files.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Level Settings Command (Tools Menu), page 425



Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box Displays the current levels and any conflicting level settings for the selected views and project files. You can also use the options on this dialog box to combine or intersect level settings that are turned on in any of the selected items.

Note

• This dialog box displays automatically when conflicting level settings exist within the selected views and project files in the Level Settings dialog box.

Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or view level settings.

Any - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in any of the selected items.

All - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in all of the selected items.

Names - Contains the file names with level settings to use for resolving conflicts.

Select All - Selects all design files for which you want to change or view level settings.

Clear All - Clears all design files selections.

Match - Displays the Match Files dialog box, which allows you to choose objects in a view to select the design file.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Hide Levels, page 99 • Match Files Dialog Box, page 103 • View Current Level Settings, page 100

Match Files Dialog Box Allows you to narrow your file selection by searching for and selecting design files based on their names or name groupings. You can work in this dialog box while also working in the Level Settings dialog box.

Matching file name - Allows you to narrow your file selection by defining matching criteria for file names listed on the Level Settings dialog box. For example, you can select all files whose file names contain the word "pipe" by typing *pipe* in this field.



Pick Object - Allows you match a file by selecting an object from that file. For example, you can click an object in one of the views to select the associated design file.

Select - Highlights the matched files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.

Clear - Clears the selection of the matched files listed on the Level Settings dialog box.

Matched - Displays the number of files in the Files list that were matched using the Matching file name criteria.

Related Topics • Match Files, page 101

Viewing in Stereo: An Overview Add dramatic depth perception to models with the stereo viewing capability of SmartPlant Review. The Stereo feature takes SmartPlant Review to a new level of realism and gives presentations or walkthroughs exceptional impact. You can adjust stereo settings to achieve realistic or exaggerated depth perception. Also, Stereo mode supports all display operations, including the Display Key Frame Motion command.

The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option:


• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or CE-1).


• In addition, Electrohome has some projection systems that support stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.

Notes



• Ensure that you have properly installed the correct display driver for your Intergraph GLI or GLZ graphics card and that you have turned on the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter. You must have the correct display driver for stereo capabilities to function properly.




• To enhance depth perception, click View > Full Screen or press F11. This increases the current view layout on the screen and may prevent window borders from disrupting the stereo visual cues.


Important

• Stereo Viewing is only available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Module, page 24 • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106 • Set Stereo Settings, page 106 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468

Stereo Distances Dialog Box Allows you to create realistic depth perception by adjusting the stereo distances.

Note




Pick Focal Point - Allows you to specify the focal point by selecting a point in the model using the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values.

Related Topics • Distances Command (View Menu), page 384 • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106



Set Stereo Settings 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. Type a value for Between eyes. 4. Type a value for Focal. 5. Click OK.

Tip

• You can also change the stereo distance settings by clicking View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances.

Note

• The Between Eyes is the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2.2:00 if MU is feet; 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). You will need to convert your actual distance values to the proper MU:SU:PU values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.

Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview, page 104

Set Stereo Settings Interactively 1. View a model in Stereo mode while wearing the interlaced glasses. 2. Click View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances. 3. Click Pick Focal Point. 4. Click an object in the Main view that is approximately halfway between the eye

point and the backmost object displayed. 5. Click again to accept the object. 6. Click Apply. 7. Edit the default Between Eyes value to equal the approximate distance between

your eyes. Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters (00:2.2:00 if MU is feet; 00:5.6:00 if MU is meters). A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.

8. Click Apply. 9. Adjust the Between Eyes value as needed to achieve the most realistic depth

perception.



10. When you finish adjusting stereo effects, click OK.

Tip

• You can also change the stereo distance settings by clicking View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances.

Notes


• After setting the Focal Distance, elements behind the focal point appear to recede into the distance, while elements in front of the focal point appear to be in front of the monitor. The Focal Distance field displays the location of the selected object.

• Screen updates may take slightly longer than normal because SmartPlant Review is actually drawing two images on screen.

Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings, page 106 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview, page 104

Working with Elumens: An Overview SmartPlant Review supports the Elumens VisionStation® single projector hemispherical display system. Rather than viewing a 2D take of a 3D model on the computer screen, VisionStation places you in the model with a full color, 180-degree field of vision, while allowing you access to the project data linked to the model. With VisionStation, you can perform real time walk-throughs, collaborate with the design team, or execute a full construction review day-by-day or month-by-month. You can also select a specific day in the construction cycle to view what the progress would be at that point. VisionStation supports all capabilities found in SmartPlant Review, including dynamic motion, measurement, construction simulation, collaborative review, tagging, annotation, external data linking, and animation.

Using a joystick, mouse, or keyboard, you can navigate, review, and manipulate engineering design, construction, retrofit, and maintenance displays as large as 300MB. Not only can you perform walk-throughs, you can also perform fly-throughs, fly-arounds, and any other paths- or dynamics-based motions, as well as zoom in or zoom out to display any level of detail in full-shaded or wireframe mode.

As with SmartPlant Review, the Material Editor allows you to assign materials, colors, reflections, patterns, textures, and transparency to your model. These options enhance and add realism to your VisionStation view.



Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Elumens Activate Command (View Menu), page 386 • Elumens Settings Command (View Menu), page 386 • Working in Elumens Display Mode, page 108

Working in Elumens Display Mode The following SmartPlant Review commands have been certified to work when the Elumens display mode is turned ON.

Collaboration

Display Settings

Display Sets and all related display modes

Full Screen Mode

Key Frame Animation

Keypad Motion

Main View

Motion Settings Mouse Motion

Photo-Realism

Shaded Mode

Notes

• SmartPlant Review sets the View Cone to 90 degrees automatically when entering Elumens mode.

• Your animation will look best if you set the View Cone to 90 degrees when building the animation outside Elumens mode.

The following commands are NOT certified to work when the Elumens display mode is turned ON. The work around is to exit Elumens mode, do whatever placements are necessary, and then re-enter Elumens display mode.

Auto-Highlight Place Annotation

Background Images Place Center Point

Display Set Destination Place Eye Point

Display Set Reference Origin Place Measurement

High-Resolution Snapshots Place Tag (or any Tags)

Move Measurement Raytracing



Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Elumens Activate Command (View Menu), page 386 • Elumens Settings Command (View Menu), page 386

Toggle the Elumens Display Mode On or Off Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate.

Note

• The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.

• See the Elumens' User Manual - Software Installation and Assembly Instructions for more information about setting up and using your VisionStation dish.

Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Elumens Settings Command (View Menu), page 386 • What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2?, page 18

Elumens Settings Dialog Box Allows you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.

Eye x - Defines the x eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome.

Eye y - Defines the y eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome.

Eye z - Defines the z eye point coordinate in the dome space. Changing the eye point shifts the location of the view on the dome.

Lens x - Defines the x coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed.

Lens y - Defines the y coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed.

Lens z - Defines the z coordinate for the lens in the dome space. Changing the lens modifies the shape of the view on the dome from being more rounded to more pointed.



1.5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 1.5 meter Elumens dish.

3 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 3.0 meter Elumens dish.

5 - Sets the eye point and lens positions to the recommended default values for the 5.0 meter Elumens dish.

Custom - Allows you to define custom values for the eye point and lens positions. Use the Custom option to set and keep non-standard default sizes. For example, to modify the 3.0 meter settings, select the 3.0 meter option to populate the settings with those values, then select the Custom option and modify the values.

Size - Sets the texture size for each image. Using a larger texture size will result in sharper picture quality. The maximum size is equal to the smallest power of 2 less than or equal to the size of the smallest dimension of the Main window. For 1024 x 768 resolution, the maximum texture size is 512.

Left x - Displays the internal left x origin position. This value is read-only.

Left y - Displays the internal left y origin position. This value is read-only.

Right x - Displays the internal right x origin position. This value is read-only.

Right y - Displays the internal right y origin position. This value is read-only.

Top x - Displays the internal top x origin position. This value is read-only.

Top y - Displays the internal top y origin position. This value is read-only.

Note





Edit Elumens Display Mode Settings 1. Click View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings. 2. Select the appropriate Elumens settings. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your changes. 4. Click Apply to apply the selected options to the folder, file, or control.

Note

• The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.



Using the View Cone: An Overview


Using the View Cone: An Overview The View Cone defines the boundaries of the area being displayed in the Main view. The View Cone updates as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion with the mouse or keypad. The View Cone appears in the Plan and Elevation views.

Assume that you, the viewer, are in the eye point position (A). You are looking toward the center point of the View Cone (D). The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane (C) and the near-clipping plane (B). You see whatever lies between the two planes.

You can set the eye point and center point positions using either the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Position Control toolbar.

The upper right side of the View Cone is red, and the upper left side is green. The angle between the red and green lines is the view perspective. You can set the view perspective using either the View > Settings > View Cone tab or the Perspective Toolbar.

Related Topics • Set Center Point, page 115 • Set Clipping Planes, page 116 • Set Eye Point, page 114 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117



Position Control Toolbar The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the View Cone eye point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement. For users familiar with how the Position Control worked in DesignReview, see the Help for DesignReview Users > Position Control Dialog Box topic for a discussion of the differences between the two controls.

View Tab - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Dependent and View Dependent Level Directional Modes. The View Bearing Pointer displays the current bearing direction of the View Cone. The View Elevation Pointer displays the current elevation direction of the View Cone. You can change the direction of the View Bearing Pointer or the View Elevation Pointer by dragging the left mouse button in either the Bearing or the Elevation compass or by typing new bearing and elevation values.

Motion Tab - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Independent Direction Mode. The View Independent Bearing Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to bearing. The View Independent Elevation Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to elevation. Moving forward using View Independent mode moves you in the direction defined by these two pointers. You use the cursor directional keys (up, down, left, and right arrow keys) or the right mouse button to define the direction of the pointers. You can also type new bearing and elevation values.

When using the View Independent Direction Mode, the View Bearing Pointer and View Elevation Pointer define the View Cone direction (the direction you are looking).

Eye Tab - Displays the current location of the View Cone eye point. You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields. You can also change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Center Tab - Displays the current location of the View Cone center point. You can change the location of the center point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields. You can also change the center point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.



Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview, page

142 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview, page

138 • Position Control Changes, page 29 • Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu), page 404 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Set Eye Point 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Select the View Cone tab. 3. Verify the North eye point setting. 4. Verify the East eye point setting. 5. Verify the Elevation eye point setting.

Notes

• You can also place the eye point by clicking View > Place > Eye Point Only. This command allows you to place the eye point by locating a 3D point using one or more of the graphic views.

• You can also place the eye point by clicking View > Place > View by Eye Point. This command allows you to place a view based on eye point, which involves the perspective that you have when viewing the file.

• You can also set the eye point interactively by using the Left mouse button to drag the eye point of the View Cone in the plan or elevation views. To interactively set the eye point in the main view: 1. Left-click in either the Plan or Elevation views to make that view active. 2. In the active view, press and hold the left mouse button to start the eye

point adjustment, then drag the mouse to adjust the eye point position of the View Cone. You must hold the left mouse button down for at least 1 second or drag it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the eye point to change. See the README.txt file for information about changing these defaults.

3. Release the Left mouse button when the View Cone eye point is at the desired position. You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the eye point adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the eye point made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command.



• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, do one of the following:

• Place a new center point

• On the View > Settings > View Cone tab, enter new values for the eye and/or center points, as well as the viewing angles.

• Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.

Related Topics • Set Clipping Planes, page 116 • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 153 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117

Set Center Point 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the View Cone tab. 3. Verify the North center point setting. 4. Verify the East center point setting. 5. Verify the Elevation center point setting.

Tip

• You can also click the Center View command on the Common toolbar.

Notes

• You can also place the center point by clicking View > Place > Center Point Only. This command allows you to place the center point by locating a 3D point using one or more of the graphic views.

• You can also place the enter point by clicking View > Place > View by Center Point. This command repositions the model in a view and is useful for seeing different portions of the model.

• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly. To correct this problem, do one of the following:

• Place a new center point.

• On the View > Settings > View Cone tab, enter new values for the eye and/or center points, as well as the viewing angles.

• Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.



Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Clipping Planes, page 116 • Set Eye Point, page 114 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Set Clipping Planes 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the View Cone tab. 3. Verify the Near clipping plane setting. 4. Verify the Far clipping plane setting. 5. Verify the Reference clipping plane setting.

Notes

• The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the near-clipping plane. You see whatever lies between the two planes.

• The Reference clipping plane setting allows you to choose Eye point, North, East, or Elevation for the reference point.

• You can also set the clipping planes interactively by using the Left mouse button to set the Far clipping plane and the Right mouse button to set the Near clipping plane. To interactively set the clipping planes: 1. Left-click in either the Plan or Elevation views to make that view active. 2. Left-click in the same view to start the clipping plane adjustment. 3. Move the mouse to adjust the Far clipping plane. 4. Right-click and move the mouse to adjust the Near clipping plane. 5. Left-click to stop the clipping plane adjustment and to save the current

positions. Right-click or press Esc to cancel the clipping plane adjustment without saving the changes.

• You can maintain your current Encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of the Encircle positioning modes back to the Lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion > Positioning > Maintain Encircle Clipping command.

• You can maintain your current Lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the Lateral positioning mode to any of the Encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion > Positioning > Clip to Encircle Sphere command.



Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Center Point, page 115 • Set Eye Point, page 114 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box Allows you to specify the perspective angle, in degrees, for rendering the view. The perspective angle values can range from 2 to 160.

Angle - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the perspective angle.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Perspective Angle Command (View Menu), page 378 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • SPR Shortcut Keys, page 130 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Set View Cone Perspective 1. Click View > Settings. 2. Click the View Cone tab. 3. Move the slider to set the Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160. 4. Select Dashed to display the View Cone as dashed lines.

Notes

• You can also set the View Cone perspective by typing a value in the box next to the slider on the View Cone tab or by clicking View > Display > Perspective Angle.

• You can also display the View Cone as dashed lines by clicking View > Display > Dashed View Cone.

Related Topics • Set Center Point, page 115 • Set Clipping Planes, page 116 • Set Eye Point, page 114



Placing 3D Points: An Overview Many SmartPlant Review commands prompt you to place 3D points. For example, when you place tags with leader lines, take measurements, or window in on an area, you can place 3D points for more precision control. You can place these points three ways:

• Define a bore sight

• Place data point

• Snap to an element

Define a Bore Sight 1. Begin the 3D point placement process by clicking a Place command from the

View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog boxes. 2. Place the cursor where you want to place the point (usually in the Main or Plan

views) and right-click twice (quickly) to place the point. A solid yellow line (called a bore sight) passes through that point in the other views.

3. To define the depth of the point, position the cursor on the bore sight and left-click once.

Related Topics • Place a Data Point, page 118 • Placing 3D Points: An Overview, page 118

Place a Data Point 1. Begin the 3D point placement process by clicking a Place command from the

View menu or Pick Point button found on certain dialog boxes. 2. Place the cursor where you want to place the data point (usually in the Main or

Plan views) and left-click once.

Notes

• When the 3D point is selected, the coordinates appear in the Status bar.

• You can place a data point in any view.

• Data points selected using this quick 2D method get their missing depth-of-view coordinate information from the current view's center point. These data points also do not maintain their exact location during view manipulations (for example, zooming in or out in a view). To precisely place 3D data points, use the bore sight method.

Related Topics • Define a Bore Sight, page 118



• Snap to an Element, page 119

Snap to an Element 1. In the Main view, place a tentative point (quick left double-click) on an element

in the model. 2. Click to accept the highlighted element.

Notes

• When the 3D point is placed, the coordinates appear in the message field.

• You can reject the highlighted element and tentatively select another element by clicking. The next element highlights.

Related Topics • Define a Bore Sight, page 118 • Place a Data Point, page 118

Navigating Through the Model: An Overview



SmartPlant Review allows you to move laterally and in a circular motion through a model and view various points of interest using three different types of modes: mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and directional modes.

Mouse Drag Modes You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. Each mode causes the mouse to move in a different direction. In addition to moving around in the model, you can use the mouse to display the label data for an object in the Text view.

When using mouse drag motion, such as Forward/Back, Left/Right, you can release the data button while the cursor is outside the Main, Plan, or Elevation views. Mouse motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse button. This mode stays in affect until you select a data point in the Main view.

Positioning Modes Positioning modes are used to define how the eye point moves. You can use the lateral mode to move freely about the model, or you can use one of the encircle modes to lock the eye point to a circular track.

Directional Modes Directional Modes define how you want to navigate around the model. The different modes provide different types of motion. For example, when in View Dependent Motion mode, the direction you are looking, the eye point to the center point in the View Cone, is the direction you move. View Dependent Motion Level also moves the eye point in the direction you are looking, but the elevation of the View Cone does not change.

Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes, page 142 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes, page 138 • Set Joystick Options, page 135 • Set Motion Rates, page 150 • Using the Keyboard: An Overview, page 128 • Work with Mouse Drag Modes, page 124



Examining Motion Devices: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides three different options for moving around in the model: mouse, keypad, and joystick.

The mouse allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right, pan up and down, and rotate in the model. You can perform any of these options in any of the views, with the exception of rotate. You can only use the mouse to rotate in the Main view. Options for a standard mouse, as well as a Microsoft IntelliMouse pointing devise are also provided with the software.

You can perform many common SmartPlant Review tasks quickly and easily with the function, control, shortcut, and keypad keys on your keyboard. You can use the function keys, the F-keys across the top of your keyboard, to execute functions, invoke dialog boxes, or modify functions. Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to Microsoft Windows conventions. You can also use the function keys table to view F-keys and their corresponding functions.

SmartPlant Review also supports standard Microsoft control key and shortcut functions. You can access these options by pressing Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute functions, while others invoke forms, display dialog boxes, or modify window layouts of the 3D model. You can view the control keys or shortcuts and their corresponding functions on the standard control key table or the SmartPlant Review shortcut key table.

You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set. A list of keypad keys and their corresponding functions is provided.

You can also use a joystick to move around in your model. The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.

Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview, page 136 • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132 • Using the Keyboard: An Overview, page 128 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122



Using the Mouse: An Overview Use a standard mouse or a Microsoft IntelliMouse to move through the model. Each view mode causes the mouse to move in a different direction. In addition to moving around in the model, you can use the mouse to display the label data for an object in the Text view.

In any view, Mouse Drag allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right, pan up and down. In the Main view, but not in the Plan or Elevation views, Mouse Drag also allows you to rotate.

For best results when using the Mouse Drag, remain in Auto Highlight mode and press a modifier key to change Direction modes as you move the mouse around in the view. The following table lists the modifier keys and their related direction modes.

Ctrl Forward/Back and Left/Right

Shift Pan

Alt Rotate

Related Topics • Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Step Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. Each mode enables the mouse to move the view in a different direction.

Auto-Highlight mode displays object label data instantly in the Text view.

Forward/Back, Left/Right mode moves the View Cone forwards or backwards toward the object you are looking at in the model when moving the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to rotate about the eye point left or right.

Pan mode increases and decreases the View Cone elevation when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping plane. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways.

Rotate mode tilts the View Cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to rotate left and right. This mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and looking left and right. The View Cone eye point does not move using this mode.



View Cube mode points the View Cone in a direction you define interactively. This mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any direction. The View Cone eye point does not move using this mode.

When using mouse drag motion, such as Forward/Back, Left/Right, you can release the data button while the cursor is outside the Main, Plan or Elevation views. Mouse motion then continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse button. This mode stays in effect until you select a data point in the Main view.

Remember the following tips and techniques when you are moving with the mouse:

• When you are familiarizing yourself with mouse drag, watch the Eye Point and View Cone in the Plan and Elevation views as you move. As the Plan and Elevation views change, you can see the effect of mouse drag and modifier key combinations.

• The speed of movement is relative to how far you move the mouse. If you move the mouse a short distance, speed is slow. If you move the mouse a long distance, speed is faster.

• The speed of movement depends on the settings in the Edit Motion Settings > Rates Tab. Changing these and other settings on this dialog box affects not only speed but display quality as well.

• The origin point from which you begin movement is the position where you first click in the Main, Plan or Elevation view. A crosshair displays to indicate this point. A null region surrounds the crosshair. If you drag a very small distance and remain within the null region, no movement occurs.

• When you drag the mouse, the pointer changes to a special cursor that indicates the direction of movement.

Related Topics • Auto-Highlight, page 124 • Forward/Back, Left/Right, page 125 • Manipulate the View Cube, page 126 • Pan, page 125 • Rotate, page 125



Work with Mouse Drag Modes 1. Click the mouse on the position from which you want to start moving.

Tip

• You can click on the position in any view. 2. Hold Shift, Ctrl or Alt then click and hold down the left mouse button, and move

the mouse in the direction you want to move.

Tip

• The cursor indicates direction of movement. 3. Move the mouse a short distance to move slowly. 4. Move the mouse a longer distance to move faster. 5. Press and hold another modifier key while dragging to change direction mode. 6. Stop moving the mouse and release the mouse button and modifier keys to stop

movement.

Related Topics • Auto-Highlight, page 124 • Forward/Back, Left/Right, page 125 • Manipulate the View Cube, page 126 • Pan, page 125 • Rotate, page 125 • Set Center Mode, page 126 • Set Priority Mode, page 126

Auto-Highlight 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight. 2. Click an object in the model.

Notes

• Auto Highlight allows you to display object label data instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single Pane Layout (you do not have the Text view open), you can click and accept an object to view the label data.

• You can also click the Auto-Highlight command on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Auto-Highlight Command (Motion Menu), page 441 • Common Toolbar, page 393 • Motion Toolbar, page 399 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122



Forward/Back, Left/Right 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right. 2. Left-click in the model. 3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.

Note

• You can also click the Forward/Back, Left/Right command on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu), page 442 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

Pan 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan. 2. Left-click in the model. 3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.

Notes

• You can also click Pan on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Pan Command (Motion Menu), page 442 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

Rotate 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate. 2. Left-click in the model. 3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.

Notes

• You can also click Rotate on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Rotate Command (Motion Menu), page 443 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122



Manipulate the View Cube 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube. 2. Left-click in the model. 3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.

Note

• You can also click View Cube on the View Menu.

Related Topics • Motion Toolbar, page 399 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • View Cube Command (Motion Menu), page 443

Set Priority Mode 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Priority Mode. 2. Click on an object in the model.

Notes

• Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible).

• Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are possible).

Related Topics • Set Center Mode, page 126 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122

Set Center Mode 1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode. 2. Click on an object in the model.

Note

• Center Mode changes the mouse drag motion to always be relative to the center of the window instead of where the mouse drag began in that window.

Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Directional Modes, page 142 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes, page 138 • Navigating Through the Model: An Overview, page 120



Using Microsoft IntelliMouse Features: An Overview If your computer has a Microsoft IntelliMouse pointing device, you can use it as you would a standard mouse. In addition, you can use the wheel on the mouse. Rotating the wheel causes a stepping type of motion, rather than a smooth, continuous scrolling motion.

Note

• To use the IntelliMouse, the pointing device and its software must be installed and configured correctly. See the IntelliPoint Online User's Guide for details. To start the IntelliPoint On-line Help, from Control Panel, double-click the Mouse icon. Then, click Help.

Related Topics • Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Step Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122

Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse 1. Move the IntelliMouse pointer to the Text Window. 2. Rotate the wheel to scroll up or down.

Note

• You can also press SHIFT and rotate the wheel to scroll left or right.

Related Topics • Step Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122

Step Using the IntelliMouse 1. Move the IntelliMouse pointer to the position from which you want to start

stepping. 2. Rotate the wheel forward or back to move.

Notes

• You can also press a modifier key and rotate the wheel forward or back to move.

• You can use a combination of Mouse Drag and IntelliMouse wheel action to move in the model. For example, press CTRL, then click and drag the IntelliMouse forward while rotating the wheel forward. This combination moves you forward while panning up.



Related Topics • Scroll Text Using the IntelliMouse, page 127 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122

Using the Keyboard: An Overview Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions, invoke forms, or enter commands:

Function Keys The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Some keys execute functions while others invoke dialog boxes. Press Ctrl or Shift + function key to modify the functions. Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions.

F1 Help

Shift+F1 What's This? Help

F2 Assign Materials to Elements

Ctrl+F2 Assign Materials to Display Set

F3 Define Display Set

Ctrl+F3 Move Display Set

F4 Hide Level (Object)

Ctrl+F4 Level Settings

F5 Refresh

Ctrl+F5 Refresh All

Shift+F5 Raytrace

F6 View Settings

Ctrl+F6 Save and Recall (View Operations)

Shift+F6 Photo-Realism Settings

F7 Frame Show Motion

Ctrl+F7 Motion Settings

Shift+F7 Global Lighting Settings

F8 Snaplock Measurement



Ctrl+F8 Surface Measurement

Shift+F9 Edit Measurement Collections

F9 Place Tag with leader line

Ctrl+F9 Place Tag without leader line

F10 Next Tag

Ctrl+F10 Previous Tag

F11 Full Screen Toggle

Ctrl+F11 Arrange All

F12 Collision Detection

Related Topics • Examining Motion Devices: An Overview, page 121 • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • Keypad Keys, page 130 • SPR Shortcut Keys, page 130 • Standard Control Keys, page 129

Standard Control Keys The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by SmartPlant Review. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter. Some of these options execute functions while others invoke forms.

Ctrl+C Copy Text

Ctrl+F Find Object

Ctrl+O Open

Ctrl+P Print

Ctrl+S Save

Ctrl+V Paste Text

Ctrl+X Cut Text

Ctrl+Y Redo

Ctrl+Z Undo

Related Topics • Examining Motion Devices: An Overview, page 121 • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • Keypad Keys, page 130



SPR Shortcut Keys The following table lists commands you can access by pressing a combination of either Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute functions while others display dialog boxes or modify window layouts of the 3D model.

Alt+0 View Project Manager

Alt+1 View Position Control Toolbar

Alt+2 View Perspective Angle Toolbar

Alt+3 View Encircle Radius Toolbar

Ctrl+M Delete Last Measurement

Ctrl+R Play Key Frame Motion

Ctrl+Space Pause Key Frame Motion

Ctrl+Alt+R Play Schedule Review Session

Ctrl+Alt+Space Pause Schedule Review Session

Ctrl+Alt+S Stop Schedule Review Session

Shift+1 Single Pane Layout

Shift+3 Three Pane Layout

Shift+4 Four Pane Layout

ESC Stop current View Update, Key Frame Motion, or Raytrace in progress

Related Topics • Function Keys, page 128 • Keypad Keys, page 130 • Standard Control Keys, page 129

Keypad Keys You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set. All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and keypad) share the same basic speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model on the Motion Settings dialog box. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.

By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will



decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

Important

• To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of the View Cone, you must first enable the Eye Point motion toggle (click Motion > Eye Point). To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of a display set, you must first select a display set in the Program Manager tree, and then enable the Display Set motion toggle (click Motion > Display Set).

Tilt Keys - The plus key (+) on the numeric keypad tilts up the View Cone/Display Set. The minus key (-) on the numeric keypad tilts down the View Cone/Display Set.

Elevation Keys - The Page Up key to the left of the numeric keypad raises the View Cone/Display Set to an upper level of the model. The Page Down key to the left of the numeric keypad moves the View Cone/Display Set to a lower level of the model.

Rotation Keys - The forward backslash or divide key (/) on the numeric keypad rotates the View Cone/Display Set to the left. The asterisk or multiply key (*) on the numeric keypad rotates the View Cone/Display Set to the right.

Special Keys - The Esc key cancels the current screen update. The Insert key increases the movement and rotation rates by the amount specifies on the Motion > Settings > Rates tab. The Delete key decreases the movement and rotation rates. The Home key cycles through the four Positioning modes. The End key cycles through the four Directional modes.

Number Keys - Use keys 1 - 9 to move through the model. Press and hold these keys to cause continuous motion. The 0 key toggles the Continuous Motion option. The period key (.) repeats the last direction one step. The 5 key toggles the step direction.

Notes

• If you press more than one key at a time, the motion directions of each key are averaged. For example, if you press keys 7 and 8 at the same time, the motion direction is forward and a little to the left.



• All directions and angles of motion are in relation to the Positioning Mode and Directional Mode you selected.

• As you move through the model using the keypad, the Position Control toolbar and the View Cone continually update.

• The keypad is reserved for motion and orientation control and sometimes does not let you use it to key in numbers. To avoid any problems, use the number keys at the top row of the keyboard to enter numbers.

• To use the numeric keypad for navigation, NumLock must be on.

• The Left/Right Arrows decrease/increase the View Independent Motion Elevation Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate.

• The Up/Down Arrows increase/decrease the View Independent Motion Bearing Angle by the current rotation adjustment rate.

Related Topics • Function Keys, page 128 • SPR Shortcut Keys, page 130 • Standard Control Keys, page 129

Using the Joystick: An Overview In SmartPlant Review, you can use a joystick to navigate in the model, no matter which add-in modules you have installed. Before you can use a joystick with SmartPlant Review, you must:

1. Install the joystick and its driver. If you are running Windows 98, upgrade DirectX to version 7.0a or greater (available on the Web from Microsoft) before installing the joystick driver. The proper DirectX components are already installed on Windows 2000 systems.

2. Configure and calibrate the joystick. 3. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.

Beginning with version 4.2, SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft DirectX API interface when supporting joystick use on Windows 98 and Windows 2000. This new interface may cause the following changes in performance or response when using a joystick with these operating systems.

• Digital joysticks will work on the Windows 98 and Windows 2000 platforms using the same workflows and functionality as the analog joysticks. Using a digital joystick may result in a noticeable difference in performance.

• Because performance may be enhanced when using this interface, Motion Settings may be affected accordingly, making a difference in how the motion rate variables respond.



• The Move threshold in percent setting on the Motion Settings > Joystick tab has no effect on either joystick movement mode.

• The data gathering method from the joystick through the DirectX API interface is different from the method used in previous versions of the Windows operating system. Data is now polled from the joystick instead of depending on a joystick's event driven notification.

The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.

By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.

Notes

• Texturing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.

• You can set the proper MU:SU:PU speed values on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.

Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000, page 134 • Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 134 • Set Joystick Options, page 135



Install a Joystick on Windows NT 1. Open the Control Panel and double-click Multimedia. 2. Click the Devices tab. 3. Select Joystick Devices from the list and click Add. 4. Select Unlisted or Updated Driver from the list. 5. Install the drivers supplied with your joystick. You can install the standard analog

joystick driver from your Windows NT 4.0 CD or the driver disk supplied with your joystick. To use the joystick, you need the JOYSTICK.DLL, JOYSTICKSYS, and OEMSETUP.INF files.

6. Open the Control Panel and double-click Joystick. 7. Select Joystick 1. 8. Select 2-axis, 4-button joystick in the Joystick list. 9. Click Calibrate and follow the directions. 10. Click Test to verify that the calibration process completed properly. 11. Click OK if the calibration was verified correctly. 12. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.

Note

• SmartPlant Review supports only the Joystick 1 analog joystick on Windows NT. Digital joysticks are supported on Windows 98 and Windows 2000.

Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000, page 134 • Set Joystick Options, page 135 • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132

Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000 1. Open the Control Panel and double-click Game Controllers. 2. Click the General tab and click Add. 3. Click Add Other on the Add Game Controller dialog box and select the driver

supplied for your joystick. Wait for the driver status to show OK. 4. Click Properties and then click the Settings tab. 5. Click Calibrate and follow the directions. 6. Click the Test tab and verify that the calibration process completed properly. 7. Click OK if the calibration was verified correctly. 8. Click OK on the Games Controllers dialog box. 9. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.



Important

• If you are running Windows 98, upgrade DirectX to version 7.0a or greater (available on the Web from Microsoft) before installing the joystick driver. The proper DirectX components are already installed on Windows 2000 systems.

Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 134 • Set Joystick Options, page 135 • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132

Set Joystick Options 1. Click Motion > Settings. 2. Select the Joystick tab. 3. Click Allow joystick. 4. Select a Movement type. 5. Type the amount to Move threshold in percent. 6. Click OK.

Important

• All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, keypad, and discrete) share the same basic speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.

• You can set the proper MU:SU:PU speed values on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.

Notes

• Start with a very small project to get used to the way the joystick allows you to move in the model.

• You can set the move and rotation settings to small values using the Motion Settings > Rates tab to ensure the joystick moves properly with your movement.

• By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping



setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time, while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

• For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the View Settings > Display tab. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Motion Settings > Display tab.


Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000, page 134 • Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 134 • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132

Exploring Motion Types: An Overview Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a

constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input. When Continuous Step is off, you move through the model only by command from the mouse, keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode allows you to use other commands while in motion.

You can also press 0 on the keypad to toggle continuous motion. The keypad 0 movement repeats the last keypad motion key up to the rate specified by the Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step, then select Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous motion does not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a step.

Single Step repeats the last direction or rotation one step. You can also press the period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.

Toggle Step Direction reverses the direction you are currently traveling. You can toggle the step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again. You can also press 5 on the keypad to toggle the step direction.

Related Topics • Set Continuous Motion, page 137 • Set Single Step Motion, page 137 • Set Toggle Step Direction, page 138



Set Continuous Motion 1. Click Motion > Move > Continuous. 2. Click in the model.

Notes

• In continuous motion, you move through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input.

• You can also click Continuous on the View toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start Continuous motion.

• If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab. For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions.

• Press Esc or 0 on the keypad to stop the motion.

Related Topics • Set Single Step Motion, page 137 • Set Toggle Step Direction, page 138

Set Single Step Motion Click Motion > Move > Single Step.

Notes

• Single step motion moves you through the model only one step at a time by repeating the last movement command.

• You can also click Single Step on the View toolbar or press period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.

Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview, page 136 • Set Continuous Motion, page 137 • Set Toggle Step Direction, page 138



Set Toggle Step Direction Click Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction.

Notes

• Toggle step direction reverses the single step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again.

• You can also click Toggle Step Direction on the View toolbar or press 5 on the keypad.

Related Topics • Exploring Motion Types: An Overview, page 136 • Set Continuous Motion, page 137 • Set Single Step Motion, page 137

Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview

Positioning modes control the movement of the View Cone eye point.

Lateral - The eye point is free to move in any direction in the model.

Horizontal Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The circular track is parallel to the Plan View. You can move the center point in any direction.

Vertical Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The circular track is perpendicular to the Plan View. You can move the center point in any direction.

Surface Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a circular track. The circular track can be moved in any orientation. You can move the center point in any direction.



138 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112



Using Lateral Motion 1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Lateral. 2. Set or adjust the Center Point. 3. Adjust the Eye Point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). 4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.

Note

• You can also click Lateral on the View Menu. • To switch between Encircle motion settings without losing your

clipping plane settings, use the Home key on your keyboard to cycle through the four Positioning modes. The End key cycles through the four Directional modes.

Related Topics • Lateral Command (Motion Menu), page 445 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 140

Set Horizontal Encircle Motion 1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle. 2. Set or adjust the Center Point. 3. Adjust the Eye Point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). 4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.

Notes

• You can also click Horizontal Encircle on the View Menu. • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position

Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. Rotating around the center point is the default. To rotate around the eye point, press Ctrl while using these controls.





• You can also use the Home key to cycle through the Encircle modes without losing your clipping plane settings. The End key cycles through the Directional modes.

Related Topics • Common Toolbar, page 393 • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview, page

138 • Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 445 • Motion Toolbar, page 399

Set Vertical Encircle Motion 1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle. 2. Set or adjust the Center Point. 3. Adjust the Eye Point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). 4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.

Notes

• You can also click Vertical Encircle on the View Menu. • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position





Related Topics • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141 • Using Lateral Motion, page 139



Set Surface Encircle Motion 1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle. 2. Set or adjust the Center Point. 3. Adjust the Eye Point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views). 4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.

Notes

• You can also click Surface Encircle on the View Menu. • You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position





Related Topics • Controlling Movement with Positioning Modes: An Overview, page

138 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141



Controlling Movement with Directional Modes: An Overview

Directional Modes define how you want to navigate around the model. The different modes provide different types of motion.

View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction relative to where the eye is looking (i.e., forward is toward view center). This mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking.

Level View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction relative to where the eye is looking, but remains level while moving. This mode allows you to move toward where you are looking without changing the elevation.

View Independent Motion - Allows you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation indicators on the Position Control toolbar, thus giving you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in another arbitrary direction.

Plant North - Sets the motion direction relative to Plant North (that is, forward is toward Plant North). This mode allows you to look in one direction, which the View Cone defines, while moving in another direction. This mode is similar to View Independent mode with the exception that forward is always north.

The Mouse Drag Modes, Positioning Modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how the Directional Modes operate.


138 • Set Plant North Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Mode, page 142 • Set View Independent Mode, page 143

Set View Dependent Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent.

Note

• You can also click View Dependent on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 143 • View Dependent Command (Motion Menu), page 449



Set View Dependent Level Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, level.

Note

• You can also click View Dependent Level on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Mode, page 142 • Set View Independent Mode, page 143 • View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu), page 449

Set View Independent Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent.

Note

• You can also click View independent on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Mode, page 142 • View Independent Command (Motion Menu), page 449

Set Plant North Mode Click Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North.

Note

• You can also click Plant North on the View toolbar.

Related Topics • Plant North Command (Motion Menu), page 450 • Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 143 • Set View Dependent Mode, page 142 • Set View Independent Mode, page 143



Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview The Motion Settings command defines the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick.

All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and keypad) share the same basic speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper MU:SU:PU value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.

By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

For best performance during motion, do the following:

• Use the lowest acceptable display quality.

• On the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box:

• Leave Allow all texturing unchecked.

• Leave Update View Cone unchecked.

• Leave Update position status unchecked.

• Change the motion rates to move the largest acceptable amount.

Related Topics • Set Bearing Angles, page 151 • Set Display Options, page 150 • Set Joystick Options, page 135 • Set Motion Control to Display Set, page 152 • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 153 • Set Motion Rates, page 150



Motion Settings Dialog Box Provides options for defining the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick.








Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Use this tab to change the default movement and adjustment rates.

Amounts Move in MU:SU:PU - Allows you to specify in working units the distance to move in one step. This distance is specified in master unit:sub units:positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the model. This value is unit independent. For example, if the model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches, a value of 1:6:0 would move 1 foot, 6 inches each step. However, if the model's master unit is meters and the sub unit is centimeters, 1:6:0 would move 1 meter, 6 centimeters each step.

Rotate in degrees -Allows you to specify the rotation amount to move the View Cone in one stop.

Increment/Decrement adjustments

Move in MU:SU:PU - Allows you to specify in working units incremental adjustments to the motion rate. This distance is specified in master unit:sub units:positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the model. This value is unit independent. For example, if the model's master unit is feet and the sub unit is inches, a value of 1:6:0 would move 1 foot, 6 inches each step. However, if the model's master unit is meters and the sub unit is centimeters, 1:6:0 would move 1 meter, 6 centimeters each step.



Rotate in degrees - Allows you to specify incremental adjustments to the motion angle.

Maximum moves per second - Allows you to specify the maximum number of moves to perform during any key pad motion (continuous or otherwise). This value is the same value used for the Frames per second option in the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box. Changing one value will change the other value.

Note

• Pressing the Insert key will increase the movement and rotation rates using the values you specified on the Rates Tab. Pressing the Delete key will decrease the rates by the specified values.

Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Motion Rates, page 150

Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Each time you manipulate the Main view with a shaded image (see Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe), the image updates. This can be time-consuming, especially for large designs. You can speed up the process for motion and static (no motion) updates of a shaded image by changing options on this tab.

Quality - Specifies the Main view shading display quality during motion. You can choose from Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading. These modes are in the order of slowest update to fastest update.

• Full Shading is the highest quality for a shaded display produces a more curved appearance by producing various shades of color selected across the surface of the element. This is also known as smooth shading the Gouraud Shading algorithm. This is the slowest to update.




Allow all texturing - Determines whether textures display while you are manipulating the model. If you want textures to display in the model, you must first activate the Textures command (from the View menu; see Texture for details). Then select this option. If you already have the Allow all texturing option on and decide you do not want textures to display while manipulating the model, clear this option.



Notes

• To use the texturing functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

• If you display textures while manipulating models, it may slow down the display. Clear the Allow all texturing option to hide the textures and speed up the display.

Update View Cone - Updates the View Cone and related overlay graphics during motion.

Update position status - Specifies whether to update the position status during motion.

Clip far - Activates the far clipping plan on the View Cone.

Clip far distance in MU:SU:PU - Sets the distance of the optional far clipping plane used during motion.

Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Display Options, page 150 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Defines the default or starting position for the View Cone and motion direction indicators on the Position Control toolbar.

View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward bearing or encircle bearing angle.

Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward elevation or encircle angle elevation.

View independent motion bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the directional bearing of forward motion when in non-view dependent direction mode.

Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the directional elevation of forward motion when in non-view dependent direction mode.

Apply - Applies the selected options to the folder, file, or control.

Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Bearing Angles, page 151



Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Defines which display set that you want to move. After selecting a display set to move, you can use Mouse Drag modes and Directional Modes to move the selected display set to another location in the model.

You must set the motion relative to display sets using the Motion > Display Set command to move a display set.

Important

• The Display Set Motion control mode command is only enabled when a valid display set is selected in Project Manager.

To return a display set back to its original position, open Project Manager and right-click on the display set that was moved. Then clear the Move option.

Name - Allows you to choose the display set to move.

Edit - Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box which can be used to view or change position settings for the selected display set.

Detect collisions on move - Starts the collision set during the movement of the selected display set.

Collision set - Selects the existing collision set during the movement of the display set.

Related Topics • Display Set Command (Motion Menu), page 439 • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Motion Control to Display Set, page 152 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) Activates input from a joystick and specifies whether the joystick movement should use keypad-defined (discrete) or mouse-defined (relative) movement.

Important





Notes

• By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box can be very useful. When enabled, it sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

• For best performance, enable textures only on machines that have hardware texturing support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.


Allow joystick input - Allows you to activate joystick input.

Discrete (keypad like) - Allows movement to respond incrementally to a given direction without a button press, much like movement using the keypad.

• No buttons pushed: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode

• Button 1: Rotate mode.

• Button 2: Pan mode.

Relative (mouse like) - Allows the joystick to respond to a point on the screen. This option works similarly to the Mouse Drag modes in that the joystick does not engage a motion mode until a button is pressed.

• Button 1: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode.

• Button 2: Rotate mode.

• Button 3: Pan mode.

Move threshold in percent - Describes the amount of joystick movement before the movement is registered.

Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000, page 134 • Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 134 • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Joystick Options, page 135



Set Motion Rates 1. Click Motion > Settings. 2. Select the Rates tab. 3. Type the amount to Move in MU:SU:PU. 4. Type the amount to Rotate in degrees. 5. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Move in MU:SU:PU. 6. Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Rotate in degrees. 7. Type the Maximum moves per second. 8. Click OK.

Note

• You can also click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics • Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview, page 144

Set Display Options 1. Click Motion > Settings. 2. Select the Display tab. 3. Specify the display settings you want to use. 4. Click OK.

Note

• You can also click Motion Settings on the Motion toolbar.

Related Topics • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162



Set Bearing Angles 1. Click Motion > Settings. 2. Select the Bearing tab. 3. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Direction

from 0 to 359.9. 4. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Elevation

from -90 to 90. 5. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Direction

from 0 to 359.9. 6. Move the slider to set the Non-view motion bearing angles in degrees Elevation

from -90 to 90. 7. Click OK.

Note

• You can also click Motion Settings on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics • Common Toolbar, page 393 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56

Set Joystick Options 1. Click Motion > Settings. 2. Select the Joystick tab. 3. Click Allow joystick. 4. Select a Movement type. 5. Type the amount to Move threshold in percent. 6. Click OK.

Important





Notes

• Start with a very small project to get used to the way the joystick allows you to move in the model.

• You can set the move and rotation settings to small values using the Motion Settings > Rates tab to ensure the joystick moves properly with your movement.

• By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time, while allowing you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.

• For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the View Settings > Display tab. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Motion Settings > Display tab.


Related Topics • Install a Joystick on Windows 98 and Windows 2000, page 134 • Install a Joystick on Windows NT, page 134 • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132

Set Motion Control to Display Set Click Motion > Display Set.

Notes

• The Display Set motion setting is relative to the defined display set.


Related Topics • Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview, page 144 • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 153 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162



Set Motion Control to Eye Point Click Motion > Eye Point.

Note

• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode.

Related Topics • Set Motion Control to Display Set, page 152 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview The Display Key Frame Motion command displays the movie definition you created with the Save and Recall Views command. This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.

Important


After you click OK, the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box disappears and the animation sequence begins to play, updating all view properties. You can press Esc to stop the movie.

Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Pause Key Frame Motion, page 155 • Play Key Frame Motion, page 154 • Simulation and Visual Effects Module, page 25 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156 • Stop Key Frame Motion, page 155

Display Key Frame Motion 1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Display. 2. Select a Group. 3. Type the number of Frames per second to view. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• The Display Key Frame command allows you to display the movie definition you created with the Save and Recall Views command.



• This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.

• You can also click Display Key Frame on the Motion toolbar.


Related Topics • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview, page 153 • Pause Key Frame Motion, page 155 • Play Key Frame Motion, page 154 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156 • Stop Key Frame Motion, page 155

Play Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Play Key Frames.

This command plays the current key frame animation only from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame.

Important

• If the current key frame motion group does not have valid key frames, or if a key frame motion group has not been selected (via the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box), a message is displayed, and the key frame motion will exit.

Notes

• You can also click Play Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or press Ctrl+R on the keyboard.


Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Pause Key Frame Motion, page 155 • Stop Key Frame Motion, page 155



Pause Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Pause Key Frames.

Tip

• You can also click Pause Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or press Ctrl+Space on the keyboard.

Notes

• This command will pause the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resume the currently PAUSED key frame motion.


Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Play Key Frame Motion, page 154 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156 • Stop Key Frame Motion, page 155

Stop Key Frame Motion Click Motion > Key Frame > Stop Key Frames.

This command will stop the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.

Important

• Clicking the Play command will resume the key frame animation at the starting frame, not the frame at which you stopped.

Notes

• You can also click Stop Key Frame on the Motion toolbar or press Esc.


Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Pause Key Frame Motion, page 155 • Play Key Frame Motion, page 154 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156



Snapshot Key Frames 1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot. 2. Select a View group. 3. Type the frame number to Start. 4. Type the frame number to Stop. 5. Select Anti-alias amount.

Tip

• For large bitmaps, increase the size of the Main view before using the higher anti-alias settings. Best performance is achieved when the Main view is as large as possible before running the snapshot functionality.

6. Type a number for Width. 7. Type a number for Height. 8. Select an Output Directory. 9. Type a Files prefix. 10. Select a File type. 11. Click OK.

Notes

• You must define a view group using the Save and Recall View command before you can snapshot the key frames in that group.

• Press ESC to stop the snapshot process once it is started. You will be given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the moment the process stopped.


Related Topics • Create Group, page 81 • Displaying Key Frame Motion: An Overview, page 153 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Setup Partial Key Frame Recall 1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot. 2. Click Setup Partial on the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box. 3. Select the settings that you want to apply.

Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar), page 450



Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box Allows you to set movie definition items.

Important


View group - Enables you to select the frames of a named group. This grouping is created using the View > Save and Recall Views command.

Frames per second - Allows you to place a limit on the animation speed. You can specify a value for the maximum number of moves to perform during playback. This value is the same value used for the Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings Rate tab. If you change one value, the software will automatically change the other.

As needed - Allows animation to skip frames during playback to keep up with the Frames per second value you specify. This option provides a smoother display which is particularly useful for large models or limited hardware resources.

To interval - Skips frames at a specific interval. You can also set an interval for skipping frames during an animation by choosing a number in the large interval box.

Start - Defines the starting frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. You can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame.

Stop - Defines the ending frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. You can type another frame number at which to stop the animation.

Loop - Restarts the animation at the Start frame after reaching the End frame.

Use partial - Specifies that you want to use the partial view settings. Use Setup Partial on the Save and Recall Views dialog box to define what you want to see.

Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box, which allows you to define what part of the views you want to see. This works in the same manner as the Setup Partial View dialog box that is part of the Save and Recall Views command. However, this Setup Partial only works for Main view key frames.

Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar), page 450



Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box Allows you to create selected snapshots of key frames.

Note


View group - Selects a named group of frames. This grouping is created using the View > Save and Recall Views command.

Start - Sets the start frame of an animation sequence in the specified group. You can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame.

Stop - Sets the animation of a stop frame to write to the file. You can type another frame number to stop the animation at that frame.

Use partial - Allows the use of partial view settings. You can use Setup Partial on the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box to define what you want to see.

Setup Partial - Displays the Setup Partial Key Frame Recall dialog Box, which allows you to define partial view settings. This works in the same manner as the Setup Partial View dialog box that is part of the Save and Recall Views command. However, this Setup Partial view only works for Main view key frames.

Extent - Specifies the view that the software uses when writing frame output. Example selections include Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.

Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. You can choose from 1 through 4. If you select 1, the frames are the lowest quality but process quickly. If you select 2 or 3, the quality is slightly higher but process more slowly. If you select 4, the frames are high quality but process very slowly. Also, some anti-alias settings require that the Main view have a sufficient aspect ratio. In some scenarios, Snapshot may fail indicating that , "The main view is too small to do a snapshot with an anti-alias level of 4. Please resize the view."

Rotate 90 degrees - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90 degrees toggle is on, the output image rotates 90 degrees clockwise for plotting purposes. If you capture the image without the capture form, SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from left-to-right, instead of top-to-bottom.

Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace a snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file. If the Raytrace image toggle is on, the current snapshot GUI is used for creating raytrace images and animations. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.



Ignore aspect - Allows width and height to change independently. If the Ignore aspect option is off, Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main view. If you change one field, the other fields change accordingly. If you turn the toggle on, the Scale field is disabled and set to its default value. You can then change the Width and Height fields independently.

Scale - Sets the scale factor of the output frame.

Width - Sets the width of the output frame.

Height - Sets the height of the output frame.

Directory - Sets the directory in which the software writes the output frames.

Browse - Allows you to select a file or folder.

Files prefix - Sets the unique portion of the output frame file name.

File type - Specifies the type of file format that the software uses when writing frame output. You can click .rgb for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format, or click .bmp for Windows bitmap.

Related Topics • Snapshot Command (Motion Menu), page 452 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156

Setup Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box Allows you to select the partial view setting options to recall or ignore.

Eye point - Displays the eye point setting from the saved settings. The Eye point setting allows motion commands to affect the graphic views. The Eye point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode. You can change the eye point location on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Center point - Displays the center point setting from the saved setting. Center point allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. You can change the center point location on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Perspective angle - Displays the perspective angle from the saved settings. You can use the Perspective toolbar to increase or decrease the viewing area of the View Cone.

Clipping planes - Displays the clipping planes settings from the saved settings. The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the near-clipping plane. You see whatever lies between the two planes. You can change the clipping planes on the View > Settings > View Cone tab.



Level settings - Displays the level settings from the saved settings. The Level Settings command selects the categories (or levels) you want to display for one or more design files. You can view the current level settings by clicking the Current button on the Level Settings dialog box.

Stereo eye separation - Displays the stereo eye separation setting from the saved settings. The stereo eye separation is the approximated distance between your eyes. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module and you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on.

Stereo focal distance - Displays the stereo focal distance setting from the saved settings. The Stereo focal distance is the point at which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects appear to come out of the screen while objects that are further away appear to be behind the screen.

Note

• To use the Stereo functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Background color - Displays the background color from the saved settings. You can edit the background color by clicking Edit on the Display tab of the View Settings dialog box.

Sun - Displays the sun setting from the saved settings. There are several options for displaying sunlight in your model. For example, you can set sun bearing angles on the Lighting tab of the View Settings dialog box or, if you have installed the Photo-Realism module, you can select sunlight options on the Solar tab of the Global Light Settings dialog box.

Ambient - Displays the ambient setting from the saved settings. Ambient light surrounds everything in your display. A common setting for ambient light is 25%. You can edit the ambient light setting on the Set Ambient Light Level dialog box.

Brightness - Displays the brightness setting from the saved settings. The brightness setting determines the exposure of light on the model which changes the intensity of the image's colors. If you select a low brightness (exposure), the colors become darker. If you select a high brightness, the colors become brighter. You can edit the brightness setting on the Set Brightness Level dialog box.

Display quality - Displays the quality setting from the saved settings. The quality of the main view shading can be edited using the Display tab on the View Settings dialog box. The dialog box lists the shading modes in order from slowest update to fastest update.

View shaded - Displays the view shaded setting from the saved settings.



Display tags - Displays the tags setting from the saved settings. Tags are labels that provide additional information about items in a plant. You can edit tag settings by choosing an option from the Tags menu.

Display active tag only - Displays the active tag setting from the saved settings.

Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box, page 157 • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153 • Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar), page 450

Using Project Manager: An Overview


Using Project Manager: An Overview You can easily view and manage the structure and various sections of the model using the Project Manager. This feature allows you to easily look at an overview of the model and manage its parts in the following tasks:

• View all project files associated with the model,

• Add, manage, and edit the display sets,

• Review construction sequences by using a ScheduleReview project.

Manipulating the Project Manager The Project Manager usually appears on the left side of the Main view. When you open a .DRI document, the items comprising the model's structure display in Project Manager. By clicking one of the bars in the Project Manager window, you can view parts of the model, including the project files, display sets, and the ScheduleReview project.

You can display or hide the Project Manager while you are in the model. If the Project Manager is hidden when you close SmartPlant Review, the Project Manager does not appear the next time that you open SmartPlant Review.

In addition to hiding or displaying the Project Manager, you can also undock Project Manager and move it around in the window to a more convenient spot.

Viewing Project Files When you click the Project Files bar in the Project Manager window, it displays files, such as .DGN and .PRP files, in a tree structure. This allows you to easily view all the graphic files associated with the model.

Editing the Display Sets When you click the Display Sets bar, the Project Manager window shows the Name of the display sets in the model and a numeric ID. If you right-click in the Display Sets window, you can accomplish the following items:

• Add, delete, or rename display sets,

• Display or hide a selected display set,

• Edit the definition of a display set,

• Add new materials,

• Dim or move the selected display set,

• Organize the display sets by adding folders to group them,

• Resort the display sets by name or ID.



Reviewing Construction Sequences You can easily review construction sequences from the Project Manager. When you click the ScheduleReview bar, the Project Manager window displays the ScheduleReview project associated with the model. You can easily add your own ScheduleReview project to the model by right-clicking and using the New command on the shortcut menu. Only one ScheduleReview project can be associated with a model.

Important

• To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.

When you add your own ScheduleReview project, the ScheduleReview bar automatically reflects the name of the new ScheduleReview. For example, if you create a new ScheduleReview project and name it Management Review, a new bar appears in the Project Manager window with the text ScheduleReview - Management Review.

When you click the ScheduleReview - Management Review bar, the Project Manager window shows the display sets that are associated with the new ScheduleReview project named ScheduleReview - Management Review. The Project Manager also shows any unassociated display sets.

The bar usually reflects the name of the active ScheduleReview project. So when you add another ScheduleReview, the title on the ScheduleReview bar changes.

If you right-click in the ScheduleReview window, you can accomplish the following items:

• Edit settings for the ScheduleReview project,

• Select and edit a display set,

• Create and edit queries for the ScheduleReview project,

• Step through the ScheduleReview by playing it,

• Edit the active project.

Related Topics • Add a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 168 • Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager, page

169 • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164



Display or Hide the Project Manager Click View > Project Manager.

Notes

• The Project Manager automatically opens on the left side of the main window when you open the software.

• The Project Manager displays items associated with the model when you open a document. If a model document is not open, the Project Manager does not display any items.

• You can display or hide the Project Manager at any time.

Related Topics • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Move the Project Manager Window 1. In the Project Manager window, double-click the gray bar at the top of the

window. 2. Select one of the four borders of the Project Manager window and drag it to the

place you want in the main window.

Notes

• You can double-click the gray bar at the top of the Project Manager window to dock it again to the main window.

• To display the window, you can click Project Manager on the View menu. If the Project Manager is hidden when you close the software, the Project Manager does not appear the next time you open the software.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162



View Items in the Model with Project Manager 1. Open a document. 2. In the Project Manager window, click one of the following bars:

Project Files Display Sets ScheduleReview

Notes

• The Project Manager appears on the left side of the main window by default. If the Project Manager does not appear, click View > Project Manager.

• In the Project Manager, you can also manage and edit display sets and ScheduleReview projects with commands on the shortcut menu. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear in the Project Manager window.

• To use the ScheduleReview functionality, you must install the Construction module.

Related Topics • Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager, page 165 • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager 1. In the Project Manager window, click the Display Sets bar. A tree view of the

display sets appears with a yellow box by each display set. A black checkmark by a yellow box indicates that the display set appears in the view of the model.

2. Click the yellow box to hide a display set in the view of the model.

Notes

• If the Project Manager does not appear, click View > Project Manager.

• If a model document is not open, the Project Manager does not display any items.

• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access commands on the shortcut menu. This short-cut to commands is especially useful when manipulating display sets.



Related Topics • Add a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 168 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Show or Hide Items in a Model with Project Manager, page 166 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Show or Hide Items in a Model with Project Manager 1. Open a document. The Project Manager appears to the left of the main window. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the Display Sets bar. 3. In the tree view, select a display set. 4. Click the yellow box next to the selected display set to toggle the display of the

item. A black checkmark next to the item means that the item is displayed in the model.

Notes




• You can also show or hide your display sets by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Show.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162



Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager 1. Open a document. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the Display Sets bar. 3. Right-click in the window. 4. Click New > Folder. The new folder appears in the Display Sets area and

displays a blinking cursor. 5. In the Display Sets area, type the name of the new folder and press Enter. 6. Drag a display set to the new folder. 7. Double-click the folder to see the display set that you dragged.

Notes

• If you want to remove a display set from a folder, drag the display set to the left of the Display Sets area. The cursor changes to indicate that you can drop the display set. The display set now appears in a higher level of the Display Sets tree and is removed from the folder.

• If the Project Manager is not displayed, click View > Project Manager.

• If a model document is not open, display sets do not appear in the Project Manager.

• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access commands on the shortcut menu to manipulate or edit display sets and ScheduleReview projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu is not displayed.

Related Topics • Add a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 168 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Show or Hide Items in a Model with Project Manager, page 166 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162



Add a Display Set in the Project Manager 1. Open a document. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the Display Sets bar. 3. Right-click in the window. 4. Click New > Display Set.

Notes

• The Project Manager appears to the left of the main window by default. If the Project Manager does not appear, click View > Project Manager.


• Double-click the display set to edit its settings.


Related Topics • Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 168 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Project Manager Command (View Menu), page 410 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Edit a Display Set in the Project Manager 1. Open a document. The Project Manager appears to the left of the main window. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the Display Sets bar. 3. Double-click a display set to edit the settings.

Notes




Related Topics • Add a Display Set in the Project Manager, page 168 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164



Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager

1. Open a document. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the ScheduleReview bar. 3. Right-click in the window. 4. On the shortcut menu, click New Project. 5. On the New ScheduleReview dialog box, enter the name of the project. 6. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, enter the settings that you want.

Notes

• The Project Manager is usually displayed to the left of the main window. If the Project Manager is not displayed, click View > Project Manager.

• If a model document is not open, you cannot display the Project Manager.

• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access commands on the shortcut menu to run or edit ScheduleReview projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.


Related Topics • Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager, page 169 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Project Manager Command (View Menu), page 410 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Edit a ScheduleReview Project in the Project Manager 1. Open a document. The Project Manager automatically displays the

ScheduleReview project associated with the model. 2. In the Project Manager window, click the ScheduleReview bar. The title on the

bar reflects the title of the active ScheduleReview project. 3. Click the Display Sets folder. 4. Double-click an item in the folder to edit the settings.

Notes





• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access commands on the shortcut menu to run the ScheduleReview project. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.


Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager, page

169 • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167 • Move the Project Manager Window, page 164 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Review a Construction Sequence in the Project Manager

1. Open a model document. 2. On the ScheduleReview toolbar, click Play.

Notes

• If you right-click in the Project Manager window, you can access commands on the shortcut menu to run or edit ScheduleReview projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not appear.



Related Topics • Construction Module, page 22 • ScheduleReview Toolbar, page 396 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Working with Display Sets: An Overview


Working with Display Sets: An Overview SmartPlant Review includes the ability to form sets of graphic objects, called display sets, that you can manipulate. SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets. However, your hardware capability can limit your number of display sets.

A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one or more other display sets. Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or display sets to any level of nesting you require. However, a display set cannot contain itself or any other display set that contains itself (to prevent recursive or looping organization structures).

Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when you assign conflicting display characteristics to the same elements. The lower the display set number is, the higher the precedence. Therefore, an element that is a member of two different display sets appears with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.

Caution

• The portion of display sets that use the search criteria Picked Objects can be lost when you edit the definition in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. The loss also can occur if the display set definition is loaded using the Import Load Display Set dialog box. The selected elements are lost if you modify the design files that contain these elements. For this reason, only use the Picked Objects search criteria in temporary display sets.

In SmartPlant Review, you also can automatically define display sets by selecting a type of label data. SmartPlant Review automatically creates these display sets for you based on the criteria that you select.

You can import and export tags to a user-defined database or to a different project file. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets. You can import and export one or all attributes. The display sets correspond to the delivered fields.

The software allows you to switch the brightness of selected display sets. You can switch from a dimmed level to normal brightness. This setting applies to all display sets (that is, you cannot isolate a portion of the display sets and apply a different setting). You never can have some display sets in low brightness (or dimmed) and others in high brightness.

Note

• If you are familiar with using displays sets in DesignReview, see Display Sets Changes for more information about the differences between displays sets in DesignReview and SmartPlant Review.



Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Display Set Changes, page 27 • Import Display Sets, page 179 • View Display Sets, page 172

View Display Sets 1. Click View > Project Manager. 2. Click the Display Sets drawer.

Notes

• Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same elements. The lower the display set number, the higher the precedence. This means that an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.

• Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your new display set does not seem to display properly, overlapping display sets may be the problem. The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. For example, if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off DisplaySet1, then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on, Object1 will appear again.

Related Topics • Show or Hide Items in a Model with Project Manager, page 166

Display Sets - Show Only 1. Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there

are some display sets already created. 2. Highlight the display set(s) whose display you wish to remain active. 3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Show Only.

Tips

• You can also select Show Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut menu. First, select the display set(s) in Project Manager, then right-click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.



Notes

• The Show Only command is a toggle used to display selected display sets. When selected, the command displays only the selected display set(s) in all the views. All the other elements are transparent.

• You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within the Project Manager. When a display set is "On", or visible, a check mark appears next to the yellow cube . When a display set is "Off", or transparent, a check mark does not appear.

Related Topics • Display Sets - Hide Only, page 173

Display Sets - Hide Only 1. Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there

are some display sets already created. 2. Highlight the display set(s) whose display you wish to hide. 3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only.

Tip

• You can also select Hide Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut menu. First, select the display set(s) in Project Manager, then right-click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.

Notes

• The Hide Only command is a toggle used to hide selected display sets. When selected, the command hides (does not display) the selected display set(s) in all the views. All other elements are visible.

• You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within the Project Manager. When a display set is On, or visible, a check mark appears next to the yellow cube . When a display set is Off, or transparent, the check mark does not appear.

Related Topics • Delete Display Sets, page 174 • Display Sets - Show Only, page 172 • View Display Sets, page 172



Delete Display Sets 1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Delete. 2. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the display set.

Note

• You can also right-click in Project Manager, then select Edit > Delete.

Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview, page 171

Defining Display Sets: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides the ability to form visual groups of graphic objects based on user-defined criteria. These graphical groups are called display sets. You may define up to 250,000 display sets in a single SmartPlant Review project.

You can define display sets to contain any group of graphical data. However, display sets must meet the following criteria:

• A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one other display set.

• Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or display sets to any level of nesting.

• A display set cannot contain itself or any other display set that contains itself.

Once a display set is defined, it can be manipulated independent of the model. For instance, you can review different material assignments on a single structure of an entire facility, or wireframe the HVAC data in a shaded model of a plant.

Display sets, one of the major features of the SmartPlant Review core product, greatly extend the review process. Display sets allow you to isolate and separate objects within huge projects, allowing you to perform an in-depth review analysis of your 3D model.

Important

• The lower the display set ID number, the higher the precedence. This means that an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics turned on.



• Display sets that use the search criteria, Picked Object(s), can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session, or if the display set definition is loaded using the Import Display Set dialog box. The selected elements are lost if the design files that contain these elements is modified. For this reason, it is recommended that you only use the Picked Object(s) search criteria for temporary display sets.

• When you exit SmartPlant Review, the current display set definitions and manipulations are automatically saved to a filename with a .dst extension.

Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179 • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 180 • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Export Display Sets, page 180 • Import Display Sets, page 179 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview, page 171

Create a Display Set Definition 1. Click Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set. 2. Type a name for the Display Set you are defining. 3. Type a display set ID number. The new display set ID default is the first non-zero

and non-used user ID available in the project. 4. Click Edit in the Definition group. 5. Click Insert and define the selection criteria for the display set.

Note

• See Find Object for more information on defining selection criteria. 6. Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the

Default Material group.

Tip

• When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color, surface characteristics, and so on) when applied.

7. Type a Description for the display set. 8. Click OK.



Important

• If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, the display set name is defaulted to "Copy of" and the selected display set name (i.e. "Copy of Reboiler System").

• If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, BUT the current criteria definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty, then the new display set's name is set to "Copy of Find Object."

Notes

• You can also click Display Sets on the Tools toolbar or right-click in Project Manager, then select New > Display Set.

Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your new display set does not seem to display properly, overlapping display sets may be the problem. The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. For example, if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off DisplaySet1, then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and then on, Object1 will appear again.

Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179 • Display Set Changes, page 27 • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Import Display Sets, page 179

Sub-definitions Sub-definitions are sometimes needed to create more complicated definitions. Sub-definitions are created by placing an operation on a line by itself, and then using the FIND operator on the following line. Each line in a sub-definition works similarly to the definition itself. The FIND operation selects a group of elements and then each of the following lines, up to the end of the sub-definition, operates on the previous result to create a new group of elements. Mark the end of a sub-definition by choosing the END FIND option, which appears on the continuation operator list.

The end of a sub-definition results in a group of elements that meet the sub-definition criteria. This sub-definition group is then applied to the search criteria of any previous FIND criteria to produce the completed set of elements. Definitions can be nested indefinitely and can be nested multiple times. The following example definition contains one sub-definition:



FIND Volume 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El

KEEP ONLY Display Set Firewater

THROW AWAY Data Diameter > 12

ADD

FIND Volume 375 N, 600 E, 377 El - 500 N, 700 E, 500 El

KEEP ONLY Level 7, 8, 9, 31

THROW AWAY File steel.dgn

THROW AWAY Color 3

END FIND

ADD Picked Object(s)

Lines 1 through 3 define the group of elements in the specified volume that belong to the Firewater display set and are <= 12 inches in diameter.

Line 4 adds the sub-definition to the group.

Line 5 begins the sub-definition by selecting a volume to start with.

Lines 6, 7, and 8 keep only the elements on certain levels and then throw away anything left that is in file steel.dgn with color number 3. The END FIND operator on line 9 ends the sub-definition. The group that results from this sub-definition is then added to the results from line 3 to yield a new group. The last line adds some selected elements to the group to yield a final set of elements.

Related Topics • Find an Object, page 180

Edit a Display Set Definition 1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition. 2. Click Edit in the Definition group. 3. Change the selection criteria as you want.

Tip

• See Find Object for more information on defining selection criteria. 4. Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the

Default Material group.



Tip

• When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the set appear in the Main view using those material properties (color, surface characteristics, and so on).

5. Click OK.

Notes

• You can also click Edit Display Sets on the Tools toolbar or right-click in Project Manager, then select Edit Definition.

• Selecting the Copy button in the Edit Definition dialog box will copy the current complete criteria definition (even if blank) into the clipboard.

• Selecting the Paste button in the Edit Definition dialog box will paste the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. If there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not changed.

Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179 • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 180

Assign Material to a Display Set 1. Highlight a display set in the Project Manager. 2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material. 3. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes. 4. Click Edit Materials to modify material definitions in the selected palette file.

Important

• Material assignments can be made to individual 3D objects if the Photo-Realism module is installed. The core product is limited to display set material assignments only.

Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177



Automatically Define Display Sets 1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define. 2. Select the labels for which you want to create display sets. 3. Specify a starting ID. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• The labels that you select from are read in from all the labels files associated with the .dri file you opened.

• The Start ID field defaults to the first unused ID. Once the automatic definition process begins, the Start ID increments once per generated display set, skipping any ID already in use.

Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 180 • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Export Display Sets, page 180 • Import Display Sets, page 179

Import Display Sets 1. Click File > Import > Display Sets. 2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file. 3. Click each display set ID or Name to select. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• A display set is a collection of design file elements that are grouped together according to specific definition criteria.

• You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for importing.

Related Topics • Export Display Sets, page 180



Export Display Sets 1. Click File > Export > Display Sets. 2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file. 3. Click each display set ID or Name to select. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• The file to export has an .mdb extension.

• Use the File > Import > Display Sets command to import displays sets that you have exported.

Related Topics • Import Display Sets, page 179

Find an Object You can access the Find Object command using one of the following methods:

• Click Edit > Find Object.

• Click Find Object on the Tools MiniBar.

• Press Ctrl+F.

Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175

Display Sets - Reverse Dim 1. Select a display set from the list in Project Manager. 2. Click Tools, point to Display Sets, and click Reverse Dim.

Note

• To allow the display sets again to have dimmed perspective, you can return to this command and clear the Reverse Dim setting on the Tools menu.

Related Topics • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179 • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177



Edit Display Set Dialog Box Allows you to create a new or edit an existing display set definition.

Name - Displays the name of the display set for the definition that you are creating or editing.

ID - Displays the ID of the display set for the definition that you are editing. This ID must be unique.

Definition Criteria - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects you want to include in the display set.

Edit - Displays the Edit Definition dialog box, allowing you to specify criteria describing the graphic objects you want to include in the display set.

Default Material Name - Displays the name of the material file to assign to the display set.

Edit - Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, which allows you to select a material to assign to the display set and to specify the properties for that material.

Clear - Removes the current material assignment for the display set.

Description Text - Displays the text description associated with the current display set. You can edit these notes to describe the display set definition that you are creating.

Clear - Removes the text description associated with the display set.

Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu), page 414

Edit Definition Dialog Box Allows you to edit the definition that the software uses to combine the objects that compose the selected display set.



There are several different operators that you use to search for an object. The first two operators are FIND and FIND ALL BUT.

• FIND - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the specified criteria.

• FIND ALL BUT - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that do not meet the specified criteria.

After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT, you are prompted to select the definition type of the criteria: Data, File, Level, Color, Display Set, Volume Inside, Volume Overlap, Picked Object(s), or Linkages.

• Data - Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field name, a data operator, and a match string. An element matches data criteria if it has the specified application label data field, and the data in that field matches the match string according to the data operator. An element will not match if it does not have the specified label data field name or if it has no label data at all.

After you select the Data type criteria, the available data field names appear in a list. The data field names are derived from the label data as follows. Each line in the label data is scanned for a colon (:) character. If a colon exists, then all the text to the left of the colon is considered the data field name. For example, the line: Equip no: G-7708A would yield:

data field name = Equip no:

data field data = G-7708A

If there is no colon in the line, then the first white space after the first text is used to delimit the name. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the data field data. For example, the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield:

data field name = Equip

data field data = no G-7708A

After you select the data field name, a list of data operators displays:

= Data field information equals the match string.

> The first number in the data field data is greater than the match number.

>= The first number in the data field data is greater than or equal to the match number.

< The first number in the data field data is less than the match number.

<= The first number in the data field data is less than or equal to the match number.



Note

• There is not a "does not equal" data operator (!=) provided since the same effect can be accomplished by combining the equals (=) and FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line.

After you select the operator, the Enter Data dialog box appears. For data operators <, >, >=, and <=, this value is simply a number to compare to. For the = data operator, this value is treated as a text string to match. The match string can contain the special characters * and ?, where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ? matches exactly one character.

For example, the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field data: 12347713line, 7783line, 1247723 line, and 123477a3 water line.

The match string is case insensitive. For example, if a label value is stored exactly as "New" in the label database, the following Find Object definitions will return the same results:

Find DATA Construction status = New

Find DATA Construction status = new

Find DATA Construction status = nEw

Find DATA Construction status = NEW

• File - Displays the Files dialog box, which allows you to select the files in which to search for the graphic objects.

• Level - Displays the Levels dialog box, which allows you to select one or more level numbers to search for the graphic objects. An element matches if it is located on one of the levels.

• Color - Allows you to select the colors of the graphic objects to search. You can choose one or more color numbers for your definition criteria. An element matches if it coincides with one of the chosen color numbers.

• Display Set - Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting one or more display set names. An element matches if it is in one of the display sets. However, the definition list cannot reference display sets that refer to themselves, even if the reference is through another display set, since this would create a "circular" definition.

• Volume Inside - Displays the Find Volume Inside dialog box, which allows you to search for graphic objects by specifying a volume definition (a portion of the model) by placing 3D data points. An element matches if it lies completely inside the volume (area).



• Volume Overlap - Displays the Find Volume Overlap dialog box, which allows you to specify a volume definition by placing data points. An element matches if it intersects or overlaps the volume (selected area), or if it lies completely inside the area.

• Picked Object(s) - Displays the Pick Objects dialog box, which allows you to select an object by clicking the graphic in the Main view.

Note

• The portion of display sets created using the Picked Object(s) search criteria can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. The picked objects portion will also be lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set form, or if the design file(s) that contain these elements is modified. For these reasons, the Picked Object(s) search criteria should only be used in temporary display sets.

• LINKAGES is the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object.

After you have defined a single criteria line, if you click Insert you are prompted to select an operation for additional definition lines:

• ADD - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, plus all the elements that meet the current criteria.

• ADD ALL BUT - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, excluding all the elements that do not meet the current criteria.

• KEEP ONLY - Allows you to create a group that consists of only the elements from the previous results that meet the current criteria.

• THROW AWAY - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, minus all the elements that meet the current criteria.

Note

• An element is only added to a group once, even if it meets multiple definition criteria. This list is followed by a list of criteria for your second line, and so on. Thus, you build the definition by selecting from lists, and these lists vary in content according to each stage. You may also want to read about Sub-Definitions.

Important

• If you select an editable display set in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, then that display set's criteria definition is used as the current criteria definition for the command. This allows you to select a display set, then run the Find Object command and find all the objects in that display set without having to manually re-enter its definition.



Example: Basic Search The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches). They are also in line 8011, intersect a certain section of the plant, and are not on level 12 or 15:

FIND Data Diameter >= 10

KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*

KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El

THROW AWAY Level 12,15

The first line creates a group of all the elements that have a number greater than or equal to 10 in the Diameter field. The second line searches this new group for elements that have the text 8011 somewhere in the Line No field. In this way, the previous group is narrowed down to a new group that includes only the elements that meet both criteria lines. The third criteria line creates a new group by searching the last group that was created for elements that are inside or overlapping the specified volume. The fourth line then throws away any elements in the group that are on levels 12 or 15. Since this is the last line, this final group of elements is the one selected by the Search For Objects Matching Criteria command.

Example 2: Search for "Null" Fields The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an empty field in the Service category.

FIND Data Service: = *

THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?*

The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. Then an additional search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one character in the Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in the Service field.

Notes

• You can select the Copy button to copy the current complete criteria definition (even if blank) onto the clipboard.

• You can select the Paste button to paste the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. If there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not changed.

• You can select the Clear button to remove all definition criteria for the display set.

• You can select the Delete button to remove the selected row of the criteria definition.



• You can select the Insert button to create a new row above the selected row in the definition criteria.

Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu), page 414

Find Volume Inside Dialog Box Allows you to set First and Second Defining points for the north, east, and elevation coordinates. You can also select a specific point in the Main view.

Dialog Box Options First - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the point in the Main view) for the first point in the volume definition.

• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.

• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.

• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the volume definition.

• Pick Point - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the Main view, the object you want to select.

Second - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the point in the Main view) for the second point in the volume definition.

• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point in the volume definition.

• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in the volume definition.

• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in the volume definition.

• Pick Point -Allows you to graphically select the second point in the volume definition.

Display set name - Displays the name of the display set that you are defining.




Find Volume Overlap Dialog Box Allows you to set First and Second Defining points for the north, east, and elevation coordinates. You can also select a specific point in the Main view.

Dialog Box Options First - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the point in the Main view) for the first point in the volume definition.

• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.

• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.

• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the volume definition.

• Pick Point - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the Main view, the object you want to select.

Second - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates (or select the point in the Main view) for the second point in the volume definition.

• North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point in the volume definition.

• East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in the volume definition.

• Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in the volume definition.

• Pick Point -Allows you to graphically select the second point in the volume definition.



Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box Assigns materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You must select the desired display set in the project manager display set control before running this command.



Display Set - Displays the display set name that you have selected in the Project Manager > Display Sets tray.

Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. You can type the name of an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field.

Browse - Determines the pathname to the directory containing the palette files. You can navigate to a file or folder.

Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. You can select a material to make it the active material.

Preview - Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface.

Edit Material - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box so you can create or edit a material definition.


Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to automatically define and create display sets.

Important

• To automatically define display sets, PDS label data must exist.

• SmartPlant Review automatically creates display sets based on the label data you select.

Label fields for display set creation - Allows you to pick items by label to include in a new display set.

Delete existing display sets with the same name - Overwrites existing display sets that have the same names.

Start ID - Allows you to type a numerical display set ID to start with. You can specify any unused ID. Any used IDs encountered after the start ID you specify are skipped automatically when new display sets are generated.

Related Topics • Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu), page 416 • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179 • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Defining Display Sets: An Overview, page 174



Pick Objects Dialog Box Allows you to set First and Second Defining points for the north, east, and elevation coordinates. You can also select a specific point in the Main view.

Pick Object - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the Main view, the object you want to select. An element matches if it is one of the elements you selected with a data point.

Picked objects - Displays the search criteria for the graphic object you selected using the Pick Object command.

Count - Displays the number of graphic objects that you selected.


Related Topics • Edit Definition Dialog Box, page 181 • Match Files Dialog Box, page 103

Import Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to select a .dst file for import. After selecting the .dst file for import, a list of all the display sets contained in the .dst file is displayed. You can select the display sets that you want to import from this list.

File name - Provides a space for you to type the name of the existing display set file.


ID - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by ID.

Name - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by name.

Select All - Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list.

Clear All - Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.

Related Topics • Import Display Sets Command (File Menu), page 358 • Import Display Sets, page 179



Export Display Sets Dialog Box Allows you to select a display set from the current project to export to a .mdb file.

File name - Provides a space for you to type the name of the existing display set file.


ID - Lists all the display sets that are available for export by ID.

Name - Lists all the display sets that are available for export by name.

Select All - Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list.

Clear All - Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.

Related Topics • Export Display Sets Command (File Menu), page 359 • Export Display Sets, page 180

Find Object Dialog Box Allows you to search for graphic objects according to defined search definition criteria.

Defining Criteria - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects you want to include in the display set.

There are several different operators that you use to search for an object you are looking for. The first two operators are FIND and FIND ALL BUT.

• FIND - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the specified criteria.

• FIND ALL BUT - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that do not meet the specified criteria.

After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT, you are prompted to select the definition type of the criteria: Data, File, Level, Color, Display Set, Volume Inside, Volume Overlap, Picked Object(s), or Linkages.

• Data - Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field name, a data operator, and a match string. An element matches data criteria if it has the specified application label data field, and the data in that field matches the match string according to the data operator. An element will not match if it does not have the specified label data field name or if it has no label data at all.

After you select the Data type criteria, the available data field names appear in a list. The data field names are derived from the label data as follows. Each line in the label



data is scanned for a colon (:) character. If a colon exists, then all the text to the left of the colon is considered the data field name. For example, the line: Equip no: G-7708A would yield:

data field name = Equip no:

data field data = G-7708A

If there is no colon in the line, then the first white space after the first text is used to delimit the name. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the data field data. For example, the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield:

data field name = Equip

data field data = no G-7708A

After you select the data field name, a list of data operators displays:

= Data field information equals the match string.

> The first number in the data field data is greater than the match number.

>= The first number in the data field data is greater than or equal to the match number.

< The first number in the data field data is less than the match number.

<= The first number in the data field data is less than or equal to the match number.

Note

• There is not a "does not equal" data operator (!=) provided since the same effect can be accomplished by combining the equals (=) and FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line.

After you select the operator, the Enter Data dialog box appears. For data operators <, >, >=, and <=, this value is simply a number to compare to. For the = data operator, this value is treated as a text string to match. The match string can contain the special characters * and ?, where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ? matches exactly one character.

For example, the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field data: 12347713line, 7783line, 1247723 line, and 123477a3 water line.

The match string is case insensitive. For example, if a label value is stored exactly as "New" in the label database, the following Find Object definitions will return the same results:



Find DATA Construction status = New

Find DATA Construction status = new

Find DATA Construction status = nEw

Find DATA Construction status = NEW

• File - Displays the Files dialog box, which allows you to select the files in which to search for the graphic objects.

• Level - Displays the Levels dialog box, which allows you to select one or more level numbers to search for the graphic objects. An element matches if it is located on one of the levels.

• Color - Allows you to select the colors of the graphic objects to search. You can choose one or more color numbers for your definition criteria. An element matches if it coincides with one of the chosen color numbers.

• Display Set - Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting one or more display set names. An element matches if it is in one of the display sets. However, the definition list cannot reference display sets that refer to themselves, even if the reference is through another display set, since this would create a "circular" definition.

• Volume Inside - Allows you to search for graphic objects by specifying a volume definition (a portion of the model) by placing 3D data points. An element matches if it lies completely inside the volume (area).

• Volume Overlap - Allows you to specify a volume definition by placing data points. An element matches if it intersects or overlaps the volume (selected area), or if it lies completely inside the area.

• Picked Object(s) - Displays the Pick Objects dialog box, which allows you to select an object by clicking the graphic in the Main view.

Note

• The portion of display sets created using the Picked Object(s) search criteria can be lost when the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. The picked objects portion will also be lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set form, or if the design file(s) that contain these elements is modified. For these reasons, the Picked Object(s) search criteria should only be used in temporary display sets.

• LINKAGES is the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object.

After you have defined a single criteria line, if you click Insert you are prompted to select an operation for additional definition lines:



• ADD - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, plus all the elements that meet the current criteria.

• ADD ALL BUT - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, excluding all the elements that do not meet the current criteria.

• KEEP ONLY - Allows you to create a group that consists of only the elements from the previous results that meet the current criteria.

• THROW AWAY - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, minus all the elements that meet the current criteria.

Note

• An element is only added to a group once, even if it meets multiple definition criteria. This list is followed by a list of criteria for your second line, and so on. Thus, you build the definition by selecting from lists, and these lists vary in content according to each stage. You may also want to read about Sub-Definitions.

Important

• If you select an editable display set in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, then that display set's criteria definition is used as the current criteria definition for the command. This allows you to select a display set, then run the Find Object command and find all the objects in that display set without having to manually re-enter its definition.

Example: Basic Search The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches). They are also in line 8011, intersect a certain section of the plant, and are not on level 12 or 15:








Example 2: Search for "Null" Fields The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an empty field in the Service category.

FIND Data Service: = *

THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?*

The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. Then an additional search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one character in the Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in the Service field.

Notes

• You can select the Copy button to copy the current complete criteria definition (even if blank) onto the clipboard.

• You can select the Paste button to paste the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete criteria definition. If there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not changed.

• You can select the Clear button to remove all definition criteria for the display set.

• You can select the Delete button to remove the selected row of the criteria definition.

• You can select the Insert button to create a new row above the selected row in the definition criteria.

Related Topics • Find an Object, page 180 • Find Object Command (Edit Menu), page 365

Define Search Criteria for Pipes The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or larger (assuming a Diameter Data field name in inches). They are also in line 8011, intersect a certain section of the plant, and are not on level 12 or 15:








Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323 • Sub-definitions, page 176 • The Get External Data Database, page 233 • Working with Display Sets: An Overview, page 171

Editing Positions: An Overview The Edit Display Set Position dialog box works in conjunction with the Tools > Display Sets > Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of their default location. This functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances and provides the ability to temporarily move a group of objects around in the model.

To reposition a display set, you must use the Edit Display Set Position dialog box to define the move destination and rotate angles for that display set. You can then use the Tools > Display Sets > Move command to toggle the display set to be repositioned or not using this information.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Edit Display Set Position, page 199 • Rotate Display Set, page 201

Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which to move a selected display set. Once the distance or destination path has been assigned, you can use the Move tab on this dialog box to move the display set.

You can also select reference origin coordinates and angles for rotating the selected display set.



Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to select and move a display set.

Display Set Name - Displays the name of the display set that you are moving.

ID - Displays the ID of the display set that you are moving.

Move - Moves the display set by the specified amount, or restores it to its original position.

Reset - Sets the Move Destination Delta values and Rotate Angles values to zero. The Move Reference Origin and the Rotate Reference Origin are not reset.

Minimum range in MU:SU:PU • North - Displays the current minimum north coordinate of a bounding

box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• East - Displays the current minimum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• Elevation - Displays the current minimum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

Maximum range in MU:SU:PU • North - Displays the current maximum north coordinate of a bounding

box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• East - Displays the current maximum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• Elevation - Displays the current maximum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display set. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box, page 195 • Edit Display Set Position, page 199 • Edit Position Command (Tools Menu), page 415



Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which the display set will be moved. While defining the destination coordinates, keep in mind that they are relative to the reference origin (where the display set started out).

Reference Origin in MU:SU:PU • North - Specifies the north coordinate for the move reference origin.

The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• East - Specifies the east coordinate for the move reference origin. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the move reference origin. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model using the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values.

Destination in MU:SU:PU • Absolute - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept absolute

destination values for the new display set position. This option allows you to move the display set a specified amount from the original reference point.

• Delta value - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the new display set position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.

• Delta direction - Switches the move coordinate boxes to accept delta directional offset values for the new display set position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.

• North - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the north coordinate for the new position. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• East - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the east coordinate for the new position. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

• Elevation - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the elevation coordinate for the new position. The units are displayed in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).



• Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the destination point rather than specifying each coordinate individually.

Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box, page 195 • Move Command (Tools Menu), page 412 • Move Display Set, page 199

Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) Allows you to specify the reference origin coordinates, in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units), for the point around which the current display set will rotate. The Rotate tab also allows you to specify the plan, front, and side angles, in degrees from 0 to less than 360, for rotating the display set.

North - Specifies the north coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates.

East - Specifies the east coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates.

Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set rotates.

Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the reference origin rather than specifying each coordinate individually.

Plan - Specifies the angle in the plan direction to rotate the display set.

Front - Specifies the angle in the front direction to rotate the display set.

Side - Specifies the angle in the side direction to rotate the display set.

Note

• The Rotate Reference origin in MU:SU:PU is adjusted internally by the move deltas on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.

Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box, page 195 • Rotate Display Set, page 201



Edit Display Set Position 1. Select a display set from the list in Project Manager. 2. Click Tools, point to Display Sets, and click Edit Position.

Tip

• The Edit Display Set Position dialog box identifies the display set name and identification in the Display set name and ID boxes, respectively.

3. On the Information tab, specify the current display set Range, activate/deactivate display set Move (based on current display set positional information), or Reset the Move and Rotate deltas back to zero (effectively returning the moved display set back to its original position).

4. On the Move tab, specify the desired move amounts for the current display set positional information.

5. On the Rotate tab, specify the desired rotate amounts for the current display set positional information.

Note

• Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily switched on during display set moves and all Collision Detection displays. However, during a display set move, only the display set that is being moved is affected. All other elements will be updated according to the active view settings. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and Endcap settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates.

Related Topics • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167

Move Display Set 1. Select the display set in the Project Manager > Display Sets window that you

want to move. 2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position. 3. Click the Move tab. 4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the

Reference Origin. 5. Select Absolute, Delta Value, or Delta Direction for the Destination. Delta

defines an offset from the current position, either by a specified amount (value), or by distance and bearing (direction), from the original reference point (the Reference Origin). Absolute defines the exact destination of the moved display set (not an offset).



6. Type the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Destination. 7. Click the Information tab. 8. Check the Move option to move the display set to the specified destination

coordinates. 9. Click OK.

Notes

• Moving display sets requires special considerations. Moved display sets that contain special elements such as pipes, valves, flanges, and elbows may sometimes not display properly unless the backface flags and endcap flags are turned on. At the same time, though, enabling backfaces and endcaps makes the display slower for views that contain pipes, valves, flanges, and elbows.

• Backface and Endcap settings are temporarily forced on during display set moves and for all Collision Detection displays. However, all other elements will be maintained and updated according to your specifications in the View Settings dialog box. Also, the temporary change to the Backface and Endcap settings does not affect normal updates or eye motion movement.

• If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets, the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.

• You can also click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather than specifying each coordinate individually.

• Once the display set destination has been defined in the Edit Position dialog box, use the Move toggle command on the display set shortcut menu in the Project Manager > Display Sets window, or Tools > Display Sets, to toggle the Move property without having to return to the Information tab on the Edit Display Set Position dialog box.

• You can also dynamically move display sets using the Motion > Display Set control mode command.

• Although you can select multiple display sets in Program Manager, you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion.

• You can also use the Keypad to manipulate the position of a display set.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Edit Display Set Position, page 199 • Rotate Display Set, page 201



Rotate Display Set 1. Select the display set in the Project Manager > Display Sets window that you

want to rotate. 2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position. 3. Click the Rotate tab. 4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the

Reference Origin. 5. Specify the Plan, Front, and Side angles. 6. Click OK.

Notes

• If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets, the object is displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.

• You can also click Pick Point to select the point in the model rather than specifying each coordinate individually.

• The Rotate Reference Origin is adjusted internally by the move deltas on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.

• Although you can select multiple display sets in Program Manager, you can select only one display set at a time for dynamic motion.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Edit Display Set Position, page 199 • Move Display Set, page 199

Taking Snapshots: An Overview


Taking Snapshots: An Overview This command allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view. Image files can be saved in . rgb (red,green, blue), .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .pcx, and .tga formats. If you do not specify a format, then the image is saved as an .rgb image. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.

Three Ways to Capture a Snapshot 1. Full-Screen (taken by pressing Print Screen) - Data is captured directly from the

screen without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard. 2. Application Window Only (taken by pressing Alt+Print Screen) - Data is

captured directly from the application window without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard.

3. Graphic View Only (taken by using the Edit->Copy command or by pressing Cntrl+C in the Main, Plan, or Elevation views) - Data is captured directed from the graphic view without an update (removing or adding the focus rectangle), and is copied to the Clipboard.

In all other cases, the scaled and/or partial views are displayed in the Snapshot View dialog box during the capture process. Be sure to display the image in the Main view the way you want to save it.

Tip

• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but have less than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.

Notes

• To maximize snapshot performance, enlarge the Main view as much as possible before running the Snapshot command. Higher Anti-alias settings on large images at low screen resolutions may require you to enlarge the Main view before the snapshot can be taken.

• Occasionally, when using High Resolution snapshot with an anti-alias factor and/or scale factor greater than 1 (which forces tiled view updates), one of the tiles in the resulting snapshot image may appear brighter than the surrounding tiles. This anomaly may happen because of a conflict between OpenGL lighting and snapshot process in which the eye point moves slightly for each snapshot tile in the output image. Shades of gray seem to be sensitive to this tiling. Modifying the color of gray objects may eliminate the problem.



• Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing, especially when Anti-alias settings are greater than 1. These features include full screen mode, measurements, data annotations, and text annotations. Also, some settings, such as Axis, are not supported in high-resolution printing.

Caution

• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during high-resolution printing. SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the intended image. SmartPlant Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason.

• There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution printing. A general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is: Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32.

Note

• To use this functionality, you must install one of the following modules:

1. Construction 2. API 3. Collaboration 4. Simulation and Visual Effects 5. Photo-Realism 6. On-site Drawing Generation

Related Topics • On-Site Drawing Generation Module, page 23 • Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch, page 205

Snapshot View Dialog Box Allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view. Image files can be saved in . rgb (red,green, blue), .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .pcx, and .tga formats. If you do not specify a format, then the image is saved as an .rgb image. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.

Extent - Allows you to select the area to include in the snapshot. Example selections include Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.

Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. The Anti-alias value determines how much data is captured and averaged to produce the snapshot size. If Anti-alias is set to 2, then SmartPlant Review captures and averages twice as much data for the width and height. If you multiply the Anti-alias value by the Scale value and square the result, the end answer is the number of "Main views" of data that



SmartPlant Review processes. The Anti-alias field defaults to 1, which means that no anti-aliasing occurs.

Tip

• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.

Notes

• There must be sufficient hard disk space when using high-resolution printing. A general rule of thumb for calculating file size is: Bytes = Image Height X Image Width X 32.


Rotate 90 degrees - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90 degrees toggle is on, the output image rotates 90 degrees (clockwise) for plotting purposes. If you capture the image without the capture form, SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from left-to-right, instead of top-to-bottom.

Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace the snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file. To use this option, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Ignore aspect - Specifies whether to ignore the aspect ratio of the selected extent or to stretch the image to fix the specified height and width.

Scale - Specifies the aspect ratio between the height and width of the snapshot image.

Width - Specifies the width in pixels of the snapshot image.

Height - Specifies the height of the snapshot image in pixels. If the Ignore aspect option is off, the Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main view. So if you change one field, the other fields change accordingly. If you turn the toggle on, the Scale field is disabled and set to its default value. You can then change Width and Height fields.

File name - Indicates the path and file name where you want to save the snapshot. If you do not want to use the default information in the File name box, type the appropriate path and name of the file. A Browse button is available for navigating to the correct location.

Use SmartSketch - Allows you to open the snapshot in SmartSketch as well as save the snapshot to a file. To use this functionality, you must install the On-Site Drawing Generation module.



Template file name - Specifies the template which SmartSketch will use to open the snapshot. If you do not want to use the default information in the Template file name box, type the appropriate path and name of the template file for the snapshot. A Browse button is available.

Reset All - Resets all snapshot properties to preset defaults.

Caution

• When you use the Snapshot command for a view, do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead of the image. For the same reason, any screen saver operations are automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running. Capturing the image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture the image quickly.

Related Topics • Snapshot Command (View Menu), page 391 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202

Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch 1. Click View > Snapshot. 2. On the Snapshot View dialog box, select the type of display view that you want

from the Extent list. 3. Set the value for Anti-alias. Move the slider to the right to increase the value or to

the left to decrease the value. 4. If you want to rotate the view in the snapshot, select the Rotate 90 Degrees

checkbox. 5. In the Dimensions box, select the Ignore Aspect checkbox if you do not want the

software to consider the aspect ratio of the view extent. If you do not select Ignore Aspect, the software stretches the image to the specified height and width. Then, type any changes to the pixel values in Scale, Width,and Height.

Tip

• If you select Ignore Aspect, the Scale box is not available. 6. In the Output box, specify a name for the snapshot file. 7. If you have installed the On-Site Drawing module, you can select the Use

SmartSketch checkbox to open the snapshot in SmartSketch. Then, in the Template file name box, specify the template SmartSketch should use to open the snapshot.



Note

• If installed, SmartSketch opens and places the snapshot inside the drawing border specified by the selected template. If you have not installed SmartSketch, a message instructs you to load SmartSketch before using the snapshot functionality. The snapshot process stops. You can continue to create ordinary snapshots using the Snapshot View dialog box.

Related Topics • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202

Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot 1. Calculate the number of horizontal and vertical tiles required based on scaled

width and scaled height.

• T(x) = Scaled width / 128 • T(y) = Scaled height / 128

2. Calculate tile size = 128 * anti-alias factor. Tile size is equal to the minimum Main window size in x, y, pixels.

3. Calculate the total number of horizontal and vertical tiles which can be blocked per window update.

• B(x) = Main window width / tile size • B(y) = Main window height / tile size

4. Calculate the total number of updates required per snapshot.

• U(x) = Number of horizontal blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer (T(x) / B(x))

• U(y) = Number of vertical blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer (T(y) / B(y))

• U = Total updates = U(x) * U(y)

Caution

• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during high-resolution printing. SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the intended image. SmartPlant Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason.

• Be sure you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-resolution printing. The general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is: Bytes = Image Height * Image Width * 32.

Related Topics • On-Site Drawing Generation Module, page 23 • Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch, page 205

Placing Measurements: An Overview


Placing Measurements: An Overview You can place measurements and create measurement collections in SmartPlant Review. Measurements consist of key-point to key-point precision measuring and are stackable, persistent, and available in English and Metric units regardless of the project environment.

For each measurement, you can measure the distance between two highlighted snaplock points, two surface points, or between a surface point and a snaplock point. SmartPlant Review shows you the points you selected, a line between the two points, and the distance between the points.

In SmartPlant Review, measurements work like a "rolling tape measure," with a continuous connection between each selected point. Because each measurement requires two points, for N number of measurements, you must select N + 1 number of points. The points comprising this "rolling tape measure" are grouped together in a measurement collection. You can create your own collections, which is useful if you need more than one set of measurements, or use the default collection provided.

Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217 • Snaplock Measurement, page 207 • Surface Measurement, page 208

Snaplock Measurement 1. Click Tools > Measure > Snaplock. 2. Select an object. 3. Accept the object by left-clicking anywhere in the view. 4. Select the snaplock point on the object from which to measure.

Tips

• Slowly right-click to cycle through the available snaplock points on the object.

• Click Tools > Measure > Snaplock to define the end point for the measurement.

• Identify another point by repeating steps 2 - 5.

• Continue to identify snaplock points.

Notes

• When measuring a distance, you must access the Snaplock command twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be measured.



• Because measurements occur for every single selection point, you can use Tools > Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary measurements.

• You can use any of the standard motion commands or view manipulation commands to move to a different part of the model between defining snaplock points.

• Snaplock measurements allow you to define formats for the line, snaplock points, and text.

• The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view.

• See Placing 3D Points for more information on identifying points.

• Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the snaplock point.

• You can also access this command pressing F8 or by clicking Snaplock Measure on the Tools Mini-Bar.

Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Move Measurement, page 209 • Surface Measurement, page 208

Surface Measurement 1. Click Tools > Measure > Surface. 2. Click the first point on the model. 3. Click Tools > Measure > Surface. 4. Click the second point on the model. 5. Continue to identify end points.

Notes • When measuring a distance, you must access the Surface command

twice because it takes two selection points to define the distance to be measured.

• Surface measurement allows you to select any surface point on any object.

• Because measurements occur for every single selection point, you can use Tools > Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary measurements.

• The measurement is saved in the active collection. • You can define formats for the measurement line, points, and text. • The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view.



• Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the next surface point.

Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Move Measurement, page 209 • Snaplock Measurement, page 207

Move Measurement 1. Click Tools > Measure > Move Measurement. 2. Click any square red label position marker.

3. Click any point in the Main view to reposition the lower left corner of the

measurement field.

Notes

• Move Measurement displays the label position markers (red squares) Click the position marker for the measurement you want to move and then click where you want the new position to be.

• The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line with a line.

• You can click anywhere on the label to move or restore the measurement.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Restore Position, page 210



Restore Position 1. Click Tools > Measure > Restore Position. 2. Click the red label marker of the label you want to restore.

Note

• The selected label returns to the original position as soon as you click the red label position marker.


138 • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Move Measurement, page 209

Delete Last Measurement Click Tools > Measure > Delete Last.

Notes

• Delete Last removes the last measurement made in the active collection.

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking Delete Last Measurement on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete All Measurements, page 211 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Move Measurement, page 209



Delete Active Collection Measurements Click Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements.

Notes

• This command removes all measurements in the active collection, but does not delete the collection itself.

• To see which collection is the active collection, click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections and note the name highlighted in the Collection Name box.

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+M or by clicking Delete Active Collection Measurements on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Delete All Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Move Measurement, page 209

Delete All Measurements Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements.

Notes

• This command removes all measurements in all collections, but does not delete the collections themselves.

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Alt+M or by clicking Delete All Measurements on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Move Measurement, page 209



Delete All Collections Click Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections.

Notes

• This command removes all collections and all of the measurements they contain. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting the collections.

• To see the measurements contained in each collection before deleting them, click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections, select a collection Name, then click the Display option to view the measurements in the Main view.

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+D or by clicking Delete All Collections on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Move Measurement, page 209

Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview SmartPlant Review groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. A measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each collection. One collection is independent of all other collections, allowing you to display or hide measurement collections independently in the model.

For example, one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of footings measurements. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the I-Beam collections of measurements.

You can create your own Measurement Collections or use the default measurement collection provided. You can have any number of named measurement collections, up to the limit of records allowed in the project database. All measurement information is stored in the project database.

You can also customize how the measurement symbology (lines, snaplock points, and text) appears in your project by using the Tools > Measure > Edit Collection command. User-defined collections can display measurements in English or Metric units regardless of the project environment.



As you place measurements, all selection points are placed in the current or active collection. Measurements occur for every single point. You can delete specific measurements in a collection by using the Point Range options.

Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217 • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete All Collections, page 212 • Delete All Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210

Measurement Collections Dialog Box Allows you to create or edit basic information for existing measurement collections. You can customize all measurement symbology for lines, text, formats, and snaplock points. Also, you can display user defined collection measurements in English and/or Metric units regardless of the project environment.

Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection. With the Edit tab, you can also display each collection independently from the other collections or select a specific range of measurements in a collection to display or delete.

Notes

• The active measurement collection is the last measurement collection selected immediately before exiting the Edit tab.

• Measurement collection names cannot contain single tick marks ( ' ).

Collection Name - Allows you to enter the required name of the measurement collection.

Delete - Removes the selected measurement point range in the active collection.

Description - Allows you to enter an optional description of the measurement collection.

Display - Displays all or part of a measurement collection using the selected point range.



Point range From - Selects the starting measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.

To - Selects the ending measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.

Display - Displays the selected measurement point range to assist you in determining which measurement points to delete.

Delete - Removes the currently selected point range.

Related Topics • Measurement Collections Dialog Box, page 213

Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the properties for the line that displays to show the distance being measured. The Line tab also allows you to control the line color, width, and display pattern.

Collection - Displays the collection name of the currently selected measurement collection.

Color - Allows you to select a color for the measurement leader line.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a line color.

Width - Allows you to select a line width for connecting line measurements.

Solid - Allows you to select a solid line style for connecting line measurements.

Dash - Allows you to select a dashed line style for connecting line measurements.

Dot-dash - Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for connecting line measurements.

Dot - Allows you to select a dotted line style for connecting line measurements.


Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the display properties for the measurement text. You can define different text properties for each measurement collection.

You can also change the font, text color, background color, and position along the measure line where the measurement text displays using this tab.

Collection - States the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.



Background Transparent - Allows you to select a transparent background for measurement text.

Color - Displays the background color for the measurement labels that are currently selected.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the background color associated with the measurement.

Position from 0.0 to 1.0 - Allows you to select the position for the measurement label between start and end points for a measurement.

Font Name - Displays the name of the currently selected font for the measurement labels.

Edit - Displays the Font dialog box, allowing you to select font parameters.

Type - Displays the currently selected font type for the measurement labels. Supported font types include regular, bold, italic, and bold italic.

Size - Displays the currently selected font size for the measurement labels.

Color - Displays the font color for the measurement labels that are currently selected.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu), page 423 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box, page 213

Format Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Allows you to select the display of only master units or both master and sub units on the measurement label. You can also define whether measurements display in metric or imperial units and the amount of precision after the decimal place.

Collection - Displays the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.

Both master and sub units - Allows you to select the display of both master and sub units on the measurement label.

Decimal master units only - Allows you to select the display of master units only on the measurement label.

English - Displays measurement in English units.

Metric - Displays measurements in metric format.



Precision - States the maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal on measurement labels.

Master - States original master (MU) in current original master units (MU).

Sub - States original sub units (SU) for the current master file.


Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) Defines the measurement line terminator display properties for the active collection. These terminators indicate the points you are measuring between. You can also define the point color, style, and size using this tab.

Collection - Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.

Current - States the color of the snaplock measurement point that is currently displayed for a selected piece of geometry.

Alternate - States the color of all alternate, non-selected snaplock measurement points for a selected piece of geometry.

Final - States the color of the final displayed snaplock measurement point for a selected piece of geometry.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the snaplock point color.

Size from 6 to 10 pixels - Allows you to specify snaplock point size from 6 to 10 pixels.

Square - Allows you to specify square snaplock measurement points.

Round - Allows you to specify small, round snaplock measurement points.

Related Topics • Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu), page 423 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box, page 213



Create a New Measurement Collection Click Tools > Measure > New Collection.

Notes

• This command automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the active collection.

• The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an incremented integer (for example, AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). This name cannot be edited.

• To edit the newly created measurement collection, click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections.

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F8 or by clicking New Collection on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete All Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Snaplock Measurement, page 207 • Surface Measurement, page 208

Edit a Measurement Collection 1. Click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections. 2. Select the appropriate settings on the Measurement Collections dialog box.

Notes

• You can also access this command by pressing Shift+F8 or by clicking Edit Measurement Collections on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211 • Delete All Measurements, page 211 • Delete Last Measurement, page 210 • Snaplock Measurement, page 207 • Surface Measurement, page 208

Using Annotations: An Overview


Using Annotations: An Overview From tagging and annotating to finding and attaching data, SmartPlant Review provides a number of features that ensure clear, concise visual communication among project team members.

• Tags allow you to attach pertinent information about an object in your model, such as its name, location, type or classification, or attach general comments made during a walk-through of the design.

• Measurement features provide the capability to datapoint (snaplock) at the center of a pipe.

• Data Annotations allow you to attach external data - spreadsheets, raster images - to objects in your model.

• Text Annotations allow you to access and display label data associated with objects in your model.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Import Tags, page 225 • Place Tag With Leader, page 219 • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220 • Place Text Annotations, page 347

Communicating with Tags: An Overview Tags provide a means of communication between the people who design a plant and the people who construct a plant. Tags can provide information such as the name of a piece of equipment, its location, its type or classification, or general comments made during a walk-through of the design. Essentially, tags are labels that provide additional information about items in a plant.

In SmartPlant Review, you can place tags with leader lines or without leader lines, edit tags, and delete tags. When you create a new tag, it is assigned the next available tag number, and the tag becomes the active tag. The software saves the corresponding view, including levels and clipping planes, when you place a new tag. Then, when you display the tag, the corresponding view also displays. You can search for a tag by entering text that appears in the tag label. You can directly go to a tag by entering a tag number.

You can step through the tag list to view each tag. The tag you are currently at is the active tag. You can display all tags, only the active tag, or no tags. You can also display action comments, which are additional text fields associated with tags that were placed during project design.



You can import and export tags to an ASCII .tag file. This ASCII file is used in other PBS products to allow users to review tags placed within SmartPlant Review. After reviewing the tags, users can make comments that are written back to the same ASCII file. The user can then import the modified ASCII file to SmartPlant Review and show the comments placed by other products.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228 • Using Annotations: An Overview, page 218

Place Tag With Leader 1. Click Tags > Place > Leader. 2. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag leader line to

begin.

Note

• Double-clicking will cause the object to highlight. You then will be able to see the object's attributes and accept or reject the placement point. The leader line will start at the point where you clicked the object. However, you will not see the leader line until the bubble is placed.

• The status bar, the horizontal strip at the bottom of the active window, displays the tag placement prompts.

3. Left-click to accept the placement point for the leader line.

Important

• The first placement point is used to set the target depth for your bubble in the current view, as well as the starting point for the leader line.

4. Single-click away from the object at the location where you want to place your bubble.

5. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.

Notes

• Tags appear in all three views. The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window.

• When you place a new tag, the corresponding view is also saved. This view includes the levels that are turned on and the clipping planes. Each time you display a tag, the corresponding view is also displayed.



• You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review searches first in the directory specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review searches the directories specified by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH variables. If the file is not in any of these locations, SmartPlant Review searches c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.

• If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags Off command is active. This means that the actual tags do not appear in the design.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Delete Tag, page 221 • Go To Tag, page 223 • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220

Place Tag Without Leader 1. Click Tags > Place > No Leader. 2. Click the location in the view for the tag. 3. Type the tag text. 4. Click Place Tag Without Leader on the Tags toolbar.

Notes

• The Place Tag Without Leader command places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three views.

• The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window.

• The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.

• You can establish the pre-defined template used by the Place Tag command by creating an ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review searches first in the directory specified by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review searches the directories specified by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH variables. If the file is not in any of these locations, SmartPlant Review searches c:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Delete Tag, page 221 • Find Tag, page 222



Edit Tag 1. Click Tags > Edit. 2. Select the tag Number to edit. 3. Type the Text for the tag. 4. Select Show comments to display comments associated with the tag. 5. Select Leader to use a leader line to the tag. 6. Click Place to determine where the leader line is placed. 7. Select Active only, All or None for Display option. 8. Click OK.

Notes

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > All to view tags in the view.

• You can also select Edit Tag on the Tools MiniBar.

Related Topics • Delete Tag, page 221 • Find Tag, page 222 • Go To Tag, page 223 • Place Tag With Leader, page 219 • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220

Delete Tag 1. Click Tags > Delete. 2. Select the tag to delete. 3. Click OK.

Notes

• When you delete a tag, the tag number is also deleted and is not assigned to a new tag.

• You can also select Delete Tag on the Tools MiniBar.

Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218 • Edit Tag, page 221 • Find Tag, page 222 • Place Tag With Leader, page 219 • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220



Find Tag 1. Click Tags > Find. 2. Type the identifying information for the tag you want to locate. 3. Click OK. 4. The matching tag displays on the Show Matches screen. 5. Click OK.

Notes

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Displays > All to view tags in the design file.

• You can use the special characters * to match multiple characters and ? to match exactly one character.

• When you are finished displaying the tag, redefine the levels (see Level Settings) and clipping planes because the view that corresponds to the tag may have specific levels and clipping planes defined.

• You can also select Find Tag on the Tags toolbar.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Go To Tag, page 223 • Tags Toolbar, page 401

Next Tag Click Tags > Next.

Notes

• If the active tag number is the last tag in the tag list, the next tag number is the first tag number in the tag list.

• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tag > Display > All.


• You can also click Next Tag on the Tools MiniBar or press F10.

Related Topics • Find Tag, page 222 • Go To Tag, page 223 • Previous Tag, page 223



Previous Tag Click Tags > Previous.

Notes

• If the active tag number is 1, the previous tag number is the last tag number in the tag list.

• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tags > Display > All.

• When you are finished displaying the tag, redefine the levels (see Level Settings) and clipping planes. This is necessary because the view that corresponds to the tag may have specific levels and clipping planes defined.

• You can also click Previous Tag on the Tools MiniBar or press Ctrl+F10.

Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218 • Find Tag, page 222 • Go To Tag, page 223 • Next Tag, page 222

Go To Tag 1. Click Tags > Go To. 2. Select the tag Number. 3. Click OK.

Notes

• The tag you go to becomes the active tag.

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > Active Tag to display the tags in the model.


• You can also select Go To Tag on the Tags toolbar.

Related Topics • Find Tag, page 222 • Tags Toolbar, page 401



Activate Display of Tags Click Tags > Activate.

Related Topics • Display Active Tag Only, page 224 • Display All Tags, page 224 • Display No Tags, page 225

Display Active Tag Only 1. Click View > Settings.

Tip

• You can also display active tag only by clicking Tags > Display > Active Only.

2. Click the Display tab. 3. Select the Active tags only box in the Options section.

Note

• If you are in a shared environment, click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by other team members using the same session.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Display Action Comments, page 225 • Display All Tags, page 224 • Display No Tags, page 225

Display All Tags Click Tags > Display > All.

Notes

• The Display All Tags command allows you to display all the tags in the view.

• You must have tag display turned on to use Display All Tags.


Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Display Action Comments, page 225 • Display Active Tag Only, page 224



Display No Tags Click Tags > Display > None.

Note

• The Display Tags > None command allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Display Action Comments, page 225 • Display Active Tag Only, page 224 • Display All Tags, page 224

Display Action Comments Click Tags > Display > Action Comments.

Notes

• The Action Comments command allows you to display the action comments for the current tag.

• Action Comments are tags that are placed when the model is created with a Plant Design product.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218 • Display Active Tag Only, page 224 • Display All Tags, page 224 • Display No Tags, page 225

Import Tags Click File, point to Import, and click Tags.

Notes

• You can stop redrawing the model by pressing Esc.

• When you import or export tags, the software generates a .tag file.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224 • Export Tags Command (File Menu), page 360 • Place Tag With Leader, page 219 • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220



Edit Tags Dialog Box Allows you to edit, or review the active tag. You can also use this dialog box to quickly create a new tag with or without a leader.

Number - Allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its number.

Delete - Removes the specified tag number from the model.

Caution

• If you click Delete, the selected tag will automatically be removed from the model. If you would like to verify a tag before removing it from the model, use the Delete command on the Tags menu.

Text - Displays data associated with a tag.

Show comments - Allows you to toggle between the comment text or the tag text.

Leader - Allows you to create a new tag with or without a leader.

Place - Allows you to place a new tag.

Active only - Displays only the active tags.

All - Displays all tags in the view.

None - Prevents the display of tags in the view.

Related Topics • Edit Tag, page 221 • Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu), page 454

Delete Tag Dialog Box Allows you to delete a tag by specifying its tag number. When you delete a tag, the tag number is also deleted and will not be assigned to a new tag.

Number - Allows you to choose a specific tag number to delete.

Verify - When this toggle is enabled, you will receive a prompt, "do you really want to delete tag X?". You can answer Yes to delete the tag number or No to cancel the command and return to the Delete Tag dialog box.

Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218 • Delete Tag, page 221



Find Tags Dialog Box Allows you to search for tags that contain certain text or expressions.

Data - Allows you to type a text string to use in the search. Using the wildcard characters defined on the dialog box widens your search. After you locate the tag(s) with the search string, the Show Matches dialog box displays. This dialog box enables you to view all tags that match the search criteria.

Related Topics • Find Tag, page 222 • Tags Find Command (Tag Menu), page 454

Show Matches Dialog Box Allows you to view all tags that you located using the Tags > Find command.

Total - Displays the total number of matches that meet the search criteria.

Current - Displays the current match number.

Tag number - Displays the current tag number.

Previous - Displays the tag number preceding the active tag. The active tag is the tag currently displayed in the Tag number box. For example, if the active tag number is 5, the Previous tag number is 4. However, if the active tag number is the first number in the list the Previous tag number is the last number in the list.

Next - Displays the tag number following the active tag. The active tag is the tag currently displayed in the Tag number box. For example, if the active tag number is 5, the Next tag number is 6. However, if the active tag number is the last number in the list the Next tag number is the first number in the list.

Related Topics • Find Tag, page 222 • Tags Find Command (Tag Menu), page 454

Go To Tag Dialog Box Allows you to locate a specific tag using the tag number.

Number - Allows you to specify the number of the tag that you want to view.

Note

• To display tags in the model, click Tags > Display and choose a viewing option from the menu.



Related Topics • Go To Command (Tags Menu), page 456 • Go To Tag, page 223

Placing Data Annotations: An Overview Data Annotation allows you to select virtually any data file using Windows Explorer, and drag it onto your model. Double-click the data annotation icon to display the file contents. You can also place a leader line and attach the file to an object. For example, you can drag and drop a spreadsheet, a word processing file, or a World Wide Web HTML document into your model.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231

Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as the target and program that opens the annotation. You can also add and change the background color of the data annotation icon to make its appearance more apparent.

The Position tab on the Data Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North, East, and Elevation values. You can also use the Pick Point feature to define a 3D point in the model and change the position of the data annotation.

This dialog box also enables you to change the leader line attributes, such as color, location, and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. You can also toggle the display of the leader lines on or off.

File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as the target and program that opens it. You can also make the data annotation's appearance more apparent by editing the background color.

• Target - Allows you to type a path or Browse to the file that you want to place as a data annotation in the drawing.

• Optional viewer - Displays the name of the optional executable to associate with a data annotation. You can also use the Browse button to navigate to the program that you want to use.



• Optional start in - Allows you to type a path or Browse for a directory in which to open the annotation object. If this box has no information, the software uses the current directory.

• Show - Displays a solid color, rectangular background behind the annotation icon.

• Color - Displays the optional solid background color for the annotation icon.

• Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to set the optional solid background color for the data annotation icon.

• Browse - Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.

Related Topics • Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box, page 228 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North, East, and Elevation values. You can also reposition the data annotation by manually defining a 3D point.

In addition, the Position tab allows you to change the attributes of a leader line. These attributes include color, location, and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. You can also toggle the leader line display on and off.

Annotation North - Sets the north coordinate of the annotation position.

East - Sets the east coordinate of the annotation position.

Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the annotation position.

Pick Point - Allow you to set the annotation position by placing a 3D point in the Main view.

Leader line Activate - Starts or stops the display of the leader line for a selected data annotation.

Arrowhead - Allows you to use arrowheads with leader lines for the selected data annotation.

Color - Displays the color for the annotation leader line.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a color for the leader line.



North - Sets the north coordinate of the leader line point.

East - Sets the east coordinate of the leader line point.

Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the leader line point.

Pick Point - Allows you to set the leader line position by placing a 3D point in the main view.

Related Topics • Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box, page 228 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Create a Data Annotation 1. Open Windows Explorer. 2. Drag a file from Explorer to the Main View. When the cursor changes to a

document icon with a plus (+) sign, drop the file on the object you want to annotate.

3. Click the object to select the anchor point for the leader line, and click again to accept.

4. Move the cursor to the position where you want the data annotation to appear. 5. Click to place the annotation.

Note

• To place a data annotation without a leader line, right-click when prompted to place a leader line. Then left-click. The data annotation appears without a leader line.

Related Topics • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228



Edit a Data Annotation File 1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit. 2. Click the data annotation in the Main view that you want to edit. 3. Click to accept the data annotation you selected. 4. Edit the Target file. 5. Select an Optional Viewer. 6. Select an Optional start in folder. 7. Select Show Icon background. 8. Click OK.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Edit a Data Annotation Position 1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit. 2. Identify the data annotation you want to edit. 3. Click to accept the data annotation you selected. 4. Click the Position tab. 5. Edit the annotation location using the North, East, and Elevation fields.

Tip

• You can also click Pick Point, which allows you to select the placement point for the annotation directly in the model.

6. Edit the Leader Line options as needed. 7. Click OK.

Note

• Use the Position tab to edit the location of the data annotation icon in the model, and to edit the leader line color and other properties.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228



Display Data Annotations 1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Display. 2. Do one of the following:

• Click Off to turn off display of all data annotations

• Click On to turn on display of the data annotations.

Note

• The Annotations command on the View > Display is a global toggle. It controls the display of all annotations, regardless of the program that created them. The Tools > Data Annotation > Display command controls only annotations created by the Data Annotation command.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Delete Data Annotations 1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Delete. 2. Do one of the following:

• Click One to delete one annotation. Locate and accept the annotation you want to delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation.

• Click All to delete all annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete all of the annotations.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228



Attaching External Data: An Overview SmartPlant Review can display virtually any data attached to an object, including documents, spreadsheets, text files, MicroStation files, sounds, and animation. SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Jet database engine to store and manage the associations between SmartPlant Review data and the external data.

The Get External Data commands allow you to create an attachment by associating objects in a project to external information based on PDS label data. The Get External Data feature is similar to Tools > Data Annotation. However, unlike data annotations that display icons in the Main view, associated Get External Data applications result in entries on the Get External Data menu. You can add, edit, or delete these menu entries. Any changes that you make are written to the Microsoft Access Get External Data database file for your 3D project.

Caution

• Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every element with the same attribute value.

• Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same attribute value.

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • Edit Types Dialog Box, page 238 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

The Get External Data Database Get External Data queries tables in a Microsoft Access database (.MDB file extension) to manage the files and their associated applications that display as menu entries in the Get External Data menu. See the Microsoft Access User's Guide for details on using the database software.

If the database does not exist, Get External Data will create GetData.mdb in the project directory. You can also tell Get External Data to look for the database in another location by creating a text file named GetData.txt in the project directory and setting the second line to the path and filename of the database. The path can be a UNC path.

Your Get External Data database must contain the following three tables: CriteriaList, MenuList, and DataTable. You must name these tables exactly as shown. For each of these tables, the column names can be changed, but must remain in the order specified below. Changes to the column names will be reflected in the column header names for the Edit Attachments and Edit Types dialogs boxes.



CriteriaList Must contain the following two columns: Data Field ID - Contains a unique record key number that corresponds to the text in FieldName. This column must be first.

FieldName - Contains the text to match the label data in SmartPlant Review. This column must be second.

MenuList Must contain the following four columns: Type# - Contains a unique number corresponding to the text (Name) displayed in the Get External Data menu (popup menu) that appears.

Name - Specifies the text that is displayed as an entry in the Get External Data menu.

ExecuteStr - Specifies the location of the executables that match the Name in the Get External Data menu. ExecuteStr can contain any executable file type (.exe, .com, .bat).

DefaultDir - (optional) Specifies the directory in which to search for the file name if there is no directory specified in the Data Table.For example: Name contains "notepad" and ExecuteStr contains c:\winnt\notepad.exe. If ExecuteStr does not contain a path, Get External Data program searches for the file in the project directory, the current directory, the Windows directory, the Windows System directory, and all the paths set in the PATH environment variable. The program searches for the file in the directory specified in the DataTable first. If there is no directory specified in the DataTable, then the program searches the directory specified in the DefaultDir for the file name.

DataTable Must contain the following six columns: Count - Contains the unique sequential field required by Microsoft Access

Data Field ID - Matches the Data Field ID specified in the Criteria List.Key - Matches the value in the label data that is associated with the element within SmartPlant Review.

Type# - Matches the value specified in the MenuList table.

FileName - Specifies the name of the file to be executed.

Directory - Specifies the location that Get External Data first searches for the FileName. If this text box is empty, then the Get External Data program searches the DefaultDir specified in the MenuList table. If that text box is also empty, the current working directory is used for the search.



Related Topics • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • Edit Types Dialog Box, page 238

Attach External Data to a PDS Project 1. Select a graphic object in the model. 2. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments.

3. Click Insert on the Edit Attachments dialog box. 4. From the Match Criteria list, select the label data attribute to which the external

data will be attached.

5. From the Type list, select the file type for the attached data file.

6. On the Getdata Filename / Argument dialog box, browse to the data file you

want to attach. Be sure the file you select is of the same type you specified in the preceding step.

7. Specify any arguments for the data file in the Arguments box, then click OK.

The Edit Attachments dialog box should now list the new attachment.



8. Click OK on the Edit Attachments dialog box. The Tools > Get External Data

menu should now show the new attachment type:

9. All objects in your drawing that contain the label data attribute you selected (for

example, Sequence) set to the same value (in this example, Pumps) will have the same file attached (in this example, scanned photo).

Caution

• Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every element with the same attribute value.

• Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete that attachment from every element with the same attribute value.

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • Edit Types Dialog Box, page 238 • The Get External Data Database, page 233



Edit Types 1. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types.

2. Double-click an entry in the Type column to open the entry for editing. 3. Type a new Type name. In this example the Type name Spreadsheet is changed

to Tank.

4. Click OK to accept the changes. 5. The Tools > Get External Data menu should now show the new attachment

Type name.

Tip

• To change the executable associated with a type in the Edit Types dialog box, double-click an entry in the Executable column and select a new executable from the Select Executable dialog box.

Related Topics • Attach External Data to a PDS Project, page 235 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • Edit Types Dialog Box, page 238



Edit Attachments Dialog Box Allows you to view a list of the files that are attached to a selected object. You can insert or delete attachments using the commands on this dialog box. You can also associate file types with executable programs.

Insert - After selecting an appropriate association between label data and type, displays the Getdata Filename / Argument dialog box, allowing you to select a file name or argument for the new attachment.

Delete - Removes the link from the model to the external data base, but does not delete the external data file.

Edit Types - Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the application used to open files of a selected type when using the Get External Data command.

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu), page 436

Getdata Filename / Argument Dialog Box Allows you to select a filename or argument for a new attachment.

Filename - Displays the result of using the Browse button. If the type selection was Default, the file must be an executable (.exe, .bat, or .com).

Browse - Allows you to navigate to the desired file (or attachment).

Argument(s) - Allows you to add text to the file name to act as an argument

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

Edit Types Dialog Box Allows you to associate file types with executable programs. You can also use this dialog box to delete associations.

Insert - Displays the Select Executable dialog box, which allows you to select an executable and a default directory to associate with a file type.

Delete - Removes the link from the model to the external data, but does not delete the external data file.



Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Types Command (Tools Menu), page 436 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

Assigning Material Properties: An Overview



The Material Editor command allows you to assign material properties to model elements and set various rendering parameters. By assigning material properties to model elements, you can create photo-realistic renderings with color and surface characteristics that match the real-world materials of the finished product. The Material Editor command allows you to access the extensive set of material palette files provided with SmartPlant Review, or you can create your own materials interactively. You can preview the effect of several material properties within Material Editor, including diffuse and specular colors, normal and ambient reflectivity, transmittance, and refraction. In addition, you can preview the effect of pattern maps and bump maps, without having to render an actual image. The Material Editor features an improved user interface and several new functions, such as transparency, pattern matching, and texture mapping. You can choose a pattern, apply it to a material, and assign it to an element in the model. You can also apply textures to display sets.

The Material Editor allows you to assign material definitions to your 3D model (such as wood, metal, glass, stone, and plastic). As you make material assignments, the Material Editor creates a material table file for your 3D model. The material table contains all the information about the colors, surface characteristics, patterns, and bump maps assigned to model elements. The material table file is given the model filename with a .mat extension. For example, the model file xyz.dgn will have a material table file named xyz.mat. (For a detailed description of the material table file format see the SmartPlant Review Programmer's Guide.) The Material Editor is also used to set various image rendering parameters. These parameters are also saved in the material table.

Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Create Materials from Color Table, page 243 • Define Search Path for Material Files, page 244



Default Material Palette The SPRDefault.pal file, which contains a material definition named default, is delivered in the SmartPlant Review directory when you install the Photo-Realism module. The default material in this file can be used to specify the default material properties of elements without assigned materials. The delivered default material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic. This palette file is a standard palette file and can be used as such. It can also be edited using a text editor outside SmartPlant Review or by using the Edit Materials functionality.

You can now have a common SPRDefault.pal file to set the default material properties for all of your projects. You can also place a different SPRDefault.pal file in different project directories and each of those projects could have different default materials.

Note


Because the SmartPlant Review directory is not included in your default palette search path, you must copy or move the SPRDefault.pal file to your project directory or to a directory in your palette search path before you can use the SPRDefault.pal file. If you do not wish to use this file, rename it (or its default material) or remove it from the palette search path.

If you do not have the Photo-Realism module, if the SPRDefault.pal file is not found in the current palette search path, or if this file does not contain a material named default, then the internally hard-coded default material is used for elements without assigned materials. This hard-coded material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic.

The default material for graphic elements without assigned materials are set only when the project is opened or when you remove a material for that element. Thus, if you edit the SPRDefault.pal file and its default material during an SmartPlant Review session, you should not expect to see all the graphic elements without assigned materials to immediately update. You must either reopen the project or manually remove materials for each graphic element.

If you have the SPRDefault.pal file in the current palette search path and it contains a material named default, then those settings, except for color, are used for the default material.

The graphic element's default color is always retained, regardless of the color specified in the default material in the SPRDefault.pal file. However, if you assign this default material to graphic elements, then its color will override the graphic element's default color, just like when any other material is assigned.



The Photo-Realism Raytracer uses the same default material properties as the shaded view. This means that raytraces of elements with default materials assigned to them will look like a "smoother" version of a fully shaded view.

Notes

• You cannot change the material assignments in an existing VUE file. If you open a VUE file and change any material settings during that session, you must create a new VUE file in order to retain the new settings. If you change the default material definition, then you must manually remove the default material assignment from the graphic elements you wish to use the modified default material so that those elements' material assignments will be updated before the new VUE file is created.

• The default material is not an assigned material. For example, you will receive a message stating No material assignment exists for this element if you pick a graphic element without an assigned material and then try to view that element's material assignment in the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box.

• You will not be prompted to modify your palette search path if the SPRDefault.pal file is not found while setting the default material.

• Using this SPRDefault.pal file mechanism may add a very slight overhead to the total project load time.

Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Edit Materials Command (Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box),

page 419

Assign Materials to Elements 1. Click Tools > Assign Materials. 2. Click Palette File. 3. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes. 4. Select the material definition you want to assign. 5. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the material definition by

selecting the model file (from the Files list), level (from the Levels list), and color (from the Color list) of that surface. Select one of each to identify the surface.

Tip

• You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more than one model file, level, and color. You can click the Select All to select all the files, levels, or colors; or, use Clear All to clear all the file, level, or color entries.



6. Select the Edit Material, Unassign, and Pick commands as you need them. 7. Click Apply to save an assignment without exiting the form. Repeat steps 1-5 to

make additional assignments, if necessary.

Tip

• A material table (.mat file) is created for each model file you select.

Notes



Related Topics • Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 418

Create Materials from Color Table 1. Select the IGDS or MicroStation color table you want to use. 2. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the color table by selecting the

model file, level, and color of the surface. You must select one of each to identify that surface.

Tip

• Identify multiple surfaces at once by selecting more than one model file, level, and color. Use Select All to select all the files, levels, or colors; or, Clear All to clear all the file, level, or color entries.

3. Click OK.

Notes

• A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table.

• A material table (.mat file) is created for each model file you select, with material assignments based on the colors and levels you select.

Related Topics • Create Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 420



Define Search Path for Material Files 1. Click Browse to select the directory path you want to add to the Search Path. 2. Click Add. 3. Click Move Up or Move Down to reorder the Directories list. 4. Click OK.

Tips

• SmartPlant Review searches last for directories listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.

• You must add each directory individually, even if you have already added the parent directory to the Search Path Directories list.

Related Topics • Design File Search Path, page 35 • Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 31

Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box Allows you to select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics. You can also select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. Also, in the SmartPlant Review environment, you can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.

Notes



• Material assignments are not stored in the project database, but are kept in a .MAT file. The project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the .MAT file. To quickly delete these material assignments, delete the project's .MAT file.

Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. Select this field and type the name of an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field.

Browse - Determines the pathname to the directory containing the palette files. Select the directory that contains the palette files you want to use.

Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. Select a material to make it the active material.



Preview - Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface.

Edit Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box, which allows you to modify material definitions in a selected palette file.

Levels - Identifies an element by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn. You must select both a level and color number to identify an element.

Colors - Identifies an element by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. You must select both a level and color number to identify an element.

Files - Displays a list of model files and directories. Identify the model file to which the material definition will be assigned.

Select All - Selects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.

Clear All - Unselects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.

Show - Displays the material definition assigned to the file, level, and color selected. The Palette, Material Name, and Preview update to display the assigned material definition. If an assignment does not exist for the selected file, level, and color, a message displays stating that there is no assignment.

Pick - Hides the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box so you can identify a model element in the Main view. After you select an element, the Levels, Colors, and Files information for the selected element displays in the dialog box. You can then assign a material definition to that element.

Unassign - Deletes the material definitions assigned to the file, level, and color combinations selected. After you confirm the deletion, the material table (.mat) file updates to reflect the deleted material assignment.

Related Topics • Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 418 • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview, page 240



Edit Materials Dialog Box Allows you to create and edit material definitions. If you want to assign an existing material to your model, you do not need to use this dialog box. Go directly to the Tools > Assign Material command.

Important


Palette - Displays the name of the active palette file. Type the name of the file to create a new palette file. You can also select Browse to find and open an existing palette file.

Material name - Specifies the name of the active material definition. Type the name of the material to create a new material definition, or select one of the materials in the active palette.


Copy - Copies the material from an object that you select in the model. After you select an object, the selected object's material surface characteristics are loaded and the material displays in the Preview.

Replace/Add - Replaces the active material definition with the new values you have defined. If you rename the material name, this button changes to an Add button, allowing you to add the new material definition to the current palette. You can also create a new palette by typing a new palette name and then creating new material definitions in that palette.

Delete - Deletes the active material from the active palette file.

Base color Default - Sets the base color back to the default color.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new base color.

Specular color Default - Sets the specular color back to the default color.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new specular color. The specular color is the color of the glare. A shiny green surface is rendered more realistically, for example, when the specular color is tinted toward the diffuse green color. Specular color is extremely important for the accurate rendering of metallic surfaces. Gold, for example, has a deep tan/orange diffuse color and a pale yellow specular highlight. Specular color can only be a solid color.



Diffuse - Controls the intensity of the diffuse color of a material. Diffuse values range from 0-1, where 0 is black and 1 is 100% color saturation. The diffuse color may be either a solid color or a bitmap file (rgb, pattern, scan). The intensity value is the degree to which the diffuse color or pattern contributes to the final look of the geometry. A highly diffuse intensity results in a high saturation of the diffuse color or pattern.

Specular - Controls the intensity of the specular features of the material. The specular property is the degree to which light reflects from the surface of the geometry of the model. The specular property creates a hot spot or glare, which is proportional to the surface finish. Specular values can range from 0-1, where 0 is a low specular surface, such as a tennis ball, and 1 is a high specular surface, such as a cue ball.

Finish - Controls the degree of polish or smoothness on an object's surface. When light is reflected off of a surface, the finish determines whether it is scattered (a rough surface) or concentrated (a smooth surface). Finish values range from 0-1, where 0 is a low polish, such as felt, and 1 is a high polish, such as glass. The finish of a material interacts directly with its specular characteristics. A high specular value and a high finish value results in a bright concentrated hot spot on the surface. A high specular value and a low finish value results in a large glaring hot spot that is scattered all over the surface.

Reflectivity - Controls the amount of reflectivity that a material exhibits. This property determines how other surfaces in the model will be reflected in the material. For example, a pond of water, a mirror, and highly polished metals are all highly reflective. Reflectivity values range from 0-1, where 0 is no reflectivity and 1 is a high reflectivity. As the reflectivity value of a material gets higher, environment clouds begin to appear in the Preview to display the reflectivity.

Use the following guidelines to use reflection mapping:

• Create a pattern file for the reflection in a raster image editor. Use a spherize filter (or equivalent) to distort the image slightly.

• Turn off the old patterns before applying reflection to objects on which patterns already are applied.

• Use a high Reflection slider value to display more reflection on the object than the object's Base Color. Use a low Reflection value to display more object Base Color than reflection.

Ambient - Controls the ambient reflectivity of a material. The ambient reflectivity of a material is the degree to which the ambient lighting in the overall model will be reflected by the surface of the material. The total ambient light value of a surface is calculated by multiplying the ambient reflectivity value by the model ambient light setting. The ambient reflectivity value can range from 0-1, where 0 is no ambient light reflected and 1 is full ambient reflectivity.



For example, if the overall ambient light setting for the model is set to 1.0, and a material has an ambient reflectivity value of 0.10, model elements using that material will have an effective ambient lighting value of 10%. A lower ambient light value causes the shadows that fall on the material to be dark, with a high contrast between the directly and indirectly lit areas. A higher ambient light value results in a more uniformly lit surface, fainter shadows, and less overall contrast in lighting. This would be desirable, for example, if you wished to create a bright, uniformly lit ceiling in a room.

Transmittance - Controls the transmittance of a material. Transmittance is the degree of transparency that a surface exhibits. You can select values of 0 (0% transparent, opaque), 50 (screen door transparency), or 100 (100% transparent, or invisible). The screen door range shades surfaces by omitting every other pixel. As you change the transmittance value of a material, the background image behind the Preview becomes visible to illustrate the degree of transparency.

Note

• Remember that the diffuse color should be evaluated when you are using transparent and reflective surfaces. A high diffuse value can saturate the material with diffuse color and thus override most of the reflectivity or transparency. By setting the diffuse color intensity (saturation) lower, the object becomes more transparent and less opaque when transmittance is used. For example, a clear drinking glass should have a white diffuse color, a very low diffuse intensity value (0.01), and a high transmit intensity value (100).

Refraction - Controls the angle of refraction on a material. Refraction is the bending of light as it passes through transparent surfaces. The lens of a pair of eye glasses, for example, would exhibit refraction. A straw in a clear glass of water also appears to bend, when viewed from certain angles, due to refraction.

Refraction values range from 1.0-2.0, where 1.0 is no refraction and 2.0 is high refraction. For example, water has some refraction (1.20) because it causes objects to appear distorted when they are immersed. Refractive surfaces must also be transparent (have a high transmittance setting). When a material is transparent and refraction is high, the image behind the Preview appears distorted to illustrate the degree of refraction.

You can define Refraction as less than 1.0. The default value of 1.0 still equals no refraction. For example, a Refraction value of 1.2 is good for light passing from air into water or glass. Use a value less than 1.0 when the eye point is inside water or glass looking into air.

Pattern Weight - Mixes the percentage of pattern and base color for a material. Values range from 0 (all color) to 1 (all pattern); midrange values are a mix of both attributes.



Preview - Displays the material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface. The sphere updates as you modify the material's display properties.

Pattern - Specifies the diffuse color between a solid and a pattern. The diffuse color may be either a solid color or a bitmap image file (rgb, pattern, scan). You can edit a solid color or choose an image file for the diffuse color. See Adjust Pattern for more information.

Bump Map - Specifies the bump map pattern file. When you select the bump map, it appears in the Preview. See Adjust Bump for more information.

Fresnel - Activates fresnel characteristics. When on, fresnel makes transparent objects more opaque on curved and angular surfaces, such as a soap bubble. The steeper the angle at which you view the surface, the greater the reflection and opaqueness of the surface. The effects of this command appear in the Preview.

Shadows - Activates shadows. Activate if you want materials to cast shadows in a Phong-shaded mode. The effects of this option appear in the Preview.

Related Topics • Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 418 • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242 • Edit Materials Command (Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box),

page 419

Adjust Pattern Dialog Box Defines the pattern you want to associate with an object. You can base pattern size on the model working units so that patterns are not stretched or distorted to fit surfaces. Surface mode stretches the pattern to the extent of the element.

SmartPlant Review also supports texture mapping. You can choose a pattern, apply it to a material, and assign it to an element in the model.

File Name - Defines the pattern that you want to associate with an object.


Units - Allows you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the pattern.

X Offset - Specifies offset from the X axis. The pattern is placed at the specified offset. This offset is a percentage of the RGB raster file size. For example, a value of .5 equals a 50% offset. (You can also have a negative (-) value.)

Y Offset - Specifies offset from the Y axis. The pattern is placed at the specified offset. This offset is a percentage of the RGB raster file size. For example, a value of .5 equals a 50% offset. (You can also have a negative (-) value.)



X Scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale. For example, a scale factor of two scales the image pattern to twice its size. A scale factor of .25 scales the pattern to 1/4 its size, allowing four patterns to fit on the surface.

Y Scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale.

Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the pattern. A positive value rotates the pattern counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the pattern clockwise.

Gamma - Specifies the gamma correction for a pattern. This prevents double gamma correction on the pattern so that it does not appear washed out when applied. This value is necessary in files saved in formats other than RGB (for example, BMP or TIF) because these types of files were saved with gamma correction.

Transparent Background - Specifies whether the background is visible or transparent. A transparent background is useful for applying decals to surfaces. A common usage is for adding foliage. The effect of a transparent background is displayed in the Preview.

Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the pattern about the Y-axis.

Elevation drape - Determines whether portions of the raster image stretch over specified elements.


page 419

Adjust Bump Dialog Box Defines the bump you want to associate with an object.

File name - Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object.


Units - Allow you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the bump map.

X Offset - Specifies offset from the X axis. The bump is placed at the specified offset. This offset is a percentage of the RGB raster file size. For example, a value of .5 equals a 50% offset. (You can also have a negative (-) value.)



Y Offset - Specifies offset from the Y axis. The bump is placed at the specified offset. This offset is a percentage of the RGB raster file size. For example, a value of .5 equals a 50% offset. (You can also have a negative (-) value.)

X Scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software then applies the pattern to the surface at the specified scale.

Y Scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software then applies the pattern at the specified scale.

Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the bump map. A positive value rotates the bump map counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the bump map clockwise.

Height - Specifies the height at which to apply the bump map.

Inverted - Inverts the bump map display.

Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the bump about the Y-axis.

Elevation drape - Determines whether portions of the raster image stretch over specified elements.


page 419

Create Materials Dialog Box Allows you to create a palette (.pal) and material table (.mat) file from an existing IGDS or MicroStation color table (.tbl). A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the .tbl table are used in the material definition, and default values are given to the remaining display properties and rendering parameters. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the .tbl colors. You can also edit the resulting palette through the Edit Materials command.

Notes


• This command overwrites any existing material table.

IGDS color table - Specifies the IGDS or MicroStation color table to convert. Most color table files have a .tbl extension.




Levels - Identifies a surface by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn. Select Select All to select all the levels.

Color - Identifies a surface by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. Select Select All to select all the colors.

Files - Displays a list of model files and directories. Select the model file for which to create the material table (.mat) file.

Select All - Selects all the files, levels, or colors.

Clear All - Clears all the current selections.

Related Topics • Assigning Material Properties: An Overview, page 240 • Create Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 420 • Create Materials from Color Table, page 243 • Edit Materials Command (Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box),

page 419

Search Path Dialog Box Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated with your project.

Note

• The Search Path dialog box will appear while SmartPlant Review is opening your design file for the first time if it cannot find, in the Design File Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to the model.

Directory - Allows you to specify a directory containing the pattern or bump map file that you are assigning to the current object.

Browse - Allows you to specify a different directory path.

Search Path - Displays the directories currently in the search path and allows you to add and remove directories, and to re-order the list of directories.

Add - Adds the current directory to the bottom of the search path list of directories to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.

Delete - Removes the selected directory from the search path list of directories to use for searching for pattern or bump map files.

Move Up - Moves the selected directory up one level in the search path list of directories. SmartPlant Review searches first for directories listed closer to the top.



You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.

Move Down - Moves the selected directory down one level in the search path list of directories. SmartPlant Review searches last for directories listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.

Related Topics • Design File Search Path, page 35 • Open a Model File, page 37 • Opening a Model File: An Overview, page 31

Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview



SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides basic features for creating realistic, high-quality images from a 3D model. These images are important for users to communicate and promote a clear understanding of a project. For example, EPCs might use in-depth visualizations to sell a final design to an owner-operator, or an owner-operator might use visualization to study light placement in maintenances areas of a plant.

SmartPlant Review uses a raytracing algorithm to build these images. Once the user assigns materials to objects and places lights in the model, advanced rendering techniques can transform the 3D model into photograph quality art. The memory-efficient raytracer is multi-threaded to take advantage of all the available processors on the user's machine, so even very large models can be rendered quickly.

Photo-Realism provides the following commands and options:

• Settings

• Global Light Settings

• Source Light Settings

• Place a Source Light

• Edit a Source Light

• Delete a Source Light

• Raytrace a View

• Raytrace Range

Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview The Photo-Realism Settings command provides features that allow you to do the following:

• Specify options for background and environment box images.

• Control the quality and speed of the raytrace program on a per model/material basis.

• Define settings for Reflective or Transmittance Threshold and Bounce, Gamma, and Anti-alias level.

• Enable raytrace generation without shadows.

• Specify options to control the extent for render consideration.



Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255

Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to load a background image and environment box into the Main view. You can also use this dialog box to control the quality and speed of the raytracing program, as well as choose options for improving system performance during raytracing operations.

Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for loading a background image and environment box into the Main view. Although these image settings are only available with the Photo-Realism module, the background and environment box can appear in any render mode, not just shaded or raytrace. These images may be in any of the image type formats supported by SmartPlant Review 4.1, including .bmp, .tif, .rgb, .tga, and so on.

None - Specifies that you do not want any environment displays in the scene.

Background - Specifies that you want to display a background image in the Main view. Like wallpaper on the Windows desktop, the background image is sized to the view and always appears the same, regardless of what eye location or angle of view is specified.

Environment box - Specifies that you want to surround the 3D model space with several images. You may specify up to six different images, one for each side of the environment box. The images are not sized to the screen. Instead, a correct, infinite environment map is created before a shade or wireframe update. The environment map is created dynamically during a raytrace. As with background images, different sides of the box are visible with different view angles and eye locations.

MicroStation - Specifies that any MicroStation ® source lights (that are on) will be displayed in the rendered image. If this option is not checked, no MicroStation source lights will be used when rendering the image.

Shaded view - Specifies that you want to display point, distance, spot, and area lights in the shaded view of the model, as well as the rendered image.

Image files - Lists all of the possible file types and their locations for the background image and environment box.

Clear - Removes a file name and path from the Location list.

Modify - Displays the Modify Location dialog box, in which you can add or modify an image file location.



Note

• To add or modify the location of an image file, you must click a row in the Image files list box, and then click Modify.

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu), page 386 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255

Background Option (Environment Tab) The Neutral gray background option specifies the user wants to use a neutral gray background instead of the pipes behind the preview globe on the Material Editor and other material dialog boxes. This option shows the material color a little more clearly.

Related Topics • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 255 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255 • Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview, page 254

Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the quality and speed of the raytracing program.

During the raytracing process, the software fires rays across the monitor like a scanner.

There are two types of raytracing: forward and backward. In backward raytracing, the software starts from the eye and shoots a ray that goes into the scene and looks for light. Forward raytracing looks for light and then shoots a ray back to the eye. SmartPlant review uses backward raytracing.

Because raytracing gives the effects of shadows, reflections, and transparency, it is significantly better than the smooth texture shading offered by OpenGL. However, raytracing is not truly photo realistic; the options on this tab are designed to compensate for the imperfections in the raytracing technology.



Notes

• During raytracing, 95% of the algorithm's time is spent looking in the model to see whether the ray hit anything, and then attempting to identify what it hit.

• Raytraced reflective surfaces are true reflections of the environment and do not depend upon applied reflective textures.

• Although forward raytracing is far superior in quality, the performance cost is extremely high.


Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) The Reflective threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global threshold that determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of shiny surfaces in the model, such as mirrors.

For example, if the model contains a large shiny surface that is close to the eye point, such as a building with large surfaces of mirrored glass, set this option to a low value to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if a model contains a reflective object that is very far from the eye point, this option should be set to a high value. This prevents the raytracer from computing reflection rays that will have little influence on the overall quality of the image.

Tip

• Decreasing the number of reflection rays by setting the value closer to 1 can significantly increase performance.

Notes

• Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model, you are encouraged to modify these settings and re-run the raytracing command several times to get the desired effects.

• The recommended setting for this control is 0.6, which means that objects that are not greater than 60% reflective will not have additional reflection rays spawned.

• In the Material Editor dialog box, the Reflectivity setting of the object's material determines whether or not the object is reflective. If the object is not reflective, additional rays are not fired.



• If the Reflectivity setting (found in the Material Editor dialog box) for a texture is greater than or equal to 0.15 (15%), the texture will be environment mapped in shaded OpenGL mode. Environment mapping gives a curved or mirrored appearance to the texture.

• The Finish setting of the material (found in the Material Editor dialog box) determines the smoothness of the object surface and controls whether and by what amount the second ray will be skewed.

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255 • Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 256

Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) If the raytracer needs to spawn additional reflection rays to determine the color of a reflective object, such as a mirror, the Reflective bounce from 1 to 16 option allows you to specify the number of additional rays.

Important

• Color intensity decreases with each bounce.

Notes

• The recommend setting for this control is 2 since, in most cases, only two reflections are required to correctly determine the pixel color of a reflective surface. Because most objects in nature aren't very reflective, a high setting like 16 would be necessary only if you were conducting a study in a house of mirrors.


• Reflective bounces are expensive in terms of performance.


Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) The Transmittance threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global stop threshold that determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of transparent surfaces in the model, such as glass.

For example, if the model contains many transparent surfaces that are close to the eye point, such as a glass milk bottle factory, this option should be set to a low value in order to produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if the model



contains a transparent object that is very far from the eye point, this option should be set to a high value so as to limit the number of reflection rays the raytracer computes.

Tip

• Decreasing the number of transmittance rays by setting the value closer to 1 can significantly increase performance.

Notes


• In the Material Editor dialog box, the Transmittance setting of the material of the object determines whether or not the object is transparent. At a minimum, transparent objects always spawn at least two additional rays. If the object is not transparent, additional rays are not fired.

• The Refraction setting of the material (defined in the Material Editor dialog box) determines the thickness of the object surface and controls it and how much the second ray should bend.

• A recommend setting for this control is 0.4, which means that objects that are not greater than 40% transparent will not have additional transmittance rays spawned.




Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) If the raytracer needs to spawn additional rays to determine the color of a transparent object, such as glass or clear plastic, the Transmittance bounce from 1 to 16 allows you to specify the number of additional rays necessary.

Important

• Color intensity decreases with each bounce.

Tip

• The recommend setting for this control is 5. Although the raytracer supports up to 16 transparent bounces for those models that contain many transparent surfaces, such as a milk bottle factory, a single object can only be hit with 5 transparent bounces.

Notes


• Transmittance bounces are expensive in terms of performance. This safeguard prevents recursion overflow in cases such as the inside of a Christmas tree ornament or other perfectly, spherical, shiny transparent objects.


Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab) The Gamma from 0 to 4 option specifies a value for correcting red, green, and blue (RGB) values when the raytracing output goes to video frame buffers that do not already have gamma adjustments or to Intergraph RGB file formats. This value is applied to each pixel as an RGB triplet prior to final output.

Important

• Only users who are using a hardware frame buffer should modify the default value for this option.

• This option does not control image brightness when there too few or too many lights in the scene.

Tip

• The recommend setting for this control is 1, but only if gamma correction is desired. The setting should be 0 otherwise.



Note


Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu), page 386 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255 • Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 256

Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab) The Anti-alias level from 1 to 13 option specifies the number of rays per pixel that the raytracer should fire to determine the final color.

Tips

• A recommend setting for this control is 1.

• To simulate the old ModelView settings of low and high anti-aliasing, use 3 rays for low and 9 rays for high.

Important

• Increasing this option decreases the performance speed of the raytracer.

Use of this option avoids the "mother of pearl" effect which occurs when rays are fired into an area but miss hitting an object because there is some space on the curve. This effect occurs when rays are fired into an area, and those rays miss hitting an object because there is some space on the curve.

At a setting of 1, only a single ray is fired into each pixel, and that ray goes directly into the center of the pixel. As a result, objects that are only partially displayed in the



pixel may be missed. The following illustration shows where all the rays are fired as you increase the number of rays through anti-aliasing.

Tip

• Increasing anti-aliasing from 1 to 2 doesn't necessarily double raytracing time. It depends on whether or not the second ray hits an object and has to spawn additional rays.

Notes


• Although the raytracer supports an anti-alias setting of up to 13 rays per pixel, additional rays are only fired if the primary ray determines that potential additional intersections in the ray cone exist. This method prevents unwanted and time-consuming rays against flat surfaces

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255 • Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 256 • Using Photo-Realism Settings: An Overview, page 254



Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab) The Generate shadows option specifies that the user wants to override all lighting shadow options (global and source). This option allows users to generate raytraced images without shadows without having to manually turn off shadows for every individual light in the model. By default, this option is enabled.

Important

• When this option is disabled, no shadows will be generated in the raytraced image, even if all lights have shadows turned on.

Notes



Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab) The Raytrace option enables you to raytrace the preview globe on the Material Editor and other material dialog boxes.

Note

• Raytracing the globe provides a better representation of materials, especially materials with ambient properties.


Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for improving system performance during raytracing operations.

Illumination threshold from 0 to 1 - Specifies the minimum threshold for firing rays into dark areas. The default value for this option is 0.11, which is almost black.

Spawned rays from 1 to 100 - Specifies the total number of rays the raytracer will spawn to calculate the illumination of a pixel. The default value for this option is 8.

Important

• Higher values increase the amount of time necessary to raytrace the image.



Everywhere - Specifies that the user wants to extend rays everywhere through the entire model, not just with the view. When this option is selected, all the lights, textures, and other information in the model must be loaded into memory for the raytrace. As a result, this option would cause the most degradation in performance of the two options.

Only within the View Cone - Specifies that the user wants to extend rays only within the trapezoid of the View Cone. Setting this options means that if a shiny object is located just outside the View Cone, no rays will be reflected in it. Shadows can also be lost when this option is set, but all lights are considered, even if they reside outside the View Cone.

Use only a single processor for raytraces - Specifies that only one of mulitple available processors will be used by the raytracer.

Important

• Select this option if you want to continue working in other programs while the raytracer generates the image.

Notes

• As rays bounce around a scene, the contribution of light diminishes. For areas that are below the value defined in the Illumination threshold, the raytracer does not fire any rays.


OpenGL Lighting While not as accurate as the raytracer, OpenGL lights are well-suited for providing a quick and approximate preview of what the lighting will look like in the raytracer. Of note is the distinct differences in how each lights a drawing. OpenGL relies on a geometric vertex-by-vertex basis, whereas the raytracer lights a drawing on a pixel-by-pixel basis. Consequently, the resulting output of the two methods will not be identical.

Usage of OpenGL lighting is controlled via the Activate source lights option on the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. OpenGL lights will be used once the following conditions have been met:

• Photo-Realism module is installed. • The Shaded view checkbox in the Activate source lights option is

enabled. • Lights have been placed in the model. • The lights in the model are turned on.



Important

When any one of the following conditions exist, SmartPlant Review's default sun will be used in place of OpenGL lights:

• The Photo-Realism module is not installed. • The Shaded view checkbox in the Activate source lights option has

not been enabled. • There are no lights in the model. • There are lights in the model, but none of the lights are turned on.

Notes

• There are limitations to using OpenGL lights, as illustrated in the following diagrams. In each, the circles represent spotlights. The red circles are spotlights that will be visible, and the black circles are spotlights that will not be visible.

• OpenGL lights a triangle only if light hits a vertex on that triangle - any lighting shining in between vertices will not show up on a triangle.

• Although OpenGL does shine light through solid objects, unlike the raytracer, it doesn't know when to stop.

Related Topics • Attenuation Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box), page 280 • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 255 • Open Model from Command Line, page 36 • Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab), page 257 • View Updates: Backing Store vs. Buffered Updates, page 79



Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview The Global Light Settings command provides features that allow you to control the global lighting in the model.

For example, you can select options for controlling the ambient light in your model. Ambient light is commonly used to simulate light scatter in nature, soften shadows, and simulate natural light that shines through a window. When used properly, ambient light can closely simulate a radiosity solution. You can also design ambient light for use in scene lighting.

You can control the light from a camera flashbulb. This type of lighting is particularly useful if you want to create eye appealing pictures but don't know how to set the lights properly in the model. To prevent an un-viewable render, a default flashbulb is used automatically.

Options are also provided for controlling light from the sun. You can control the intensity and color of the solar light, as well as the models location in degrees.

You can also control the computation of fog in your model. For instance, you can specify whether to use fog in the current scene, control the fog density, and control the fog color.

Related Topics • Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview, page 254

Global Lighting Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to control lighting properties globally within the model.

Note


Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light that envelopes objects. Ambient light simulates light scatter in nature, and it is used to soften shadows and simulated natural light shining through a window. When used properly, ambient light can closely simulate a radiosity solution. Ambient light can also be designed for use with scene lighting.



Activate - Allows you to use ambient lighting in the raytraced image. Ambient light affects only those objects that have a value for material ambient reflectivity. Objects that have no ambient reflectivity will not reflect light and could appear black if no additional lights are defined in the scene. Because ambient light is not cumulative, objects in front of a mirror will not be brighter than the mirror itself.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the ambient light. The recommended setting for this option is 0.15.

Color - Controls the color of the ambient light. A recommended setting for this control is white (RGB 255, 255, 255).

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the ambient light.

Related Topics • Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview, page 266 • Global Lighting Dialog Box, page 266 • Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu), page 387

Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light from a camera flash bulb. This type of lighting is particularly useful for people who want to create "pretty pictures" but don't know how to set the lights properly in their models. A warning appears in the Text window if no lights have been defined in the current scene, and to prevent an un-viewable render, a default flashbulb light is used automatically.

Activate - Allows you to use flashbulb lighting in the raytraced image. Flashbulb lighting does not generate shadows because the flashbulb location is the same as the eye point. As a result, flash lighting is also useful during material setup to determine the overall color balance of the image. Flashbulb lighting acts as a point light at the camera lens, and as with point lights, there is light falloff from the camera which is controlled by Intensity.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the flashlight bulb. A recommended setting for this option is 0.70.

Color - Controls the color of the flash light. A recommended setting for this control is white (RGB 255, 255, 255).

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the flash light.

Notes

• Flash lighting should be used rather than ambient lighting when no lights are present in the model because flash lighting is not affected by material ambient reflectivity.




Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light from the sun.

Activate - Allows you to use sunlight in the current scene.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the solar light. A recommended setting for this option is 0.70.

Color - Displays the current color of the solar light. A recommended setting for this control is white (RGB 255, 255, 255).

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the solar light.

Cast shadows - Allows you to generate shadows from the solar light. The Resolution options are disabled if this option is not checked.

Latitude - Specifies the North/South position at the model's location in degrees. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You can type values in these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the model's latitude.

Longitude - Specifies the East/West position at the model's location in degrees. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can type values in these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the model's longitude.

GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the correct offset.

Zone - Displays the Time Zones dialog box, which allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from a list. By default, the first instance of the current zone is selected.

Map - Displays the World Map dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude, longitude by picking a location from a world map.

Cities - Displays the Cities dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by picking a city name from a list. The nearest city to the current latitude and longitude, based on a rough distance estimate, is selected by default.



Date - Specifies the date for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. The default date is set to the date on your system calendar when you first create the project database. For example, the date when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can change this date by clicking the down arrow and picking a new date from the calendar.

Time - Specifies the time of day for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. The default time is set to the time on your system clock when you first create the project. For example, when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can modify this time by clicking the up and down arrows.

Daylight savings - Specifies whether or not the specified time is daylight savings time.

Use vector - Allows you to lock the sun's position to a specific vector, rather than calculate the vector from the latitude and longitude values. When this box is checked, the options under location are not available. When this box is not checked, the values in the longitude and latitude boxes feed the X, Y, and Z coordinates and angles on the Solar Vector dialog box. However, changes made to these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields.

Vector - Displays the Solar Vector dialog box, which allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. This options effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight.


Time Zones Dialog Box Allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from the list of regions.

Select time zone - Allows you to set the GMT offset by selecting a zone's region or description from a list. By default, the first instance of the current zone is selected. You can sort the Select time zone list by clicking any of the columns in the grid. By default the list is sorted alphabetically by Description. In those zones where there is no description or region, the grid displays --. When you click OK, the GMT offset field on the Solar tab will populate with the appropriate value for the selected time zone.

Related Topics • Global Lighting Dialog Box, page 266 • Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu), page 387 • Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 268



World Map Dialog Box Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking a location from a world map.

A ToolTip displays the latitude and longitude as the bull's eye indicator is dragged across the map. When the bull's eye is released, the latitude and longitude fields automatically update with that location's corresponding north/south or east/west position (in degrees).

Latitude - Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You can type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the latitude. The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a Tooltip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields.

Longitude - Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. This position includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can type values in these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the longitude. The current latitude and longitude are displayed in a Tooltip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and Longitude fields.

GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons on the Solar tab to pick the correct offset.

City - Displays the name of the city selected in the Cities dialog box or with the bull's eye indicator. If bull's eye indicator passes over a city listed in the Cities dialog box, then the city name displays in the ToolTip beside the latitude and longitude coordinates. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the city field in addition to the Latitude and Longitude fields on the World Map dialog box.

Notes

• The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude and Longitude fields on the Solar tab with the appropriate values for the selected location on the map.

Related Topics • Controlling Global Lighting: An Overview, page 266 • Global Lighting Dialog Box, page 266 • Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu), page 387 • Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 268



Cities Dialog Box Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking a city name from the list. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city name.

Select city - Allows you to select a city from the list to set the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset for the solar lighting. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city name. However, you can sort this list by clicking any of the columns in the grid.

Note

• By default, the nearest city to the current latitude and longitude (based on a rough distance estimate) is selected.

The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude and Longitude fields on the Solar tab with the appropriate values for the selected location on the map.


Solar Vector Dialog Box Allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. This effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight.

X - Defines the X coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.

Y - Defines the Y coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.

Z - Defines the Z coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.

Azimuth from 0 to 360 - Controls the bearing of the solar light in degrees ranging from 0 to 360. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified vector but does not populate the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle.

Altitude from -90 to 90 - Controls the angle of the sun above the horizon in degrees ranging from -90 to 90. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified vector but does not populate the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle.



Notes

• The solar directional vector defines the exact direction of the solar lighting. When the X, Y, Z coordinates are adjusted, the Azimuth and Altitude angles are updated to reflect the current values. However, the Azimuth and Altitude angles do not cover the full range of possible sun vectors. That is, two different solar vectors can map to the same Azimuth and Altitude angles.


Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the computation of fog.

Activate - Allows you to use fog in the current scene.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the density of the fog effect. A value of 1 is extremely foggy. The density of the fog in the current scene is also affected by the current distance between the eye point and center point of the view.

Color - Displays the current fog color.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative fog color.


Set Global Lighting 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings. 2. Select the Ambient tab to control the light that envelopes objects. 3. Select the Flashbulb tab to control the light from a camera flashbulb. 4. Select the Solar tab to control the light from the sun. 5. Select the Fog tab to control the computation of fog.

Note


Related Topics • Rendering Photo-Realistic Images: An Overview, page 254



Placing Source Lights: An Overview Three different types of source light may be placed in your 3D model: Spot, Point, and Distant. Each of the New Source Light Settings commands prompt you to specify a position (using either standard 3D placement or a 2D point) and size of a new source light, and then displays the corresponding source light dialog box.

Note

• You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a spot light to a point light, for example, you must delete the spot light and then place a new point light.

Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range, page 284 • Delete Source Light, page 275 • Edit a Source Light, page 274 • Place a Source Light, page 273 • Raytrace a View, page 284

Place a Source Light 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > New XX Light 2. Enter the point where the light should be placed. 3. Enter a second point to indicate the light's interest point.

Tip

• This second point is used to determine both the lighting direction and also the light's falloff distance (used for the MicroStation, Fast, and Slow attenuation effects).

4. In the New XX Light dialog box, enter a name for the new source light. 5. Modify any other properties as needed. 6. Click OK.

Notes

• In Steps 1 and 3, XX refers to the type of light you wish to place - Point, Distant, or Spot.

• To see the effect of the new light, click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range and identify a small range around the light.

• The glyph color of a source light matches the color of the light being cast (as specified on the Effects tab).

• You can also select Point Light , Distant Light , or Spot Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar.



Related Topics • Delete Source Light, page 275 • Edit a Source Light, page 274

Edit a Source Light 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light 2. If there is more than one light in the model, the Edit Source Light dialog box

displays, allowing you to select the light you wish to edit. 3. Modify any properties as needed. 4. Click OK.

Notes

• Source lights are listed in the order that they currently exist.

• When multiple lights are selected on the Edit Source Light dialog box, the Edit > Light Type > Light dialog box cycles through all the selections until there are no more lights to edit.

• The geometry for lights that cannot be edited (e.g. MicroStation lights) appears "dim" in the model.

• Like any other piece of geometry, you can place any light, including non-editable MicroStation lights, into a display set. The raytracer does not use lights that are in a hidden display set in the rendered image. This feature allows you to manipulate the use of non-editable lights for raytracing without modifying the original geometry file.

• You can also select Edit Light on the Photo-Realism toolbar.

Related Topics • Delete Source Light, page 275 • Place a Source Light, page 273



Delete Source Light 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light. 2. Select a source light from the Lights list. 3. Click OK.

Notes

• You can also select Delete Light from the Photo-Realism toolbar.


• Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted. • Clicking Yes in the confirmation box will permanently remove the

light from the project database.

Related Topics • Edit a Source Light, page 274 • Place a Source Light, page 273

Lighten Shadows 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light. 2. Select the light you wish to edit. 3. Click the Effects tab on the Edit XX Light dialog box. 4. Click the Edit button and change the color to be a lower percentage of it's

maximum value.

Tip

• For example, instead of pure white (RGB=255, 255, 255), use a 25% white (RGB=64, 64, 64)

5. Ensure the Cast shadows option is enabled. 6. Click OK. 7. Place a source light of the same type as the one edited in the exact same location

with the exact same interest point. 8. On the Effects tab, edit the color of the second light to make up the difference in

the percentage of the maximum light when combined with the first light.

Tip

• For the previous example, you would use a 75% white (RGB=128, 128, 128).

9. Disable the Cast shadows option. 10. Click OK.



Notes

• In Step 3, XX refers to the type of light you selected in Step 2 - Point, Distant, or Spot.

• When you raytrace, the results will appear to be the same as if you used a single pure white light. However, the shadows will be the same percentage lighter as the second light's contribution.

• Following this procedure can help you simulate some of the effects of atmospheric scattering observed in the real world at the cost of extra computational time during the raytrace.

Related Topics • Edit a Source Light, page 274 • Effects Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box), page 279

New Source Light Dialog Box Provides options for controlling the point light position, effects, and attenuation.

Note

• You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a point light to a spot light, for example, you must delete the point light and then place a new spot light.

Information Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box) Provides options for controlling the light display, position and effects.

Light name - Provides a space in which to type an alphanumerical string to identify the light in the model. By default, this string is New Light with numerical increments. Light names do not have to be unique. However, unique names allow you to identify lights more easily.

Important

• MicroStation Lights cannot be named.

Type - Displays the type of light, such as Spot, Point, or Distance.

Level index - Assigns the selected light to a specific Level (1-63). This allows you more flexibility in using existing level, material assignments and display set functionality in combination with source lights.

Color index - Assigns a specific color level (0-250) to the selected light. This allows you more flexibility in using existing level, material assignments, and display functionality in combination with source lights.



File - Displays the filename for the master file with which the SmartPlant Review source lights are associated.

Size in MU:SU:PU: - Provides a place for you to type the size of the light geometry. You can type in a value in this box or size the light dynamically during placement.

Show - Specifies whether or not the light geometry should display in the 3D model. By default, this option is checked.

Important

• The display set containing the specified light must be active; otherwise, the light geometry will not display.

Shade - Specifies whether or not the light geometry should appear in shaded or wireframe mode in the model.

Show in Main view only - Specifies whether or not the light should appear in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views, or only in the Main view.

Notes

• The Light name field is limited to 32 characters for .VUE file support.

• Although unique names allow you to identify lights more easily, SmartPlant Review does not require unique names. The software tracks unique names internally.

Related Topics • New Source Light Dialog Box, page 276

Position Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box) Provides options for you to key in precise positions for the light. By default, the fields on this tab are populated with coordinates that the user selected during light placement.

Location in MU:SU:PU North - Specifies the north coordinate of the new light.

East - Specifies the east coordinate of the new light.

Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the new light.

Pick Point - Allows selection of the North/East/Elevation point (using either standard 3D placement or a 2D point) from within the model.



Interest in MU:SU:PU Absolute - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept the absolute directional values for the new light. This option allows you to move the new light in a specific direction from the original reference point.

Delta value - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the light position. This option allows the user to define an offset from the current position by a specified amount.

Delta direction - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta directional offset values for the light position. This option allows you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.

North - Specifies the absolute, delta value or delta direction for the north coordinate of the new light.

East - Specifies the absolute, delta value or delta direction for the east coordinate of the new light.

Elevation - Specifies the absolute, delta value or delta direction for the elevation coordinate of the new light.

Pick Point - Allows you to select the interest point (using either standard 3D placement or a 2D point) from within the model.

Important

• In source lighting, interest is the second point in a two-point placement that determines where the light is cast and/or its falloff rate. For distant and spot lights, the interest point represents a point on a line from the light location in the direction that the light is cast. For point and spot lights, the interest point is also the falloff point (where the attenuated intensity of the light is one-half of its original intensity). This point is tangent to an imaginary sphere centered on the light location.

Notes

• When placing point fall-off using 3D points, the mouse move provides only two coordinates. The missing coordinate for the view selected is defaulted to the center point of the Main view.

• Points picked in the model are used by the software to get the vector; the points themselves are not stored.




Effects Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box) Allows you to simulate effects, such as the twinkling of stars, light scatter, and shadows.

Activate - Specifies whether or not the light should be used for illumination. This option is checked by default whenever a light is placed.

Affect ambient only - Specifies that the light should only affect objects with materials that have ambient light properties.

Tip

• If this option is turned off, the light affects all objects equally.

• Ambient light is used to model the normal light scatter that is not solved by the raytracer. Only radiosity solves for ambient contribution in the scene.

Cast shadows - Specifies whether or not the light should cast shadows. This is the default option.

Color - Displays the current color of the new light.

Tip

• When lighting a scene with a single light that casts shadows, the shadows will be dark. With SmartPlant Review you can lighten shadows without adding undesired amounts of light to the scene.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can alter the color of the new light.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Specifies the intensity of the light. A recommended setting for this option is 1.

Important

• The following cone angle options are only available for spot lights. These options are disabled for point and distant lights.

Inner (must be less than outer) - Specifies the degrees of the inner angle (hot spot) of the spot cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.

Outer (must be greater than inner) - Specifies the degrees of the outer angle of the spot cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.



Notes

• The Activate option can be used in display set animation to simulate effects such as twinkling of stars. However, to display an actual light in a scene, you must model the light as geometry and then add lights in the same location to simulate the effect of light.

• The Affect ambient only option is useful to simulate "scatter", such as under a desk or in dark closet. Ambient light is used to model the normal light scatter that is not solved by the raytracer. Only radiosity solves for ambient contribution to the scene.

• There is one level of attenuation for light in the inner cone, and a different attenuation for light in the outer cone angle.


Attenuation Tab (New Point Light Dialog Box) Provides options for defining various attenuation settings for the light.

Important

• For distance lights, this tab is not visible.

• For MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation option is selected if the light is attenuated.

None - Specifies that there is no reduction of the intensity of the light based on the distance from the source of the light. This option is the default.



MicroStation - Specifies that the light attenuation effects are styled after those found in MicroStation. This option is the default and read-only for MicroStation lights that are attenuated. If the MicroStation light is not attenuated, the None option is selected.

Fast - Specifies that the light attenuation effects are styled after ModelView's fast attenuation. When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more quickly.

Slow - Specifies that the light attenuation effects are styled after ModelView's slow attenuation. When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more slowly.

Custom - Specifies an exact attenuation effect based on the three constants in the following fall-off (F) equation: F = 1.0 / (c1 + (c2*distance-to-light) + (c3*distance-to-light-squared).

Constant component from 0 to 10 - Allows you to specify a value for the constant attenuation component. The default value is 1.0

Linear component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the linear attenuation component. The default value is 1.0.

Quadratic component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the quadratic attenuation component. The default is value is 1.0

Notes

• Attenuation simulates the fall off of light from a positional light source. Constant fall off is the slowest and quadratic fall of is the fastest with linear in between constant and quadratic.

• OpenGL attenuates positional lights (points and spots) by an attenuation factor composed of the constants listed previously using the following equation: Attenuation factor = 1 / (C+L*d+Q*d*d)

• Ambient, diffuse and specular are all attenuated; global ambient and emission are not attenuated.

• For MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation option is selected if the light is attenuated.

• When the Custom option is selected, the light can be specified to exact catalog standards. For example, this option would be used to specify a GE 30 watt frosted bulb.

• Using non-default attenuation does require extra calculations and may slow performance.

Related Topics • New Source Light Dialog Box, page 276 • Place a Source Light, page 273



Edit Source Lights Dialog Box Allows you to select a light in the model and then edit all properties of the light. Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited.

Lights - Displays all the lights currently in the model. If you select more than one light, the dialog box cycles through each light individually until all the specified lights have been edited.

• Light State - If the source light will be used by the raytracer, the light state will be On. Otherwise, it will appear as Off.

Note

• For a light to be used by the raytracer, the following conditions must be met. SmartPlant Review will display a warning message if you activate a light, but it fails any of the conditions listed below.

1. The source light is Activated within its own individual settings. 2. The source light is on a visible level. 3. The source light is in a visible display set or if Ungrouped Elements is visible. 4. If the source light is a MicroStation light, the Photo-Realism setting to

activate all MicroStation lights must be On.

• Light Type - If the source light is a MicroStation ® type light, it will display as such; otherwise, the light type displays as Editable. SmartPlant Review does not allow you to edit or delete MicroStation ® lights.

• Light Usage - If source lighting is activated for the shaded view, then the indicator displays OpenGL + a slot number indicating which OpenGL hardware slot number is being used for the source light (if any). If source lighting is not activated for the shaded view, this



indicator will display Raytrace. This light usage indicator is helpful in determining which source lights (if any) are actually being used in the shaded view.

Important

• OpenGL only supports a limited number of source lights, depending on the video card and driver implementation, whereas the raytracer can use a virtually unlimited number of lights. The OpenGL standard guarantees that a minimum of eight lights will be supported.

Related Topics • Edit a Source Light, page 274 • Edit Source Light Command (View Menu), page 389

Delete Source Lights Dialog Box Allows you to select a source light in the model and then delete it. Deleted lights are permanently removed from the project database. Therefore, you will be prompted to answer Yes or No to delete the specified light. Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.

Note


Lights - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the needed graphic objects.

Related Topics • Delete Source Light Command (View Menu), page 389 • Delete Source Light, page 275

Raytracing: An Overview SmartPlant Review's raytracer process produces quality images that include true light reflection, transparency, refraction, and shadowing. These images enable you to see the true characteristics of the materials you select for your 3D model by accurately mimicking the way actual light reflects off your model surfaces.

The Raytrace process allows you to set the anti-alias level, to select a specific region of the view to be processed, to scale the final image size, and set up batch raytrace processes.

Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range, page 284 • Raytrace a View, page 284



Raytrace a View 1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the desired scene in the Main view. 2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace.

The rendered image appears in the Main view.

Important

• The SmartPlant Review application window will automatically become the topmost window on your screen once the raytrace is complete. This allows you to work on other applications while raytracing.

• To stop a raytrace, press Esc.

Notes

• You can also select Raytrace on the Photo-Realism toolbar. • If the Main view is not fully visible when the raytrace completes, a

message indicating this appears in the Text view.

• To modify rendering parameters, click View > Photo-Realism > Settings.

• To modify global light settings, click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings.

• If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified, you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again.

Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range, page 284

Define a Raytrace Range 1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the desired scene in the Main view. 2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range. 3. Click the starting point for the range. 4. Click the ending point for the range.

Tip


Notes

• You can also select Raytrace Range on the Photo-Realism toolbar.

• The output appears in the Main view.





• If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings, you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the image again.

Related Topics • Edit Raytracing Options, page 285 • Raytrace a View, page 284

Edit Raytracing Options 1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Settings. 2. Select the Environment tab to load a background image and environment box

into the Main view. 3. Select the Raytrace tab to control the quality and speed of the raytracing

program. 4. Select the Advanced tab to control system performance during raytracing

operations.

Related Topics • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255

Detecting Collisions: An Overview


Detecting Collisions: An Overview Two modes of collision detection are supported: static and dynamic. Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting.

Dynamic collision is performed when you define an object or group of objects to set in motion through the plant. Dynamic collision detection is useful when moving equipment such as a construction crane through a plant to find a safe pathway for the move.

SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space in your TMP directory to run collision detection.

Important

• To use the collision detection functionality, you must install the Construction module.

Collision detection provides the following capabilities:

Log File - A record of each collision run is always stored in the database. A log file contains a collision ID number, data type of colliding elements, type of collision with file location of colliding elements, and coordinates of the collision. Optionally, each record stored in the project database can be written to a text file.

Retain or Eliminate Colliding Movements - You can move through the model freely using display set motion while automatically generating collision reports for later review.

Highlight - The colliding objects are highlighted in an optional user-defined color.

Sound - You can assign *.WAV sound files to collision types.

Review Collision Data - Collisions are reviewed in sequential order as they are stored in the database. A snapshot option is available to save an image file of colliding objects while the colliding objects are highlighted. A save option is available to save a text file of the collision data on the collision report. You can zoom to individual collisions or display all collisions in the current Main view.

Note

• Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files, the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. In these cases, adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to view the collisions.



Collision Data Management - The collision information is saved in a Microsoft Access-compatible table. For collision detection, the display set is used for movement through the model. You can select a single object for a single step collision detection. There are three types of collision detection:

• Single step collision - Moves a single graphic element one discrete movement. Collision detection is run at the end of the single step movement, not continuously during the movement. You can run a single step collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision Detection dialog box.

• Stationary collision - Runs a static collision detection on the current model without any additional movements. You can run a stationary collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision Detection dialog box.

• Display set collision - Run as an option through the display set motion settings. If you select the collision detection option, collision detection is run at the end of each motion step, not continuously during the movement.

Note


The collision detection process requires temporary disk space. If you receive a message during collision detection notifying you that there is not enough temporary disk space, free more space in one of the following ways.

• Delete temporary files in the system temporary directory stated on the message box.

• Delete or move other files on the specified disk.

• Request assistance from your system administrator to change the location of the system TMP environment variable to point to a local disk with more available space.

Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302



Collision Detection Dialog Box Allows you to select options for running the collision detection program.

The Collision Detection command supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic. Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting.


SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space in your TMP directory to run collision detection.

Important

• All tab settings must be assigned for each individual collision set. For example, the default color assigned to an existing collision set will not automatically be applied when creating a new collision set. The default tab settings are applied only to the collision set in which they are created.


Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to create or select a collision set name. You must create or select a collision set name before you can define the collision detection process.

After you select a name, you can choose whether you want collision detection to return all types of collisions, or only certain types of collisions. For example, if you select the Between component elements filter, the collision detection process looks for collisions between elements that are part of a larger component.

Important

• All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set. Therefore, when creating a new collision set, you must assign settings for the new set.




Collision set name - Allows you to select or type the name of a collision set. You must specify a name before you can define additional collision detection properties. Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. Click Apply after you type in the name.

Delete - Removes the selected collision set from memory.

All types - Allows you to search for all types of collisions.

Selected types - Enables you to choose certain filters for the collision detection process. If you select Selected types, you must select one or more of the following types of collisions.

Intersecting - Allows you to search for intersecting collisions.

Tangent - Allows you to search for tangent collisions.

Contains another - Allows you to search for collisions with closed graphic elements that contain other graphic elements.

Embedded within - Allows you to search for collisions with graphic elements that are contained within other closed graphic elements.

Between component elements - Returns collisions between graphic elements with the same DMRS linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.

Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302

Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select one or more elements to move through a volume during the collision detection process. Or, you can specify that the collision detection takes place in a stationary, or static, manner.

This tab also allows you to define the volume within which collision detection occurs. You can select the entire model or define a smaller volume.



Important



Collision set name - Displays the current collision set name. You can create a new collision set on the Type Filter tab.

Single graphic element - Indicates that you want to select a single graphic element to move through a volume.

Display sets - Allows you to select a display set as the type of object to move for collision detection.

Stationary collisions in selected range cube - Allows you to select a stationary collision detection to find existing collisions in the model.

Select - Allows you to further define which elements to move through a volume. You can select either a single graphic element or a display set, depending on the collision set type that you selected.

Entire model - Indicates that the selected range for collision detection is the entire model range cube.

Range cube - Allows you to specify the range cube unit values for collision detection.

Minimum range in MU:SU:PU North - Defines the y-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

East - Defines the x-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

Elevation - Defines the z-axis coordinates. Units are MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

Maximum range in MU:SU:PU North - States the maximum range for the north (y-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units) units.

East - States the maximum range for the east (x-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units) units.

Elevation - States the maximum range for elevation (z-axis) in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units) units.




Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select geometry filters for the collision detection process. You can select all types of filters, or you can select certain types of filters based on different geometrical definitions.

Important




All types - Includes all types of geometry filters in collision detection.

Selected types - Includes the selected geometry filters in collision detection. You must select at least one geometry filter if you check the Selected types option.

B-spline surfaces - Filters in B-spline surfaces during collision detection. Cone - Filters in conical surfaces during collision detection. Elbow - Filters in elbows during collision detection. Ellipse - Filters in ellipses during collision detection. Flange - Filters in flanges during collision detection. Pipe - Filters in pipes during collision detection. Plane - Filters in planar surfaces during collision detection. Polymesh - Filters in polymeshes during collision detection. Projected Line Strings - Filters in projected line strings during collision detection. Projection - Filters in projections during collision detection. Revolution - Filters in revolutions during collision detection. Ruled surface - Filters in ruled surfaces during collision detection. Shape - Filters in shapes during collision detection. Sphere - Filters in spheres during collision detection.



Tipped cone - Filters in tipped conical surfaces during collision detection. Torus - Filters in torus surfaces during collision detection. Valves - Filters in valves during collision detection.


Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to select colors for the collision types. These colors appear in the graphic view when collisions occur.

Important




Default - Specifies a default color for all collision types. This default color is used for any collision type that does not have one of the override colors selected below.

Intersecting - Specifies a color for collisions with intersecting elements.

Tangent - Specifies a color for collisions with tangent elements.

Contains another - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are contained within other elements.

Embedded within - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are embedded within other elements.

Between component elements - Specifies a color for graphic elements with the same DMRS linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.

Edit - Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to choose a different color for each Collision color type.



Related Topics • Collision Detection Dialog Box, page 288

Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to specify sounds that play as collisions occur. You can select one or more types of collisions to match with sounds.

Important




Default - Assigns a default sound to all collision types. The default sound is used for any collision type that does not have one of the override sounds selected below.

Intersecting - Assigns a sound to collisions with intersecting elements.

Tangent - Assigns a sound to collisions with tangent elements.

Contains another - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that contain other elements.

Embedded within - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements embedded in other elements.

Between component elements - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that have the same DMRS linkage. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.

Browse - Allows you to locate a specific .wav file for each collision type.




Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) Allows you to set the delta at which the collision detection process runs for a single step collision. You enter north, east, or elevation deltas in MU:SU:PU, and then you can begin a single step collision detection run. While the collision detection runs, the Collision Detection dialog box hides from view and the status bar updates periodically to show the number of collisions and objects compared. Sounds play or colors appear if they are defined for the collision set.

After you run at least one collision detection session, you can generate a report. Each collision detection run is known as a frame. You can select a frame and zoom to individual collisions in that frame, or you can display all collisions at one time. You can also change the viewing angle of the display, take a snapshot of collisions, and save a copy of the collision report as a text file.

Important




North - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the north (y-axis) direction.

East - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the east (x-axis) direction.

Elevation - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the elevation (z-axis) direction.

Activate collision detection - Turns on the active collision detection mode.

Use collision limit - Halts the collision detection run after the specified number of collisions in the Collision limit box on the Run tab have occurred.

Collision limit - Halts the collision detection after the specified number of collisions occur.

Single Step - Starts the collision detection process for single step or static collisions. To run collision detection for display sets, click Motion > Settings and then click the Display Set tab. Click Motion > Display Set to activate the display set mode.

Report - Displays the collision detection results in the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box.



Notes

• Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU allows you to enter delta values for the North, East, or Elevation directions in which you want to move the object. Single step allows you to temporarily move an object one step. This movement should not be confused with moving a display set. Single step move allows you to temporarily move an object a certain amount to determine if it collides with anything. You can then adjust the move delta values to move the object a different amount and try it again. To move multiple times, you can make a display set out of the element and use the Move Display Set command.



Select Filters for Collision Types 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name.

Tips

• To define a new collision set, type a name in the Collision set name box. Single tick marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name. Then, click Apply to save the collision set name.


4. Under Collision types, select All types or Selected types.



Tip

• If you choose Selected types, you can select specific filters for the collision detection process. The software only reports the types of collisions that you specify.

Notes

• Always start on the Type tab to either create or select an existing collision set name. You cannot go to any other tab until you select a name.

• To delete a collision set, select a collision set name in the Collision set name box, and then click Delete.

• Click Apply at any time to save your settings.

Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302

Select Graphic Element Types 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Geometry Filter tab. 5. Under Non-linear graphic elements, select All types or Selected types.

Tip

• If you choose Selected types, you can choose the individual types of geometry to filter.

Notes



Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • View Collision Reports, page 302



Select Objects and Range 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Selection tab. 5. Under Object, select the type of object that you would like to include in the

collision detection process.

Tips

• To move a single element through 3D space during the collision detection process, select Single graphic element. Click Select to further refine the object definition.

• To move a set of objects through space, select Display sets. Click Select to further refine the object definition.

• To locate collisions in a static volume, select Stationary collisions in selected range cube.

6. Under Range cube, select either Entire model or Range cube.

Tip

• To define a specific volume for collision detection, select Range cube. 7. If you selected Range cube, type coordinates under Minimum range and

Maximum range. Each range is bounded by East (x-axis), North (y-axis), and Elevation (z-axis) coordinates. Units are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

Notes



Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • View Collision Reports, page 302



Select Collision Display Colors 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Color tab. 5. Under Collision colors, select one or more color filters. 6. Select one or more of the following options to assign colors to collision types.

• To assign a default color to all collisions that do not have special overriding colors assigned, click Default.

• To assign a color to intersecting collisions, click Intersecting.

• To assign a color to tangent collisions, click Tangent. • To assign a color to collisions in which elements enclose other

elements, click Contains another.

• To assign a color to all collisions in which elements are embedded in other elements, click Embedded within.

• To assign a color to all collisions that are made up of elements with the same DMRS linkage, click Between component elements.

Notes

• You can click Edit for each selected option to choose a different color.

• If you assign a color to Default and a color to Intersecting, the Intersecting color takes precedence and displays for intersecting collisions.


• To save your settings at any time, click Apply.

Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302



Select Collision Sounds 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Sound tab. 5. Select one or more of the following options to assign sounds to collision types.

• To assign a sound to all collisions that do not have special overriding sounds assigned, click Default.

• To assign a sound to intersecting collisions, click Intersecting.

• To assign a sound to tangent collisions, click Tangent. • To assign a sound to collisions in which elements enclose other

elements, click Contains another.

• To assign a sound to all collisions in which elements are embedded in other elements, click Embedded within.

• To assign a sound to all collisions that are made up elements with the same DMRS linkage, click Between component elements.

6. For each selected option, click Browse to locate a Wave sound file.

Tip

• If the sound does not seem to be working, check the following items: 7. Make sure the file is present on the system in an appropriate directory. 8. Adjust the speaker volume. 9. If there is still no sound, make sure the audio drivers are installed on the machine.

Notes

• If you assign a sound to Default and a sound to Intersecting, the Intersecting sound takes precedence and plays for intersecting collisions.


• During a collision detection run, the software searches for sound files in the following standard locations: the current directory, the Windows directory, the Windows system directory, directories listed in the PATH environment variable, and the list of directories mapped in a network.




Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302

Run Collision Detection 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Run tab. 5. Under Single step move delta in MU:SU:PU, type the deltas in the North (y-

axis), East (x-axis), and Elevation (z-axis) fields.

Tip

• Units for the North, East, and Elevation fields are in MU:SU:PU (Master Units:Sub Units:Positional Units).

6. Under Execution control, select Activate collision detection. 7. (Optional) Select Use collision limit. 8. Type a number in the Collision limit box. 9. Click Single Step to step through the collisions.

Tips

• The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection process is complete.

• The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of collisions found.

• Sounds and colors display for collisions based on the selections on the Sound and Color tabs. For a given collision type assigned to a sound file, the sound plays only on the first collision of that type.

10. After you run at least one collision detection session or frame, click Report to review previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions.

Notes

• You can stop the current, in motion collision detection process by pressing the Escape key.

• For a more precise means of motion control, use keypad motion to move display sets when checking for collisions.





• A record of each collision run is always stored in the project database. Optionally, you can save a text log file of any single collision run that exists in the database.

Related Topics • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297 • View Collision Reports, page 302

Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box Displays a report of the detected collisions after performing a collision detection run. You can make a snapshot of any collision, and you can save the collision report as a text file.

Important


Collision set name - Allows you to select a collision set name. Collisions for the selected collision set display in the list view.

Frame number - Allows you to select a specific frame in the collision set to view.

Wireframe highlight - Specifies that the requested report includes wireframe highlight around colliding objects.Collision results output - Displays information about the collisions, such as type, objects, and range points. To zoom in on a collision, click the list view, and then click a collision number in the left column.

Tip

• You can also use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in List view.

Note




Save - Allows you to save the collision detection results to a text file.

Snapshot - Allows you to take a snapshot of the collision detection results.

Display All - Allows you to display all of the collision detection results for the current collision set and frame number. If the collisions are not clearly visible, try adjusting the View cone to get a better viewing angle.


View Collision Reports 1. Click Tools > Collision Detection. 2. Click the Type Filter tab. 3. In the Collision set name box, select a name. 4. Click the Run tab. 5. Under Execution control, click Report. 6. In the Frame number box, select a frame.

Tip

• When you click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box, the report automatically displays collisions for the most recent frame of the selected collision set.

7. View the collisions.

Notes

• Click Display All to list all collisions with the current view angle. If the collisions are not clearly visible, try adjusting the View Cone to get a better viewing angle.

• To zoom in on a collision, click the list view. Then, click the collision you wish to view. You can also use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in the List view. Due to the type of coordinate system used in SAT and AutoCAD files, the zoom to collision feature may not work well on some files. In these cases, adjust the view to get the area of interest and use the Display All command on the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box to view the collisions.



• Click Save to store your data in a text file.


• Click Snapshot to take a picture of the view with the current collision colors and view angles.

• You can click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box at any time to review a report from any previously-executed collision detection run in the database.

• After running a collision detection and generating a report, move the Report Collision Detection Results dialog box off the Main view window to view the collision results.

• Collision detection reports show any moved display sets in their current locations. The current location of a display set may or may not be the same location of the display set at the time collision detection was run.

• A new frame number will not be added to the collision report data when collisions do not occur during a collision detection run.

Related Topics • Run Collision Detection, page 300 • Select Collision Display Colors, page 298 • Select Collision Sounds, page 299 • Select Filters for Collision Types, page 295 • Select Graphic Element Types, page 296 • Select Objects and Range, page 297

Collaborating with Others: An Overview


Collaborating with Others: An Overview Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously. All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date design version. Collaboration accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference.

Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review. Processing occurs at each computer so that performance depends on each computer, not on the network.

You can change the options for the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Edit. The Collaboration Settings dialog box allows you to update details for the data sets and participants in the collaboration.

You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting profile of the user.

The Driver options box allows you to establish settings for the driver of the conference. Because memory and performance limitations of some operating systems may cause difficulties for high speed collaboration sessions, you should assign the Driver to the slowest machine. You can also have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates that are sent to passengers during a short time interval. Slowing the speed of animation replay and motion updates may also improve operating system performance during a collaboration session.

After you confirm the options on the Collaboration Settings dialog box, you can start the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Run.

Tips

• The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration conference. A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session. A session can have only one driver at a time. Multiple passengers can participate in the session, and any one passenger can change to driver.

• During a collaboration, online mode occurs when the driver is transmitting commands to passengers. Offline mode occurs when the driver is not transmitting. The driver can use offline mode to configure the computer and temporarily pause the session. A passenger always works online.

When you click Send Driver's State, the views transmit from the driver computer to all passenger computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or a new participant joins the conference.



When you click Work Offline, transmission stops from the driver. When you click Track Mouse Cursor, the software synchronizes the cursor track of each machine. All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom.

The Refresh button provides an up-to-date list of conference members, as shown in the Conference members box. The Drive button assigns your computer as the driver, and no longer passenger.

Related Topics • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305

Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review When you establish a collaboration conference among computers, you can apply the use of NetMeeting in two methods:

• Application Sharing Mode - The default behavior for NetMeeting. The computer that displays the application only needs one copy of SmartPlant Review. NetMeeting receives all graphics calls and transmits the changes to the display to other users.

If you have a high-end graphics card with private client drivers, and you want to share the SmartPlant Review application with other users, you should be the user who sets the NetMeeting option on the View > Settings > Options tab in SPR. This setting allows the user with a high-end graphics card to properly share SmartPlant Review through NetMeeting.

• Collaboration Mode - Available from SmartPlant Review. Do not select the View > Settings > Options > NetMeeting check box, regardless of the video card installed on your computer. Collaboration Mode does not use application sharing from NetMeeting.

Tips

• Application Sharing Mode can possibly have a slow response on your computer. However, if your computer uses high-end graphics cards that have private client drivers and you want to use NetMeeting in the Application Sharing Mode, be sure to check the NetMeeting box on the View Settings dialog box.

• You cannot use NetMeeting in both modes at the same time.



Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309

Passenger Settings During a collaboration conference, the collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the controlling computer. A collaboration passenger is the person watching the session.

The passenger can view several different activities originating at the driver computer. The passenger can see the following actions:

• Movements of the pointer • View layouts and toolbars • Updates to the view • Display modes • Auto-Highlight and display of object data in the text window • Tags (for creating, editing, and deleting) • Add measurement and delete last measurement • Create display set • Display set manipulations • Change to the driver control • Changes in NetMeeting (for example, whiteboard, sound, security,

Internet Directory) • Regular view updates in all views • ScheduleReview Animation • Collision Detection with display set movement only

Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305



Collaboration Settings Dialog Box Data set name - Identifies the data set that is currently open.

Conference members - Displays the current collaboration participants in a tree format. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member based on the NetMeeting profile of the user.

Send Driver's State - Transmits the views from the driver computer to all passenger computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or a new participant joins the conference.

Work Offline - Stops transmission from the driver computer. This action is useful when you need to perform set-up prior to a collaboration session.

Track Mouse Cursor - Synchronizes the cursor track on each computer in the conference. All participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom.

Refresh - Updates the list of conference members.

Drive - Allows you to become the driver in the collaboration session. Any passenger can become a driver at any time.

Important

• Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review.

• Performance depends on each computer, not on the network. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems, assign the Driver to the slowest machine.

• Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.

• To reduce the burden on slower passenger machines, slow the speed of animation replay and motion updates.

• You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this functionality.

Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305



Establish a Collaboration Session 1. At the computer assigned as driver, host a NetMeeting call.

Tip

• The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration conference. A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session. The driver can work online to transmit commands to the passenger computers or work offline to temporarily stop transmitting. A passenger always works online. A session can have only one driver at a time. Multiple passengers can participate in the session, and any one passenger can change to driver.

2. Type the password. 3. Set the security level that you want. 4. On each passenger computer, call the driver computer and log in using the

conference name and password (if applicable). 5. Start SmartPlant Review on each computer. On all computers use the same

dataset or share a common data set, and use the same database. 6. On each computer, click Tools > Collaboration > Run. The default driver is the

meeting host.

Important


• To change the driver during a collaboration session, the passenger who wants to control the session clicks the Drive button. Performance depends on each computer, not on the network. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems, assign the Driver to the slowest machine.

• The driver can click Work Offline to stop transmission to the passenger computers. This action allows the driver to work without anyone viewing the display on the computer. For example, the driver can work offline to configure the computer. Also, have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.


• The driver can manually send views and the text window information by clicking the Send State button.

• Instead of hosting a meeting, two computers can call each other with a password (optional). In this case the caller is the driver.




Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305

Rejoin a Collaboration Session Sometimes something goes wrong with NetMeeting and you get dropped out of a conference due to network or other outside problems. To cleanly rejoin the conference, do the following:

1. Exit NetMeeting. 2. Exit Collaboration by toggling off Tools > Collaboration > Run. 3. If you were not the conference Host, re-start NetMeeting and rejoin the

conference. 4. If you were the conference Host, everyone in the conference needs to do steps 1

and 2.

Notes

• If the above steps do not work, or a "Bad Data Channel" message appears, exit both NetMeeting and SPR, then re-start both products. If you were not the conference Host, simply rejoin the existing conference. If you were the conference Host, everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SPR.

• If you still have trouble rejoining the conference, exit both NetMeeting and SPR, then use Process tab in the Windows Task Manager to determine if the conf.exe program is still running. The conf.exe program is part of NetMeeting and sometimes does not stop when NetMeeting is closed. If conf.exe is still running, click End Task in Task Manager to stop the program, then re-start both NetMeeting and SPR. Ifyou were not the conference Host, simply rejoin the existing conference. If you were the conference Host, everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SPR.

Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305



Edit Collaboration Settings Click Tools > Collaboration > Edit.

Important



• Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.



Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308 • Passenger Settings, page 306 • Rejoin a Collaboration Session, page 309 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305

Using ScheduleReview: An Overview


Using ScheduleReview: An Overview ScheduleReview allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. You can also reverse the action, so that you can display the deconstruction sequence.

ScheduleReview allows you to visualize the construction cycle in single steps (by day, week, or month) or continuously. You can also move along a predefined path in the model as you continuously step through time. For example, you can use ScheduleReview to help analyze the construction process to avoid problems, show the construction of specific units in the context of the overall project schedule, display the project as it should appear on a certain day, or fly through the model while displaying the construction sequence. ScheduleReview is ideal for presenting a fly through to project staff, senior management, and clients.

ScheduleReview provides the following commands and options:

• Settings • Auto Association • Query • Review • Task Symbology • Add Association • Remove Association • New Project • Delete Project • Set Active Project • Refresh Active Project

Important


Notes

• ScheduleReview supports the following planning software: Microsoft Project 98, Primavera Project Planner 2.0B (with RA installed), and Primavera Project Planner 3.0.

• You can import an existing .sri file to a user defined database or to a different project file and manipulate the data. You can export the ScheduleReview information to a .mdb file to save the modified data.

• ScheduleReview sessions update the views using the Buffered Update option. If "Off", you see the update as it's drawn; if "On", you see the update once all drawing is complete. Key Frame Motion animation is always double-buffered. For consistency, make sure the Buffered Update option is "On".



ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box Provides features that allow you to do the following:

• Specify the SmartPlant Reviews model and the project planning software.

• Group model elements manually or automatically for logical manipulation.

• Associate element groups manually or automatically with specific construction tasks.

• Display the start and stop of construction tasks in shaded, wireframe, or transparent modes.

• Execute queries on model elements and display results graphically.

• Save animation frames to disk for post-processing with digital video editing software.

Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Defines the brand of scheduling software you are using and the name of the project file.

ScheduleReview project - Displays the name of the currently active ScheduleReview project file.

Project file - Specifies the name and path of the planner file associated with the ScheduleReview project.

Browse - Allows you to navigate to a new project file.

Project type - Allows you to select the type of planner project to associate with the ScheduleReview project that is currently active. SmartPlant Review supports Microsoft Project and Primavera project files.

Reset Fields - Resets all the project settings if you switch between scheduling software, such as Microsoft Project to Primavera.

Caution

• Avoid opening an MS Project planner file using automation through ScheduleReview (specifically, with the Refresh Active Project command) and concurrently opening the same file with an instance of the MS Project application.



Notes


• Prior to using ScheduleReview, at least one of the supported project planning programs must be installed on your computer. Refer to the user documentation for the respective program for information on installing and using the software.

• If you are setting up your own model to view with ScheduleReview, you must first create a New ScheduleReview Project.

Related Topics • ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu), page 427 • ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box, page 312

Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Provides options for defining the appearance of SmartPlant Review elements when you execute the ScheduleReview command. For example, you can specify that items display in blue wireframe when tasks start and green shaded when tasks end. This helps you identify the status of various elements in your project throughout the review process.

Type - Specifies the type of object for which you are defining symbology. You can define the appearance of each task individually.

Visible - Allows you to define the visibility for the symbology that is currently selected.

Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology that is currently selected. You can choose Shaded, Wireframe, or Transparent.

Color - Displays the color of this symbology.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to edit the color for this symbology.

Related Topics • ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box, page 312 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Links a key frame animation group to ScheduleReview playback, using an animation path you created in SmartPlant Review with the Save/Recall View command.

View group - Specifies the name of the key frame view group you want to link to this ScheduleReview playback.

Start date - Specifies the date on which you want the view group animation to start playing. Until this date is reached during playback, the first frame of the view group is displayed.

Rate - Selects the rate for updating key frame animations, subject to the unit selection. You can specify the rate in Days per frame or Frames per day.

Days per frame - Updates key frame animations by one frame per number of days entered in the Rate box.

Frames per day - Updates frame animations by the number of frames entered in the Rate box for each day of the ScheduleReview playback.

Start - Selects the first frame of the selected animation that displays.

End - Selects the highest frame number to display from the selected key frame animation.

Loop - Specifies that key frame animations start over from the beginning automatically if the last frame is reached before the ScheduleReview playback ends.

Notes

• If a ScheduleReview session is started with its own animation, any KeyFrame Animation will be stopped and the current animation state reset by Schedule Review. All Key Frame Motion animation commands are disabled during the ScheduleReview session.

• If a ScheduleReview session is started without its own animation (No Animation is selected in the View Group list), all the current Key Frame Motion animation commands (Display, Play, Pause, and Stop) can be used during the ScheduleReview session. Likewise, the ScheduleReview Play, Pause, and Stop commands do not affect the Key Frame Motion commands.




Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Defines the settings for the images that are created when you record a ScheduleReview playback. Options specify the prefix name for each frame, anti-aliasing level, frame size, as well as the directory and drive locations for the frames.

Width - Specifies the width of the image in pixels.

Height - Specifies the height of the image in pixels.

Anti-alias - Specifies the type of antialising you want to apply to the frames. You can choose from None, Low, Medium, and High. If you select None, the frames are of the lowest quality but process quickly. If you select Low or Medium, the quality is slightly higher but process more slowly. If you select High, the frames are high quality but process very slowly.

Directory - Displays the destination directory path for the saved animation frames. You can specify the directory by using Browse.

Browse - Allows you to navigate to a directory or file.

Files prefix - Sets the prefix to use as the first part of the name of every ScheduleReview snapshot.

Start number - Specifies the frame number to start at when naming image files. This value is appended to the Files prefix to create the image file names. The sample File name (directly below the Files prefix text box) updates to reflect changes.

File type - Specifies the graphic file type for the images saved to disk. Click .rgb for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format, or click .bmp for Windows bitmap.

File name - Display a preview of what the first image will be called.

Caution

• The Snapshot Frame window will capture the image of the cursor or any dialog box that is positioned over it. Wait until all frames are written to disk before permitting other tasks.

Note

• If you write the frames to disk, the review process takes much longer since ScheduleReview takes a "snapshot" of each review screen.

Related Topics • Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu), page 359 • ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box, page 312 • Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings, page 319



Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) Displays the date settings for the ScheduleReview playback. With these command options, you can step through the construction process by day, week, or month. This process allows you to closely analyze each step through the construction process and anticipate problems that may arise. For example, you can determine if adding a large piece of equipment at a certain point in the construction process will interfere with the construction of additional items in the model. In addition, this command provides several different options such as viewing the model as it appears on a specific day or at a certain percentage of work complete. You can also review the model based on query criteria.

You can also step through the deconstruction process, if necessary. You can use this option to analyze refurbishment plans for the model and analyze procedures for removing or replacing existing pieces of equipment.

Start - Selects the first date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The earliest possible value (and the default value) is the starting date of the first task of the project.

Current - Selects the current date of the ScheduleReview playback.

End - Selects the last date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The latest possible value (and the default value) is the finishing date of the last task of the project.

Percent complete - Displays the schedule status in terms of date and percentage of completion.

Step in days - Selects the number of days to advance the current date during each update of the ScheduleReview playback.

Per seconds - Sets the number of seconds in between dynamic updates of the ScheduleReview playback. Decimal values, such as 1.5, are accepted.

Loop - Instructs ScheduleReview that if the animation finishes before the review cycle is complete, the animation starts over from the beginning and runs until the review process is complete.

Snapshot - Allows you to specify that the frames ScheduleReview playback generates automatically write to disk, according to the settings on the Snapshot tab.

Highlight query during review - Displays query items during a schedule review. This option is not selected by default.



Select Query - Displays a modified Query dialog box. You can either select an existing query, or use the Query dialog box to define a new query. This dialog box has a reduced set of options, and allows you to change only the Color (Highlight Method) and Always Display (Additional Settings) options. If Always Display is not selected, query results display only when you reach the query's start date. Otherwise, this modified dialog box functions the same as the regular Query dialog box.

Notes

• Before using this command, define groups and associate tasks with the groups.

• To interrupt the review process, click the Stop button on the ScheduleReview toolbar.


Set ScheduleReview Project Settings 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 2. On the Project tab, choose a Project type. 3. Click Browse to select a new Project file. 4. Click Reset Fields.

Notes

• You can also select Schedule Review Settings on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

• Reset Fields resets the project settings if you switch between scheduling software (Microsoft Project or Primavera, for example).


Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • Import ScheduleReview Project, page 322 • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321



ScheduleReview Task Symbology 1. Click Tools > Schedule Review > Task Symbology. 2. Select a Type of task. 3. Select Visibility for Default or Visible. 4. Select Default for Style or select Wireframe, Transparent, or Shaded. 5. Select Default for Color or select a specific color.

Notes

• The Task Symbology command allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task.

• If you do not use this command to assign symbology, the Review command uses the default symbology.

• This command is only available when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file.

Related Topics • Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings, page 318 • Set ScheduleReview Project Settings, page 317 • Set ScheduleReview Review Settings, page 320 • Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings, page 319 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 2. Click the Animation tab. 3. Select a View group. 4. Select a Start date. 5. Select a Rate. 6. Select Days per frame or Frames per day. 7. Select a Start frame. 8. Select an End frame. 9. Select Loop to loop animation.

Notes

• You can also select Schedule Review Settings on the ScheduleReview toolbar.




Related Topics • Construction Module, page 22 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 2. Click the Snapshot tab. 3. Type a number for the Dimensions Width. 4. Type a number for the Dimensions Height. 5. Select an Anti-alias. 6. Browse to the output Directory for the ScheduleReview file. 7. Type a Prefix for the files. 8. Type a Start Number for the Frame. 9. Select a File type.

Note

• You can also select ScheduleReview Settings on the ScheduleReview toolbar.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Task Symbology, page 318 • Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings, page 318 • Set ScheduleReview Project Settings, page 317 • Set ScheduleReview Review Settings, page 320 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



Set ScheduleReview Review Settings 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 2. Click the Review tab. 3. Select a Start date. 4. Select a Current date. 5. Select an End date. 6. Select a Step (in days) for Dynamic updating. 7. Type a number of Seconds for Dynamic updating. 8. Select Loop to repeat ScheduleReview play in a loop. 9. Select Snapshot to display as a snapshot. 10. Select Highlight query during review to display query items during a schedule

review. 11. Click Select Query to select or define a query.

Note

• You can also select ScheduleReview Settings on the ScheduleReview toolbar.


Related Topics • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Create a New ScheduleReview Project 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project. 2. Type a Name for the new project. 3. Click OK. 4. Establish ScheduleReview Settings.

Related Topics • Delete a ScheduleReview Project, page 321 • Import ScheduleReview Project, page 322 • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321



Delete a ScheduleReview Project 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project. 2. Select the project to delete. 3. Click OK.

Caution

• A message is displayed confirming that you want to delete the project. When you delete a project, this action cannot be reversed.

Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Set Active ScheduleReview Project 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Set Active Project. 2. Select a project.


Refresh Active ScheduleReview Project Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project.

Notes

• You must have project planning software such as MS Project or Primivera loaded to use this command.

• This command is used to make sure the most recent schedule data is available to the ScheduleReview program.

Related Topics • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321



Import ScheduleReview Project 1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects. 2. On the Open dialog box, select a file or browse to the file that you want, and click

Open.

Notes

• The project that you import must have a unique name.

• When you import an existing .sri file from a previous ScheduleReview session, ensure that all ScheduleReview settings have a valid option selected.

• To avoid error messages that may occur when you open an existing .sri file created with MS Project Planner, open the MS Project Planner file in MS Project 98.

• You can see a list of projects by clicking the ScheduleReview - MS Projects bar in the Project Manager window.

Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • Delete a ScheduleReview Project, page 321 • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321

ScheduleReview Auto Association 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto Association. 2. Select a method. 3. Click OK. The program automatically associates the tasks that match the

specified criteria with the appropriate group.

Notes

• The Auto Association command automatically associates tasks with a group. It works by comparing the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks.

• Before using this command, define all of the groups and tasks that you will use to review the model.

Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association, page 323 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



Add a ScheduleReview Association 1. From the Project Manager, select the ScheduleReview task to add. 2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association.

Notes

• Use this command when you want to create an association between a task and one or more display sets.

• This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file.

Related Topics • Remove a ScheduleReview Association, page 323 • Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings, page 318

Remove a ScheduleReview Association 1. Select the ScheduleReview task to remove from the Project Manager. 2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association.

Notes


• You can restore the associations you just removed by dragging the display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display set.

Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association, page 323 • ScheduleReview Auto Association, page 322

Create a ScheduleReview Query 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New. 2. Enter a phrase to identify the query in the Name box. 3. In the Definition section, click the Edit button to specify the limits of the query in

the Criteria box. 4. Select an option in the Fit section.

Tips

• Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.

• Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main view.



• Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view. 5. Select an option in the Display section for viewing the query results.

Tips

• Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a query.

• Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results display when you execute a query.

• Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the query results display when you execute a query.

6. In the Highlight method section, select the display format in Style and the specify the color for displaying objects found in the query in Color. Click the Edit button to display the Color dialog box if you need to change the color.

7. Click Execute Query.

Notes

• The New ScheduleReview Query command searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main View and displays the elements according to selected options. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.

• The project planning file you want to use with this query must already exist.

• The search criteria resides in your project planning file. For example, if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are available as search criteria.

Related Topics • Edit a ScheduleReview Query, page 324

Edit a ScheduleReview Query 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit. 2. Select a query Name.

Tip

• To delete a query, select the query and click Delete. 3. Click Edit to update the query using your project planning program. 4. Select an option to Fit query results.



Tips

• Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.

• Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main view.

• Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view. 5. Select an option to Display query results.

Tips

• Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a query.

• Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results display when you execute a query.

• Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the query results display when you execute a query.

6. Select a Highlight method Style. 7. Select a Highlight method Color.

Notes

• Edit ScheduleReview Query searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main View and displays the elements according to the options selected. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.

• The search criteria that you use comes from your project planning file. For example, if you have tasks in your project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are available as search criteria.


• The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in the query.


Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323



New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main View and displays the elements according to selected options. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.

Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.

Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.

Definition Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.

Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.

Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or objects in the Main view accordingly.

Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material colors.

Fit None - Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.

All - Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.

Query results - Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main view when you start the query.

Display All - Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

Query results - Displays only matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

All but query results - Displays only non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

Highlight method Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.

Color - Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds.



Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for the objects that your query finds.

Notes




Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323 • Query New Command (Tools Menu), page 427

Edit ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box Allows you to edit an existing ScheduleReview Query.

Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.

Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.

Definition Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.

Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.

Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or objects in the Main view accordingly.

Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material colors.

Fit None - Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.

All - Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.

Query results - Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main view when you start the query.



Display All - Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

Query results - Displays only matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

All but query results - Displays only non-matching elements when you start the currently selected query.

Highlight method Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.

Color - Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for the objects that your query finds.

Notes




Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323 • Query New Command (Tools Menu), page 427

Task Symbology Dialog Box Enables you to edit symbology settings for the task that is currently active in the ScheduleReview project tree.

Task ID - Displays the unique ID of the task to which this symbology applies.

Type - Allows you to select a symbology to edit.

Visibility Default - Allows you to select the default visibility for the symbology.

Visible - Displays and sets the visibility for the symbology.



Style Default - Allows you to select the default style for the symbology.

Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology. You can choose Wireframe, Transparent, or Shaded.

Color Default - Allows you to select the default color for the symbology.

Color - Allows you to specify a color for the symbology.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the color for the symbology.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Task Symbology, page 318 • Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu), page 431

Auto-Association Dialog Box Compares the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks and automatically associates the tasks with a group.

Match whole string - Looks for task names that exactly match the group name. For example, if you have a task named steel pipe, the task is only associated with a group called steel pipe.

Match substring of task name- Looks for task names with a substring that matches a group name. For example, if you have a task named paint steel pipe, the task can be associated with a group called steel pipe.

Match substring of group name - Looks for tasks that match a substring of a group name. For example, if you have a task called steel pipe, the task can be associated with a group called steel pipe iso15.

Match case - Matches tasks with groups using case-sensitivity. For example, Steel Pipe matches Steel Pipe, but not steel pipe. You can use this option in association with any of the three association methods.

Cumulative - Adds the result of the current operation to the existing set of associations. If not selected, ScheduleReview deletes associations before creating new ones. The Cumulative option also looks for task names with a substring that matches a group name. For example, if you have a task named paint steel pipe, the



task can be associated with a group called steel pipe. You can use this option in association with any of the three association methods.

Related Topics • Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu), page 432 • ScheduleReview Auto Association, page 322 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Add Association Dialog Box Allows you to add an association between a task and one or more display sets.

Name - Specifies the display sets to select for completing the type of criteria definition. Selected display sets are highlighted.

ID - Displays the unique ID for the display set.

Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association, page 323 • Add Association Command (Tools Menu), page 432

New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box Creates a new ScheduleReview project.

Name - Allows you to enter a unique name for the new ScheduleReview project.

Note


Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • New Project Command (Tools Menu), page 433

Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box Deletes one or more ScheduleReview projects.

Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.

Note


Related Topics • Delete a ScheduleReview Project, page 321



Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box Allows you to select the active ScheduleReview project.

Note


Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.

Related Topics • Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu), page 434 • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321

Utilizing ScheduleReview Controls: An Overview The ScheduleReview controls allow you to view your construction sequences quickly and efficiently. You can play, pause, or stop the ScheduleReview process at your convenience. You can also utilize more advanced commands, such as specifying a particular date for viewing.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334 • ScheduleReview Pause, page 332 • ScheduleReview Percent Complete, page 336 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331 • ScheduleReview Stop, page 332

ScheduleReview Play 1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects. 2. Select a ScheduleReview project to open. 3. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview.

Notes

• The Play command starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the Settings dialog box. When you click Play, the review process starts on the Start Date you defined and stops on the End Date.



• You can also play the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+R on the keyboard.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Pause, page 332 • ScheduleReview Record, page 335 • ScheduleReview Stop, page 332

ScheduleReview Pause 1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start the ScheduleReview

project. 2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview.

Tip

• Click Pause again or Play to continue the ScheduleReview project.

Note

• You can also use the Go To Start, Back, Forward, Go To End or Stop command when Pause is activated to continue the ScheduleReview project.

• You can also pause by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Space on the keyboard.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331 • ScheduleReview Record, page 335 • ScheduleReview Stop, page 332

ScheduleReview Stop Click Stop on the ScheduleReview toolbar to stop the ScheduleReview review process.

Notes

• You can also stop the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+S on the keyboard.




Related Topics • ScheduleReview Pause, page 332 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331 • ScheduleReview Record, page 335

ScheduleReview Forward 1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview. 2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview. 3. Click Forward on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes

• Use the Forward command to step forward through the ScheduleReview session.

• Forward is only available when ScheduleReview is paused. • To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.

Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331

ScheduleReview Back 1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview. 2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview. 3. Click Back on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes

• Use the Back command to step back through the ScheduleReview session.

• Back is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334



• ScheduleReview Play, page 331

ScheduleReview Go To Start 1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview. 2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview. 3. Click Go To Start on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes

• Go To Start is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331

ScheduleReview Go To End 1. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview. 2. Click Pause on the ScheduleReview toolbar to pause ScheduleReview. 3. Click Go To End on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Notes

• Use the Go To End command, available only when ScheduleReview is paused, to go directly to the end of the ScheduleReview session.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331



ScheduleReview Go To Date Select a date using Go To Date on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333 • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331

ScheduleReview Record 1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings. 2. Click the Animation tab. 3. Select a View group to play.

Tip

• If the Record button does not become active, you do not have a valid View group selected.

4. Select the Snapshot tab. 5. Select a directory to write your review. 6. Click Record on the ScheduleReview toolbar. 7. Click Play on the ScheduleReview toolbar.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Pause, page 332 • ScheduleReview Play, page 331 • ScheduleReview Stop, page 332



ScheduleReview Percent Complete Move the slider bar for Percent Complete on the ScheduleReview toolbar to display the review at that percentage of completion.

Notes

• Percent Complete displays the status of the review whenever a review is played.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335 • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334 • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334

Printing: An Overview


Printing: An Overview SmartPlant Review provides high resolution printing and other capabilities that give you flexibility and control over printed results. To perform printing operations, use the three print commands on the File menu. Some options may be unavailable, according to which printer and printer driver you select. Some dialog boxes, such as the Advanced Document Properties dialog box, change according to the printer you have selected.

The following printing options are available:

• Change Print Setup Options

• Quick Print the Main View

• Quick Print the Full View

• Print the Main View at a High Resolution

Change Page Setup Options 1. Click File > Page Setup.

Tip

• The Page Setup automatically displays the default printer specified in Control Panel - Printers options. The Orientation option is unavailable for most printers.

2. Select a different printer from the Printer option.

Tip

• If the printer you want is not in the printer list, click Network. Use the resulting Connect to Printer dialog box to select the printer.

3. Select a paper size from the Page Setup > Paper Size list. 4. Click Portrait or Landscape to select an orientation. 5. Click Printer > Properties to select advanced options.

Related Topics • Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 339 • Quick Print the Full View, page 338 • Quick Print the Main View, page 338



Quick Print the Main View 1. Click File > Print.

Tips

• Printing an image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture and process the image quickly.

• Quick print main captures the Main View image at the current screen resolution and prints the view on the selected printer.

2. Select the options for your print job. 3. Click Quick print main.

Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options, page 337 • Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 339 • Printing: An Overview, page 337 • Quick Print the Full View, page 338

Quick Print the Full View 1. Click File > Print. 2. Select the options for your print job. 3. Click Quick Print Full.

Notes

• Quick Print Full captures an image of the entire SmartPlant Review application window at the current screen resolution and sends it to the selected printer.

Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options, page 337 • Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 339 • Printing: An Overview, page 337 • Quick Print the Main View, page 338



Print the Main View at a High Resolution 1. Click File > Print. 2. Select your print job options. 3. Click High Resolution.

Caution

• Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during the printing process or SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the Main View. SmartPlant Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason.


Notes

• The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. However, these options are supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.


Tips

• Printing an image on screen, rather than off screen takes full advantage of any available hardware acceleration. This enables SmartPlant Review to capture and process the image quickly.

• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.

Related Topics • Print Dialog Box, page 342 • Quick Print the Full View, page 338 • Quick Print the Main View, page 338



Page Setup Dialog Box Allows you to tailor a page to your specific requirements. Some options may be unavailable, according to which printer and printer driver you select.

Size - Specifies the size of the paper or envelope that you want to use.

Source - Specifies where the paper you want to use is located in the printer. Different printer models support different paper sources, such as the upper tray, envelope feed, and manual feed.

Portrait - Positions the document so that the short edge of the paper is the top of the page.

Landscape - Positions the document so that the long edge of the paper is the top of the page.

Printable Area - Width specifies the width of the printable area on the page. Height specifies the height of the printable area on the page.

One page - Width specifies the width of the page. Height specifies the height of the page.

Horizontal - Specifies the horizontal size of the image.

Vertical - Specifies the vertical size of the image.

Left - Specifies the left position of the origin point in the image.

Top - Specifies the top position of the origin point in the image.

Fit to printable area - Reduces or enlarges the image to fit in the maximum printable area.

Center Horizontally - Centers the print horizontally in the dimensions specified for print. The image will be centered across the x axis in the maximum printable area.

Center Vertically - Centers the print vertically in the dimensions specified for print. The image will be centered across the y axis in the maximum printable area.

Gamma - Enter a value from 0.1 to 10.0 to adjust the Gamma to more closely match the screen display or other images. Typical effective values range from 1 to 2.

High resolution image only Keep Aspect Ratio - Select to retain the proportion (x and y relationship) of the image. If you change either the horizontal or vertical image size, the opposite value changes to retain the proportion of the image. You cannot edit the values if Fit to Printable Area is selected. The value in parentheses displays the size of the image in pixels.



Antialias - Specifies the level to improve images by smoothing the transitions between model edges. You can select one of four levels. Level 1 (default) applies no anti-aliasing; level 4 applies the maximum. Print processing times increase as you increase the anti-alias level.

Tip

• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.

Resolutions in pixels/inch - Specifies the resolution for the print job in pixels per inch. The printer reduces the image for values greater than its maximum resolution.

Wide - Specifies the number of pages horizontally that the image is tiled on multiple pages.

Tall - Specifies the number of pages vertically that the image is tiled on multiple pages.

Printer - Allows you to change printer options.

Notes

• The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. However, the options are only supported in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.


Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options, page 337 • Page Setup Command (File Menu), page 361

Print Preview Dialog Box Allows you to preview a page as it will look when printed.

Print - Displays the Print dialog box, which allows you to select options for printing the Main view.

Next Page - Allows you to switch to the next page.

Prev Page - Allows you to view the previous page.



Two Page - Switches the preview from one page to two pages. When Two Page is selected, the icon changes to One Page, allowing you to switch back to a one page preview.

Zoom In - Allows you to enlarge the page.

Zoom Out - Allows you to decrease the page.

Close - Closes the Print Preview dialog box and returns you to the active window.

Print Dialog Box The following features are available on the Print dialog box. Some options may be unavailable, according to which printer and printer driver you select.

Name - Lists the printers that are set up on your computer.

Properties - Displays the Document Properties dialog box, which allows you to choose options for the selected printer. The available options depend on the features of the printer.

Quick print main - Captures the Main view image at screen resolution and sends it to the selected printer.

Quick print full - Captures an image of all SmartPlant Review windows at screen resolution and sends the image to the selected printer.

High resolution - Captures an image at high resolution and sends it to the selected printer.

Notes


• The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules. However, these options are supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.




Tip

• If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but have less than the recommended screen resolution, click Single Pane Layout on the Common toolbar. You will then be able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.

Number of copies - Provides a space for you to type the number of copies that you want to print.

Collate - Allows you to specify collation for multiple copies.

Related Topics • Print Command (File Menu), page 361 • Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 339 • Quick Print the Full View, page 338 • Quick Print the Main View, page 338

Using Accessories: An Overview


Using Accessories: An Overview You can add commands and programs to the Accessories menu to extend the functionality of the software. For example, you can add commands to start other programs, such as a CAD application, a raster image editor, or a word processor. To specify which add-ins appear on the Accessories menu, you edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file.

Add-in example programs delivered with the software demonstrate a number of custom functions.

• The Text Annotations add-in (TXTANNO.EXE) places, edits, turns on and off, and deletes text annotations. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations.

• The Set Window Size add-in (WINSIZE.EXE) specifies custom sizes for the Main, Plan, and Elevation view windows.

• The Move Display Set add-in (MOVEDSET.EXE) selects a display set and a distance and moves or rotates the display set accordingly.

You can customize the add-in examples by using development tools and resources. See the API directory for programming resources and tools. See the SmartPlant Review Programmer's Guide (prm.chm) for in-depth documentation on developing custom add-in functions.

Related Topics • Creating Display Set Movement (MOVEDSET.EXE): An Overview,

page 351 • Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview, page

346 • Setting Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE): An Overview, page 350

Modifying the Accessories Menu A file named ACCESSRY.TXT defines the Accessories menu entries. You can edit ACCESSRY.TXT with a text editor such as Notepad. If you edit the file in a word processor, such as Microsoft Word, save the file as text-only.

File conventions The following example shows a menu entry in the ACCESSRY.TXT file:

&Text Annotations= c:\Program Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant Review\Api\txtanno.exe.



The string before the equals (=) sign is the text that displays as an entry on the Accessories menu. The ampersand (&) inserted in front of a given letter creates a mnemonic, an underline on that letter, to aid in menu navigation. An optional working directory, enclosed within an open bracket ([) and a close bracket (]), follows the equals (=) sign. If not specified, the working directory is the project directory (where the .DRI file is located). The program name, including any path and any parameters, follows the close bracket (]) if a working directory is specified. If the working directory is not listed, the program name string follows the equals (=) sign.

Other ACCESSRY.TXT file conventions include the following:

• Any line where the first non-blank character is a semicolon (;) is a comment and is ignored.

• Leading or trailing white space characters are ignored.

• A blank line between menu entries signifies a separator (horizontal line) on the menu. Blank lines before first menu entry and after the last are ignored.

• To create a submenu, use greater than signs (>) to enclose menu text strings. The keyword ENDMENU is used after the last item in the submenu.

Additional file information The software looks for the ACCESSRY.TXT file first in the project directory (where the .DRI file is located). If the file is not there, the software looks in the home directory defined by the HOMEDRIVE and HOMEPATH environment variables; if the file is not there, the software looks in the directory of the running executable (where SPR.exe is located). The software reads the first ACCESSRY.TXT file found and ignores the others.The software reads the file at program start-up and when you click the Load Accessories menu command.

The software reads the first ACCESSRY.TXT found and ignores the others. If the file contains entries, the software puts the entries under the Accessories menu between the Tags and Windows menus. If you move or delete ACCESSRY.TXT, the only command available on the Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command. Edits appear in the menu as soon as you save the ACCESSRY.TXT file and click the Load Accessories command.

Related Topics • Starting Programs Automatically, page 346 • Using Accessories: An Overview, page 344



Starting Programs Automatically You can automatically start a program when you start the software. Open the ACCESSRY.TXT file, and add the programs that you want to start automatically, designated by an asterisk (*) before the regular menu entry names.

The menu entries marked by asterisks will NOT appear in the Accessories menu.

Note

• The following syntax will automatically start the Text Annotations add-in every time you open the software:

*Text Annotation = c:\Program Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant Review\Api\txtanno.exe.

Related Topics • Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview, page

346 • Modifying the Accessories Menu, page 344 • Using Accessories: An Overview, page 344

Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview

The Text Annotations add-in allows you to place, edit, turn on and off, and delete text annotations. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as leader lines. Annotations are not saved when you exit the software.

Tip

• You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. See the API directory for programming resources and tools.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Place Text Annotations, page 347



Place Annotation Dialog Box Allows you to specify the position and color of annotations, as well as annotation leader lines.

Data attribute - Lists the attributes to display in the annotation.

Arrow - Includes an arrow with the annotation.

Background - Allows you to choose a background color.

Positional units - Includes positional units (MU:SU:PU) for the annotation.

Text - Allows you to select a color for the annotation text.

Background - Allows you to select a color for the annotation background.

Line - Allows you to select a color for the annotation line.

Preview - Shows what the annotation looks like.

Related Topics • Place Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 461 • Place One Command (Accessories Menu), page 461 • Place Text Annotations, page 347 • Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview, page 460

Place Text Annotations 1. Do one of the following:

• To place a single annotation, click Accessories > Text Annotations. Then click Place > One.

• To place several consecutive annotations, click Accessories > Text Annotations. Then click Place > Many.

2. Click locations for a leader point and a center point. The Place Annotation dialog box appears.

3. In the Data attribute list, select an attribute to display as the annotation. 4. Under Display options, select the items that you want to display.

Notes

• If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu, edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file delivered with the software.

• You can change the color of text, background, and lines for annotations. Under Colors, click the button corresponding to the color attributes that you want to change. Use the standard Windows Color



dialog box to choose a color. The area under Preview updates to reflect the changes that you made.

• If you chose the Place Many command, you can place another annotation after clicking OK on the Place Annotation dialog box.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Text Annotations, page 348

Move Text Annotations 1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Move. 2. Click the annotation that you want to move; click again to accept. The Move

Annotation dialog box appears. 3. Edit the MU:SU:PU values to define a new coordinate for the center of the

annotation.

Notes


• You must have at least one text annotation in the Main view before you can move an annotation.

• You can also graphically identify a new coordinate for the annotation by clicking Select on the Move Annotation dialog box and identifying the new location. The new coordinates appear in the dialog box.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Place Text Annotations, page 347



Edit Text Annotations 1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit. 2. Click the annotation that you want to edit; click again to accept. The Edit

Annotation dialog box appears. 3. Change the settings as needed.

Notes


• You must have at least one text annotation in the Main view before you can edit an annotation.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Place Text Annotations, page 347

Delete Text Annotations 1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete. 2. Do one of the following:

• Click One to delete one annotation. Locate and accept the annotation you want to delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation.

• Click All to delete all annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation.

Notes


• You must have at least one text annotation in the Main view before you can delete an annotation.

Related Topics • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Place Text Annotations, page 347



Display Text Annotations Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On or Off.

Note


Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Place Text Annotations, page 347

Setting Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE): An Overview

The Set Window Size add-in allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this add-in to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation. This add-in ensures the aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the animation view, providing a What You See Is What You Get(WYSIWYG) animation sequence.

Note


Related Topics • Set Window Size, page 351

Set Window Size Dialog Box Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this dialog box to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation.

Name - Allows you to select the type of window.

Set - Sizes the new window to the new size.

Old width - Displays the width of the window in pixels.

Old height - Displays the width of the window in pixels.

New width - Type a new width in pixels.

New height - Type a new height in pixels.



Width - Displays the width of application window in pixels.

Height - Displays the height of application window in pixels.

SmartPlant Review - Displays the current version of the software.

Related Topics • Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu), page 463 • Set Window Size, page 351 • Setting Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE): An Overview, page 350

Set Window Size 1. Click Accessories > Set Window Size. 2. Under View, select the view window you want to modify (either Main View, Plan

View, or Elevation View). 3. Type new width and height coordinates for the window, and click Set. The

window displays in its new size.

Tip

• Under Application window, you can view the width and height of the entire application window.

Note

• If the Set Window Size command does not appear on the Accessories menu, edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file delivered with the software.

Related Topics • Setting Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE): An Overview, page 350

Creating Display Set Movement (MOVEDSET.EXE): An Overview

The Move Display Set add-in allows you to create "scripts" of movements and rotations that can then be "played" on any selected display set. This "script" is not associated with any display set. This program is useful when you need to see how an object fits in a space in the design. For example, you can use this program to help plan equipment removal. This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.

Using the Move Display Set add-in, you create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set. This sequence of movements is similar to a script, which can be saved, opened, and revised. You can start, stop, forward-step, and reverse-step through this script of movements. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view.



The interactive display set motion and edit display set position functionality in the software allow you to directly position display sets. The final display set position is saved to the database, but the sequence of motions is not saved.

File name - Displays the file in which to save the display set script.

File - Allows you to select a file.

Display set - Provides information about the selected display set.

Name - Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree.

Restore - Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position.

Move display set - Sets properties for the display set movement.

Mode - Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement.

Screen - Displays the movements on your computer screen.

Movie snapshot - Takes a picture of the movements.

Update time - Specifies the number of seconds between each step.

Loop - Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.

Pong - Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.

Start - Begins the display set movement script.

Stop - Halts the display set movement script.

Continue - Resumes the display set movement script.

Forward - Steps forward through the display set movement script.

Reverse - Steps backward through the display set movement script.

Motion and move list - Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.

Insert- Creates a new step in the script. You can specify the step as moving or rotating.

Edit - Allows you to change a step.

Delete - Moves the selected step.

Number of steps - Displays the number of steps in the script. M indicates moving and R indicates rotation.

Delta distance/degree - Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation.



SmartPlant Review version - Displays the current version of the software.

Note


Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu, page 344 • Move and Rotate Display Sets, page 354 • Starting Programs Automatically, page 346

Move Display Set Dialog Box Allows you to create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set. This sequence of movements is similar to a script, which can be saved, opened, and revised. You can start, stop, forward-step, and reverse-step through this script of movements. You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view.

File name - Displays the file in which to save the display set script.

File - Allows you to select a file.

Display set - Provides information about the selected display set.

Name - Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree.

Restore - Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position.

Move display set - Sets properties for the display set movement.

Mode - Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement.

Screen - Displays the movements on your computer screen.

Movie snapshot - Takes a picture of the movements.

Update time - Specifies the number of seconds between each step.

Loop - Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.

Pong - Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.

Start - Begins the display set movement script.

Stop - Halts the display set movement script.

Continue - Resumes the display set movement script.

Forward - Steps forward through the display set movement script.



Reverse - Steps backward through the display set movement script.

Motion and move list - Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.

Insert- Creates a new step in the script. You can specify the step as moving or rotating.

Edit - Allows you to change a step.

Delete - Moves the selected step.

Number of steps - Displays the number of steps in the script. M indicates moving and R indicates rotation.

Delta distance/degree - Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation.

SmartPlant Review version - Displays the current version of the software.

Note



page 351 • Move and Rotate Display Sets, page 354

Move and Rotate Display Sets 1. Click Accessories > Move Display Set. 2. Under Display set, select the display set that you want to move. 3. Under Mode, select either Screen or Movie snapshot.

Tips

• To display the movements on your computer screen, select Screen.

• To take a picture of the movements, select Movie snapshot. 4. Under Motion and move list, click Insert. 5. On the Edit Step dialog box, select either Move or Rotate.

Tips

• If you select Move, type distance values for the North, East, and Elevation directions.

• If you select Rotate, type degree values for the Front, Side, and Plan directions.



6. Type the number of steps for this movement. For example, you can break the process of moving a display set into 10 distinct steps to make the process easier to analyze.

7. Continue to define your script of display set movement by clicking Insert or Edit. 8. When you are ready to begin the script, click Start. 9. Click File to specify a file in which to save the display script.

Notes

• To define the number of seconds between each step, type a value in the Update time box.

• To keep repeating the display set movement, click Loop. To step forward through the movement and then backward, click Pong.

• You can control the display set movement by clicking Continue, Forward, Reverse, and Stop.



page 351

Command Reference: An Overview


Command Reference: An Overview The Command Reference section of SmartPlant Review Help contains definitions for the various commands found under each menu.

Commands are used to control SmartPlant Review tasks. Most SmartPlant Review commands are in the form of buttons on toolbars. For example, you can access the Single Pane Layout command by clicking on the Common toolbar.

Many commands can be accessed by using either menu options or command buttons. For instance, you can copy a selected object by clicking Copy on the Edit menu or you can simply click on the Standard toolbar.

Related Topics • Using the Joystick: An Overview, page 132 • Using the Keyboard: An Overview, page 128 • Using the Mouse: An Overview, page 122

File Menu

Open Command (File Menu) File > Open

Allows you to select the model that you want to view using SmartPlant Review. After you open a model, you must exit and restart SmartPlant Review before you can view another model. You can open a model from a command line prompt.

The model must exist in a format that SmartPlant Review can interpret. This format usually has a .dri extension and consists of ASCII text. However, you can select .pvi files, .vue files, or any design file (such as, .dgn, .dwg, .sat, .dxf, or .prp files).

The .dri, .pvi and .vue files display automatically in the Files of Type field.

Note

• AutoCAD and SAT files do not include intelligent data. Therefore, label files are not available for use with these types of files. These files generally have .dwg, .dxf, and .sat extensions. SmartPlant Review supports AutoCAD files through version 14 and AutoCAD 2000.

Related Topics • Exit Command (File Menu), page 362 • Save As Command (File Menu), page 357 • Save Command (File Menu), page 357



Save Command (File Menu) File > Save

Allows you to record information that you have updated in the model. The software posts the changed material to the database. The Save command reads all the project information in the current session and writes it to the .mdb file.

Note

• The software does not save text annotations when you exit SmartPlant Review. If you need a record of the text annotations, you can take a snapshot of that area of the model.

Related Topics • Save As a .VUE File, page 39 • Save As Command (File Menu), page 357 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78

Save As Command (File Menu) File > Save As

Saves the project in .VUE format. A .VUE file is a container file that allows you to quickly read and change data. This format dramatically decreases the required time to read in large models, and all of the data associated with the model.

Important

• To use this functionality, you must install the Application Programming Interface (API) module.

Using this command functionality is similar to the standard Save As command in the Windows environment. However, the only use for this command in SmartPlant Review is saving a file in .VUE format.

Notes

• Assigning the same name to both the .DRI file and .VUE file is recommended to avoid confusion. The .DRI file is a text file that Plant Design Integrator creates and uses to reference all related, design label data The .DRI file is the primary method for opening SmartPlant Review.

• If you modify your .DRI file by adding or removing files, you need to start over with this workflow by reading in the .DRI file again. This action confirms that the software properly reads in all new data related to the .DRI file information.




Related Topics • Save As a .VUE File, page 39

Import Display Sets Command (File Menu) File > Import > Display Sets

Imports tags to a database that you have defined or to a different project file. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets.

The workflow for importing display sets requires you to designate a name for the file, or you can browse to locate the file. You also must select the identification or name of each display set that you want to import.

You can import one or all attributes. The display sets correspond to the delivered fields.

Notes

• The Import command handles ScheduleReview projects and tags, as well as display sets.


• You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for importing.

Related Topics • Import Display Sets Dialog Box, page 189 • Import Display Sets, page 179



Import ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu)

File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects

Allows you to import an existing .sri file to a user-defined database or to a different project file and manipulate the data. You can export the ScheduleReview information to a .mdb file to save the modified data.

Important


Related Topics • Import ScheduleReview Project, page 322 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311

Import Tags Command (File Menu) File > Import > Tags

Allows you to import tags to an ASCII .tag file. This ASCII file is used in other PBS products to allow users to review tags placed within SmartPlant Review. After reviewing the tags, users can make comments that are written back to the same ASCII file. The user can then import the modified ASCII file to SmartPlant Review and show the comments placed by other products.

Related Topics • Import Tags, page 225

Export Display Sets Command (File Menu) File > Export > Display Sets

Exports display sets to a database that you have defined or to a different project file. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for display sets.

The workflow for exporting display sets requires you to identify the database to use. If you choose to browse, the Select Display Set Definition File dialog box allows you to select the .mdb (master database) file that you want to use. You also must select the identification or name of each display set that you want to export.

You can export one or all attributes. The display sets correspond to the delivered fields.



Notes

• The Export command handles ScheduleReview projects and tags, as well as display sets.


• You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for exporting.

Related Topics • Export Display Sets Dialog Box, page 190 • Export Display Sets, page 180

Export ScheduleReview Projects Command (File Menu)

File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects

Displays the Export ScheduleReview Projects dialog box, which lists all the ScheduleReview projects in the current project. From this list, you can select the ScheduleReview projects to be exported to a .mdb file.

Important



Export Tags Command (File Menu) File > Export > Tags

Writes the current tag information in the database to the project .tag file.

Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218



Page Setup Command (File Menu) File > Page Setup

Allows you to change media sizes, orientation from portrait to landscape, and document properties. You can control dimensions for the printable area and image size. If you want to transmit material to a different printer, an associated dialog box allows you to select another printer.

Notes

• The Page Setup dialog box appears with the active printer, as selected in the Printer box after you click Control Panel > Printers. The orientation option is unavailable for most printers.

Related Topics • Change Page Setup Options, page 337 • Page Setup Dialog Box, page 340

Print Preview Command (File Menu) File > Print Preview

Allows you to see a representation of the material before you transmit the print request.

After you review the preview, you can proceed to print from the Print Preview dialog box by clicking the Print button, or you can return to the standard view of the data by clicking the Close button.

Related Topics • Print Preview Dialog Box, page 341

Print Command (File Menu) File > Print

Allows you to print the active drawing if the printer is configured for your computer.

Related Topics • Print the Main View at a High Resolution, page 339 • Quick Print the Full View, page 338 • Quick Print the Main View, page 338



Recently Used Files Command (File Menu) File > Recently Used Files

Provides a list of files that you most recently opened during editing sessions. The files appear at the bottom of the File menu just above the Exit command.

The list is a handy reference to return to files that you have been reviewing or editing. You can open any of the listed files by clicking the file name.

Note

• The complete path, including drive letter, appears for each listed file name.

Related Topics • Open Command (File Menu), page 356

Exit Command (File Menu) File > Exit

Exits SmartPlant Review.

When you exit SmartPlant Review, the project's .mdb file is updated. This file, which has the same name as your project, contains all the parameters that you have set up for the model, such as the eye point, clipping planes, lighting, and perspective.

Warning

• If you stop loading a model when it was initially being read into SmartPlant Review, you may invalidate display set definitions or manipulations because all the elements in the display sets were not loaded.

Related Topics • Save As a .VUE File, page 39 • Save As Command (File Menu), page 357 • Save Command (File Menu), page 357



Edit Menu

Undo Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Undo

Reverses up to the last 10 view manipulations that you completed.

Note

• You can also access the Undo command by pressing Ctrl + Z on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Standard Control Keys, page 129

Redo Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Redo

Re-applies the previously undone view manipulation.

Note

• You can also access the Redo command by pressing Ctrl + Y on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Standard Control Keys, page 129

Cut Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Cut

Removes the selected text from the Text view or text fields on dialog boxes and places it on the Clipboard.

Note

• You can also access the Cut functionality dialog boxes by selecting the text, right-clicking in a text field, and then clicking Cut from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + X.

Related Topics • Copy a View, page 83 • Delete View, page 82



Copy Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Copy

Copies the contents of the active view to the Clipboard. When copying the contents of a graphical view (Main, Plan, or Elevation), the focus rectangle is not copied.

Note

• You can also access the Copy command by selecting the text, right-clicking in a text field, and then clicking Copy from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + C.

Related Topics • Copy a View, page 83

Paste Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Paste

Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point, and replaces any selection. You can use this command to place text saved to the Clipboard into text fields on dialog boxes. You cannot paste text into the Text view.

Note

• You can also access the Paste command by selecting the text, right-clicking in a text field, and then clicking Paste from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + V.

Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Edit Definition Dialog Box, page 181 • Standard Control Keys, page 129 • Standard Toolbar, page 392



Find Object Command (Edit Menu) Edit > Find Object

Searches for objects that match criteria that you specify. The search options can include a combination of data criteria, graphic criteria, graphic volume (area), and individual elements.

The language for the definition list criteria consists of operations, types, and data; one criteria per line. The operation on the first line is performed on all of the elements in the model. The result is a group of elements that match the first criteria. The operation on the second line (if there is one) is performed on this new group of elements, narrowing the group down farther. Each of the remaining lines in the definition performs another operation on the remaining elements, resulting in another new group. After the last line, the final group consists of the objects that match all the search criteria.

Related Topics • Find an Object, page 180 • Find Object Command (Edit Menu), page 365



View Menu

All to Model Command (View Menu) View > Fit > All to Model

Displays the entire model in all views.

Related Topics • Fit All Views to Model, page 74

View to Model Command (View Menu) View > Fit > View to Model

Fits the model in the active view. The View Cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly.

Note

• You can also access this command by clicking the Fit View to Model button on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics • Fit View to Model, page 75

View to Object Command (View Menu) View > Fit > View to Object

Zooms in on the selected object.

Related Topics • Fit View to Object, page 75



View to Volume Command (View Menu) View > Fit > View to Volume

Zooms in on the selected volume. The Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume selected. The View Cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly.

Note

• You can also access this command by clicking Fit View to Volume on the Common toolbar.

Related Topics • Fit View to Volume, page 76

View to Display Set Command (View Menu) View > Fit > View to Display Set

Prompts you to select one or multiple display sets that you need to fit to the active view. Then, matches the view to the selected display set.

Notes

• SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets. However, the capacity of your computer equipment can limit the number of display sets that are available.

• A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one or more display sets.

• Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or display sets to any level of nesting that you need.

Related Topics • Fit View to Display Set, page 75

View by Eye Point Command (View Menu) View > Place > View by Eye Point

Places the current active view at the selected point in the model, moving the eye point and adjusting the center point in the corresponding manner.

Tips

• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the direction in which you are looking.



• You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Related Topics • Set Eye Point, page 114

View by Center Point Command (View Menu) View > Place > View by Center Point

Centers the model on a defined point in the specified view.

Notes

• You can also click the Center View command on the Common toolbar.

• You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.

Related Topics • Set Center Point, page 115

Eye Point Only Command (View Menu) View > Place > Eye Point Only

Places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. You can place the eye point by locating a 3D point using one or more of the graphic views.

Note

• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly.

Related Topics • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 153



Center Point Only Command (View Menu) View > Place > Center Point Only

Allows you to view the model from the center of the current view.

Note

• If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to function properly.

Related Topics • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Center Point, page 115 • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Zoom In 1.5 Command (View Menu) View > Zoom In > 1.5

Zooms into the model by a factor of 1.5 times the distance from the current eye and center points.

Notes

• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time you zoom in, you increase the detail by a factor of 1.5.





Notes

• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time you zoom in, you double the detail.




• You can also click the Zoom In by 2 button on the Common toolbar.




Notes

• Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the Eye Point and Center Point positions will be affected. Each time you zoom in, you increase the detail by a factor of 4.0.



Zoom Out 1.5 Command (View Menu) View > Zoom Out > 1.5

Zooms out of the model by a factor of 1.5 times the distance from the current eye and center points.

Notes

• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all the Window Zoom Out commands, except that each time you zoom out, you increase the viewing area by a factor of 1.5.







Notes

• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all the Window Zoom Out commands, except that each time you zoom out, you double the viewing area.


• You can also click the Zoom Out by 2 button on the Common toolbar.




Notes

• Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything within the window to appear smaller, providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates in the same way as all the Window Zoom Out commands, except that each time you zoom out, you increase the viewing area by a factor of 4.0.





Settings Command (View Menu) View > Settings

Displays the View Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the view display options.

Related Topics • Maintain Display Options, page 59 • Set Background Color, page 54 • Set Lighting Intensity, page 55 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58 • Set Sun Bearing Angles, page 56 • Set View Options, page 57

Display Commands: An Overview The Display commands available on the View > Display menu provide access to various display settings.

Wireframe Switches display of the model to wireframe.

Wireframe, Hidden Line

Switches display of the model to hidden line wireframe.

Flat Shading Switches to the use of flat shading when rendering the model.

Coarse Facets Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Coarse Facets mode.

No Specular Switches to the use of non-specular shading when rendering the model.

Full Shading Displays the model with full shading, the highest rendering mode available.

Object Textures

Displays a textured shading view of application session. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Backfaces Draws the back sides of certain elements (for example, pipes, elbows, flanges, and valves). Turn backfaces off for faster display of your model.

End Caps Switches the display of pipes, valves, and flanges on or off. Display is faster with caps off.



Annotations Switches the display of the text and data annotations on or off in the model.

Measurements Switches the display of measurements on or off in the Main view. Only those measurement collections for which the Tools > Measure > Edit Collections > Edit tab > Display option is checked will be displayed.

Axis Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes in the current view.

Dashed View Cone

Displays the View Cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe updates. This option is especially good during animation on slow graphic cards.

Perspective Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective mode.

Perspective Angle

Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box, which allows you to specify the perspective angle for rendering the view.

Wireframe Background Color

Displays the Color dialog box to change the Red, Green, and Blue values of the wireframe background color.

Stroking Tolerance

Specifies the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects.

Lighting Direction - Specifies the direction of the light in the model.

Ambient - Specifies the amount of ambient light in the model.Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the light in the model.

Range Rejection

Activate - Turns on range rejection so that very small graphical elements do not display as defined by the range rejection settings.

All - Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, prompting you to specify display rejection criteria for each view.Main - Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes, allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the Main view.Plan - Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes, allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the Plan view.Elevation - Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog boxes, allowing you to specify display rejection criteria for the Elevation view.Show Settings - Displays the range rejection on or off status and pixel ranges for each view.



Wireframe Command (View Menu) View > Display > Wireframe

Switches the display of the model to wireframe.

Note

• The default form is wireframe.

Related Topics • Switch from Hidden Line to Wireframe, page 72

Wireframe, Hidden Line Command (View Menu) View > Display > Wireframe, Hidden Line

Switches the display of the model to hidden line wireframe.

Wireframe, Hidden Line mode remains active, even when you recall a saved view. For example, you have a view in Wireframe, Hidden Line mode. When you recall the saved view manually or by playing a key frame animation, the view remains in hidden line mode. You can recall all other settings in the normal manner.

Important

• To use this functionality, you must install the On-Site Drawing Generation module.

Related Topics • Switch from Wireframe to Hidden Line, page 71

Flat Shading Command (View Menu) View > Display > Flat Shading

Switches the display of the model to flat shading.

Flat Shading displays a single color for all pixels on the surface instead of a range of slightly different colors. The Flat Shading mode is the quickest to update.

Notes

• You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.

• You can control the amount of time it takes for an image to appear shaded by defining a shading quality on the Display tab of the Edit Motion Settings dialog box. The Quality field defaults to Full Shading, however, you can also choose No Specular, Coarse Facets, or Flat Shading.



Related Topics • Switch from Hidden Line to Shaded, page 73

Coarse Facets Command (View Menu) View > Display > Coarse Facets

Turns off the smooth shading. Surfaces are still shaded, but the display of circular objects are very faceted. For example, pipes look like they are composed of flat sides.

Related Topics • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 146 • Display Tab, page 61 • Maintain Render Settings, page 73

No Specular Command (View Menu) View > Display > No Specular

Provides smooth shading. This command is faster than Full Shading because the sun does not reflect bright spots on the element surface.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 146 • Display Tab, page 61 • Maintain Render Settings, page 73

Full Shading Command (View Menu) View > Display > Full Shading

Provides the highest rendering mode available. This command produces a more curved appearance because various shades of the selected color are produced across the surface of the elements. Therefore, the Full Shading mode is the slowest to update.

Note

• You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 146 • Display Tab, page 61 • Maintain Render Settings, page 73



• Toggle Between Shaded and Wireframe, page 71 • Views Toolbar, page 397

Object Textures Command (View Menu) View > Display > Object Textures

Displays a textured shading view of the application session.

Important

• Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.


Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box), page 146 • Display Tab, page 61 • Maintain Render Settings, page 73 • Set Textures, page 55

Backfaces Command (View Menu) View > Display > Backfaces

Draws the backsides of certain elements, such as pipes, elbows, flanges, and valves.

Important

• Turn Backface off for faster display of your model.

Note


Related Topics • Display Tab, page 61



End Caps Command (View Menu) View > Display > End Caps

Switches the display of pipes, valves, and flanges on or off.

Important

• Turn End Caps off for faster display of your model.


Annotations Command (View Menu) View > Display > Annotations

Switches the display of text and data annotations on or off in the model.

Related Topics • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Display Text Annotations, page 350

Measurements Command (View Menu) View > Display > Measurements

Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view.

Note

• Only those measurement collections for which the Tools > Measure > Edit Collections > Edit Tab > Display option is checked will be displayed.

Related Topics • Display Commands: An Overview, page 372 • Display Tab, page 61

Axis Command (View Menu) View > Display > Axis

Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes on or off. When Axis is on, a small coordinate displays in the top right corner of the view. The coordinate triad shows which direction is x (East), y (North), and z (Elevation). The y arrow always points in the direction of plant north in the model relative to the current view.




Dashed View Cone (View Menu) View > Display > Dashed View Cone

Displays the View Cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe updates. This option is especially useful during slow graphic card animation.

Related Topics • Set View Cone Perspective, page 117 • View Cone Tab, page 62

Perspective Command (View Menu) View > Display > Perspective

Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective mode.

Related Topics • Perspective Toolbar, page 404

Perspective Angle Command (View Menu) View > Display > Perspective Angle

Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box, which allows you to specify the perspective angle for rendering the view.

Related Topics • Set Perspective Angle Dialog Box, page 117

Wireframe Background Color Command (View Menu) View > Display > Wireframe Background Color

Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the values of the wireframe background color.

Related Topics • Set Background Color, page 54



Stroking Tolerance Command (View Menu) View > Display > Stroking Tolerance

Displays the Set Stroking Tolerance dialog box, which specifies the number of facets to render on cylindrical objects.

Note

• Stroking Tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes, flanges, valves, and elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4 and 100.

Related Topics • Set Stroking Tolerance Dialog Box, page 70 • Set Stroking Tolerance, page 58

Direction Command (View Menu) View > Display > Lighting > Direction

Displays the Set Light Direction dialog box, which allows you to specify the direction of light in the model.

Related Topics • Set Light Direction Dialog Box, page 69

Ambient Command (View Menu) View > Display > Lighting > Ambient

Displays the Set Ambient Light Level dialog box, which specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0 to 100.

Related Topics • Lighting Tab, page 64 • Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box, page 68

Brightness Command (View Menu) View > Display > Lighting > Brightness

Displays the Set Brightness Level dialog box, which specifies the brightness of the light in the model.



Related Topics • Lighting Tab, page 64 • Set Brightness Level Dialog Box, page 68

Range Rejection Activate Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > Activate

Defines very small graphical elements that you do not want to display. Then, the Activate command turns on range rejection so that the elements do not display in the model.

Note

• Reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws improves display time.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set Range Reject, page 56 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

All Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > All

Displays the Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for each view.

Related Topics • Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box, page 69 • Set Range Reject, page 56

Main Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > Main

Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Main view.

Related Topics • Changing View Settings: An Overview, page 53 • Set Range Reject, page 56



Plan Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > Plan

Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Plan view.


Elevation Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > Elevation

Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog boxes, that allow you to specify display rejection criteria for the Elevation view.


Show Settings Command (View Menu) View > Display > Range Rejection > Show Settings

Displays the range rejection on or off status and pixel ranges for each view.




Advanced Commands: An Overview The Advanced commands available on the View menu provide access to various other display settings.

Redraw on Refresh

Redraws the selected view on refresh rather than using the buffer.

Buffered Updates

Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays entire view at once.

Stereo To use the Stereo functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Activate - Turns on stereo viewing.Distances - Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box, used to adjust the stereo distances to create realistic depth perception.Left View - Displays the left "eye" of the stereo view.Right View - Displays the right "eye" of the stereo view.

Far to Near Clip Ratio

Displays the Far to Near Clip Ratio dialog box, allowing you to adjusts the display quality produced by some video cards.

NetMeeting Enables a high-end graphics card to work with Microsoft NetMeeting software.

Elumens Activate - Toggles the Elumens display mode on or off. The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.

Settings - Displays the Elumens Settings dialog box, allowing you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.

Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Saving and Recalling Views: An Overview, page 78 • Viewing in Stereo: An Overview, page 104



Redraw on Refresh Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Redraw on Refresh

Sets the software to redraw everything in the selected view on refresh.

Notes

• For large models, turn this option off for better performance. When Redraw on Refresh is off the backing store is used to repair the display until you click Window > Refresh.



Related Topics • Set View Options, page 57

Buffer Updates Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Buffer Updates

Draws view updates to the buffer and then displays the entire view at once. When this option is on, you will see the model being "drawn" during updates.

Related Topics • Advanced Tab, page 66 • Set View Options, page 57 • View Settings Dialog Box, page 60

Stereo Activate Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Stereo > Activate

Turns on stereo viewing.

The following Stereo Viewing hardware is required for this option:




• StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes ® interlaced glasses (model CE-PC or CE-1).


• In addition, Electrohome has some projection systems that support stereo using StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses or polarized glasses.

Important


• To view in stereo, you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on.



Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings, page 106

Distances Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances

Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box, which allows you to adjust the stereo distances to create realistic depth perception.

Important


Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106 • Stereo Distances Dialog Box, page 105

Left View Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Stereo > Left View

Displays the left "eye" of the stereo view.

Important


Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106



Right View Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Stereo > Right View

Displays the right "eye" of the stereo view.

Important


Related Topics • Set Stereo Settings Interactively, page 106 • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468

Far to Near Clip Ratio Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Far to Near Clip Ratio

Displays the Set Far to Near Clip Ratio dialog box, which allows you to adjust the display quality produced by some video cards.

In most cases, reducing the far to near clip ratio value will improve the display quality.

Tip

• If some of your elements have a poor display quality, such as appearing cracked, lower the Far to near clip ratio value on the View Settings > Advanced tab. Reducing the values by a power of 2 works best. For example, reduce 1024 to 512, reduce 512 to 256, and so on until the display quality is acceptable.

Related Topics • Advanced Tab, page 66

NetMeeting Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > NetMeeting

Enables a high-end graphics card to work with MicroSoft NetMeeting software.

Important

• Select the NetMeeting checkbox only if your computer has a high-end graphics card and only when you use NetMeeting directly in Application Sharing mode instead of the embedded collaboration software.



Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Using NetMeeting with SmartPlant Review, page 305

Elumens Activate Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Elumens > Activate

Toggles the Elumens display mode on or off. The perspective angle changes when the Elumens mode is on.

Note


Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2?, page 18

Elumens Settings Command (View Menu) View > Advanced > Elumens > Settings

Displays the Elumens Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the Elumens display mode settings.

Note


Related Topics • Advanced Commands: An Overview, page 382 • Elumens Settings Dialog Box, page 109 • What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2?, page 18

Photo-Realism Settings Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > Settings

The Settings command displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, which allows you to set options for background and environment box images.



With Photo-Realism Settings, you can edit the raytracing options before actually editing your raytracing model. Options for improving system performance during raytracing operations are also provided.

Important


Related Topics • Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 263 • Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 255 • Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box, page 255 • Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box), page 256

Global Lighting Settings Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings

This command displays the Global Lighting dialog box, which allows you to edit options for controlling lighting in your model.

Global Lighting Settings provides options for controlling the light that envelopes objects, the light from a camera flash bulb, and the light from the sun. Options for controlling the computation of fog are also provided.

Important


Related Topics • Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 266 • Cities Dialog Box, page 271 • Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 267 • Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 272 • Global Lighting Dialog Box, page 266 • Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box), page 268 • Solar Vector Dialog Box, page 271 • Time Zones Dialog Box, page 269 • World Map Dialog Box, page 270

New Point Light Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > New Point Light

This command allows you to place a new point light. After specifying a position and size for the new point light, the New Point Light dialog box displays, allowing you to adjust the light options.



Important


Note


Related Topics • New Source Light Dialog Box, page 276 • Place a Source Light, page 273

New Distant Light Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > New Distant Light

This command allows you to place a new distant light. After specifying a position and size for the new distant light, the New Distant Light dialog box displays, allowing you to adjust the light options.

Important


Note


Related Topics • Place a Source Light, page 273

New Spot Light Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > New Spot Light

This command allows you to place a new spot light. After specifying a position and size for the new spot light, the New Spot Light dialog box displays, allowing you to adjust the light options.

Important




Note


Related Topics • Place a Source Light, page 273

Edit Source Light Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light

The Edit Source Light command allows you to select a light in the 3D model and adjust its properties.

Important


• Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited.

Related Topics • Edit a Source Light, page 274 • Edit Source Lights Dialog Box, page 282

Delete Source Light Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light

The Delete Source Light command allows you to select a light from the 3D model and delete it.

Notes


• Deleted lights are permanently removed from the database.

• Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.

Related Topics • Delete Source Light, page 275 • Delete Source Lights Dialog Box, page 283

Raytrace Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace



The Raytrace command will raytrace the Main view. The output of the raytrace will be displayed in the Main View.

Important

• SmartPlant Review must be the topmost window when the raytraced image is complete; otherwise, the raytraced image will be lost when you switch back to the application. If the Main view is not fully visible when the raytrace completes, you are prompted with an option to reload the raytraced image

Tip


Notes



• If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified, you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again.

Related Topics • Raytrace a View, page 284

Raytrace Range Command (View Menu) View > Photo-Realism - Raytrace Range

The Raytrace Range command allows you to confine a raytrace to within a set area of the Main view.

Notes



• If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings, you must click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the image again.

Related Topics • Define a Raytrace Range, page 284



Save and Recall Command (View Menu) View > Save and Recall

Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows, depending on the group. This command also allows you to define the animation path for a movie.

Note

• Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. Thus, you can save a Plan or Elevation view, then Zoom in/out or Pan left/right/up/down the model just within that view, and then recall the saved view. The model position will be restored as if the Zoom and Pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view does not ever change the Main view's eye or center point.

Related Topics • Add Current View, page 84 • Delete Group, page 80 • Delete View, page 82 • Edit Selected Views, page 82 • Move View, page 83 • Recall a View, page 86 • Recall Partial View, page 86 • Save and Recall Views Dialog Box, page ???

Snapshot Command (View Menu) View > Snapshot

Displays the Snapshot View dialog box, which is used to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen.

Caution

• When you use the Snapshot command for a view, do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead of the image. For the same reason, any screen saver operations are automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running. Capturing the image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full advantage of any hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture the image quickly.




Note

• To use this functionality, you must install one of the following modules: Construction API Collaboration Simulation and Visual Effects Photo-Realism On-site Drawing Generation

Related Topics • Snapshot View Dialog Box, page 203 • Taking Snapshots: An Overview, page 202

Full Screen Command (View Menu) View > Full Screen

Increases the current view layout on the screen. This command is very useful for stereo viewing, since window borders can impair the stereo visual cues.

Related Topics • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53

Toolbars: An Overview A toolbar is a row of buttons or icons displayed on the screen. When you click these buttons or icons, certain functions of the application are activated. Toolbars can be customized and usually can be moved around on the screen according to your preference.

Standard Toolbar The SmartPlant Review Standard Toolbar is used to Open, Save, Print, Cut, Copy, or Paste a file and to display SmartPlant Review Help.

Related Topics • Copy Command (Edit Menu), page 364 • Cut Command (Edit Menu), page 363 • Open Command (File Menu), page 356 • Paste Command (Edit Menu), page 364 • Printing: An Overview, page 337 • Save Command (File Menu), page 357



• Toolbars: An Overview, page 392

Common Toolbar Use the Common toolbar commands to display pane layouts and to set motion parameters.

Single Pane Layout displays the Main View. See Single Pane Layout for details.

Three Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, and Elevation View. See Three Pane Layout for details.

Four Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, Elevation View, and Text View. See Four Pane Layout for details.

Motion Settings displays the Edit Motion Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit motion settings. See Motion Settings for details.

Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text Window. See Auto Highlight for details.

Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. See Forward/Back, Left/Right for details.

Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing the viewpoint depth. See Pan for details.

Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps. See Rotate Display Set for details.

Lateral moves through the model laterally. See Lateral for details.

Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point encircles the model on this track. See Horizontal Encircle for details.

View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction in which you are looking. See View Dependent for details.

Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. See View Dependent Levelfor details.

Fit View to Model fits the model in the active view. See Fit View to Model for details.



Fit View to Volume zooms on the selected volume. See Fit View to Volume for details.

Center View centers the model on a defined point in a specified view. See Center View for details.

Zoom In (by2.0) zooms into the model by a factor of 2.0 times the distance from the current eye and center points. See Zoom In (by 2.0) for details.

Zoom Out (by 2.0) zooms out of the model by a factor of 2.0 times the distance from the current eye and center points. See Zoom Out (by 2.0) for details.

View Settings displays the View Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the view display options. See View Settings for details.

Save and Recall Views displays the Save and Recall Views dialog box, which allows you to save any display in the view window which you may want to recall later. It also allows you to recall existing views. See Save and Recall Views for details.

Snapshot View displays the Snapshot View dialog box to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen. To use this functionality, you must install one of the following modules: Construction; API; Collaboration; Simulation and Visual Effects; or Photo-Realism. See Snapshot View for details.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Reset a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392



Tools MiniBar The Tools MiniBar provides access to some of the the most commands in SmartPlant Review.

Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line. See Place Tag With Leader for details.

Edit Tag edits the text for the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window). See Edit Tag for details.

Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. See Delete Tag for details.

Go To Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. See Previous Tag for details.

Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. See Next Tag for details.

Find Object objects that match criteria you specify. See Find Object for details.

Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) you want to display for one or more design files. See Level Settings for details.

Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points. See Snaplock Measurement for details.




ScheduleReview Toolbar ScheduleReview commands allow you to play, pause, stop and move around in a ScheduleReview file.

Important


Schedule Review Settings command displays the Schedule Review Settings dialog box.

Go To Start moves the display back to the start date. See ScheduleReview Go To Start for more information.

Back moves the display back. See ScheduleReview Back for more information.

Forward moves the display forward. See ScheduleReview Forward for more information.

Go To End moves the display to the end date. See ScheduleReview Go To End for more information.

Play starts the review process using the parameters you defines in the Review dialog box. The review process starts on the Start Date you defined and stops on the End Date. See ScheduleReview Play for more information.

Pause pauses the current review process. See ScheduleReview Pause for more information.

Stop stops the current review process. See ScheduleReview Stop for more information.

Record - records a new review. See ScheduleReview Record for more information.

Go To Date moves the display to the date you set. See ScheduleReview Go To Date for more information.

Percent Complete displays the percentage of the review that is complete. See ScheduleReview Percent Complete for more information.




Views Toolbar Use the Views toolbar commands to resize and update the image displays that appear within the various 3D model views.

Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe displays the model in shaded form or in wireframe form in the Main view. See Toggle Display Between Shaded and Wireframe for details.

Fit View to Model displays the entire model. See Fit View to Model for details.

Fit View to Volume adjusts the view by volume. See Fit View to Volume for details.

Center View repositions the model in a view. See Center View for details.

Zoom In By 2 decreases the viewing area by a factor of 2, which causes everything within the view to appear larger. See Window Zoom In for details.

Zoom Out By 2 increases the viewing area by a factor of 2, which causes everything within the view to appear smaller. See Window Zoom Out for details.

Zoom In By 1.5 decreases the viewing area by a factor of 1.5, which increases the detail of the model. See Window Zoom In 1.5 for details.

Zoom Out By 1.5 increases the viewing area by a factor of 1.5, which causes everything in the window to appear smaller. See Window Zoom Out 1.5 for details.

Full Screen increases the current view layout on the screen. See Full Screen Display Mode for details.

View Settings modifies settings in the Main view. See View Settings for details.

Save and Recall Views defines the animation path for a movie or saves the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. See Save and Recall Views for details.

Snapshot View creates an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen. See Snapshot View for details.




Tools Toolbar The Tools toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review most commonly used commands.

Find Object objects that match criteria you specify. See Find Object for details.

Edit Display Set allows you to edit the description, name, ID, and material for the display set definition. See Edit Display Sets for details.

Assign Materials To Elements assigns material properties to model elements and sets various rendering parameters. See Assign Materials To Elements for details. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.

Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) you want to display for one or more design files. See Level Settings for details.

Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points. See Snaplock Measurement for details.

Surface Measurement measures from any surface point. See Surface Measurement for details.

Move Measurement relocates a measurement label. See Move Measurement for details.

Restore Position returns to its original position the last measurement label that you moved. See Restore Position for details.

Edit Collections allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection. See Edit Collections for details.

New Collection automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the active collection. See New Collection for details.

Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement in the current active collection. See Delete Last Measurement for details.

Delete Active Collection Measurements removes all of the measurements in the active collection, but does not delete the collection itself. See Delete Active Collection Measurements for details.

Delete All Measurements removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections, but does not delete the collections themselves. See Delete All Measurements for details.



Delete All Collections removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all of collections. See Delete All Collections for details.

Display Order defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates. See Display Order for details.


Motion Toolbar Use the Motion toolbar commands to control the movement of the View Cone eye point and move laterally and in a circular motion through the 3D model and view various points of interest.

Move Eye Point allows motion commands to effect the graphic views.

Move Display Set allows motion command to effect display sets.

Motion Settings defines the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard motion, the clipping planes, and allows you to set up the joystick. See Edit Motion Settings for details. To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.

Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text Window. See Auto Highlight for details.

Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. See Forward/Back, Left/Right for details.

Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing the viewpoint depth. See Pan for details.

Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps. See Rotate Display Set for details.

View Cube displays the model in 3D. See View Cube for details.

Lateral moves through the model laterally. See Lateral for details.

Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point encircles the model on this track. See Horizontal Encircle for details.



Vertical Encircle places a vertical track around the sphere. The eye point encircles the model on this track. See Vertical Encircle for details.

Surface Encircle places a track on the surface of the sphere, like a sectional cut. See Surface Encircle for details.

View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction in which you are looking. See View Dependent for details.

Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. See View Dependent Level for details.

View Independent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement without relation to the direction or angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. See View Independent for details.

Plant North Motion moves the object (or display set) in relation to the plant north. See Plant North for details.

Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. See Motion Types for details.

Step moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. See Motion Types for details.

Toggle Step Direction switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise. See Motion Types for details.

Display Key Frames displays the Display Key Frames dialog box to set movie definition items. See Display Key Frame Motion for details.

Play Key Frames plays the current key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame.

Pause Key Frames pauses the current playing key frame animation and/or resumes the current paused key frame motion animation.

Stop Key Frames stops the current playing or paused key frame motion animation.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392



Tags Toolbar Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line. See

Place Tag With Leader for details .

Place Tag Without Leader places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. See Place Tag Without Leader for details.

Edit Tag edits the text for the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window). See Edit Tag for details.

Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. See Delete Tag for details.

Find Tags displays the tag that contains a text search string (or expression). See Find Tags for details.

Go To Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. See Previous Tag for details.

Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. See Next Tag for details.

Go To Tag displays a tag number that you specify. See Go To Tag for details.

Related Topics • Communicating with Tags: An Overview, page 218 • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Reset a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392



Window Toolbar Arrange All arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review. See Arrange All

for details.

Refresh Active View redraws the selected view to update its contents. See Refresh for details.

Single Pane Layout displays the Main View. See Single Pane Layout for details.

Three Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, and Elevation View. See Three Pane Layout for details.

Four Pane Layout displays the Main View, Plan View, ElevationView, and Text View. See Four Pane Layout for details.

Restore Pane Layout allows you to return the view layouts to their original default configurations. See Restore Pane Layout for details.




Photo-Realism Toolbar Photo-Realism commands allow you to place and delete source lights, and define and edit Photo-Realism settings, light settings, and raytrace options.

Important


Photo-Realism Settings displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, in which you can edit the raytracing options before actually raytracing the 3D model. See Photo-Realism Settings for more information.

Global Lighting displays the Global Lighting dialog box, in which you can edit options for controlling the lighting in the 3D model. See Global Settings for more information.

Point Light allows you to place a new point light in the 3D model. After specifying a position and size for the new point light, the New Point Light dialog box displays allowing you to adjust the light options. See Source Light Settings for more information.

Distant Light allows you to place a new distant light in the 3D model After specifying a position and size for the new distant light, the New Distant Light dialog box displays allowing you to adjust the light options. See Source Light Settings for more information.

Spot Light allows you to place a new spot light in the 3D model.After specifying a position and size for the new spot light, the New Spot Light dialog box displays allowing you to adjust the light options. See Source Light Settings for more information.

Edit Light allows you to select a light in the 3D model and adjust its properties. See Edit a Source Light for more information.

Delete Light allows you to select a light in the 3D model and delete it. See Delete a Source Light for more information.

Raytrace executes a raytrace on the Main view and displays the output in the Main view. See Raytrace a View for more information.

Raytrace Range allows you to raytrace a portion of the Main View. See Define a Raytrace Range for more information.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Reset a Toolbar, page 408



Position Control Toolbar Command (View Menu) View > Toolbars > Position Control The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the View Cone eye point and center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement.



138 • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Using the View Cone: An Overview, page 112

Perspective Toolbar The Perspective toolbar allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the View Cone. Move the slider anywhere from two degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area).

Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command. Everything within the viewing area appears smaller, but the Eye Point or Center Point positions do not change.

Decreasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom In command. Everything within the viewing area appears larger, but the Eye Point or Center Point positions do not change.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Reset a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392



Encircle Radius Toolbar The Encircle Radius toolbar is a slider that is used to increase or decrease the radius of the green sphere used in the Horizontal Encircle, Vertical Encircle, and Surface Encircle Positioning Modes. A larger radius give the affect of standing farther away from the center point.

Related Topics • Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 445 • Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 447 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392 • Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu), page 446

Using Key-In Commands Although SmartPlant Review has been redesigned to make commands much easier to use by making them accessible from the regular menus and toolbars, SmartPlant Review continues to support the Key-In commands found in DesignReview.

Using Key-In Commands 1. Click View > Toolbars > Key-in to display the Key-in toolbar. 2. Select the Key-in command from the drop down box. 3. Press Enter.

Tip

• For more information about any SmartPlant Review command, click the Search tab in the SmartPlant Review Help and enter the name of the command.

Customizing Toolbars: An Overview Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review. You can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in the 3D model viewing area. You can also add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own.

• To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu. The list shows all of the available toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To show a toolbar that isn't checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click the name of the toolbar to clear the check mark.



• To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and then drag the toolbar to the new location.

• To add a command to a toolbar from another toolbar, press CTRL and drag the command onto the toolbar.

• To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then click the Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the group that contains the command you want to add, and then in the Commands list, click that command and drag it to the toolbar in your workspace.

• To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the 3D model viewing area (except on another toolbar).

• If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Photo-Realism toolbar, you can reset the toolbar to its original state.


Customize Dialog Box Allows you to show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in the 3D model viewing area. You can also add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Allows you to display toolbars, create a new toolbar, reset a toolbar, or change the toolbar button display.

Toolbars - Lists the available toolbars. To display a toolbar, select the check box next to the name. To hide a toolbar, clear the check box. Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review.

Toolbar name - Allows you to type a new name for the selected toolbar.

Show Tooltips - Displays on-screen descriptions of toolbar buttons when the pointer pauses on them. Tooltips help you find toolbar command names. When you point to a command button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command name.

Cool Look - Changes the toolbar button display from three-dimensional buttons to flat buttons.



Large Buttons - Increases the size of toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.

New - Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, allowing you to create a new, empty toolbar that you can add buttons or menus to.

Reset - Removes any changes that you made to the selected toolbar and restores the original settings. For example, if you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Photo-Realism toolbar, you can press Reset to change the toolbar back to its original state.


Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Allows you to view commands and command descriptions. You can also drag buttons to a toolbar or change menu options.

Categories - Displays categories of commands, organized by menu name or by type. You can click a category to change the list of commands in the Buttons box.

Note

• The Menu category provides options for changing menus.

Buttons - Displays a list of buttons from the category that you select in the Categories box. You can drag the button that you want from the Buttons box onto a toolbar.

Description - Displays text explaining what the selected command does.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392

New Toolbar Dialog Box Allows you to create a new, empty toolbar that you can add buttons or menus to.

Toolbar name - Allows you to type a name for the new toolbar.

Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box, page 406 • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box), page 406



Create a Toolbar 1. Click View > Toolbars > Customize. 2. Click New. 3. In the Toolbar name box, type a new name for the toolbar. 4. Click OK. 5. Click the Commands tab, and then in the Categories list, click the group that

contains the command you want to put on the new toolbar. 6. In the commands list, click the command that you want to put on the new toolbar,

and then drag the command onto the new toolbar displayed in your workspace. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you've added all the commands you want on the new

toolbar.

Tips

• You can also add a command to a toolbar by pressing CTRL and dragging the command from an existing toolbar.

• To rename a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and then click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom toolbar you want to rename. In the Toolbar name box, type a new name.

• To delete a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and then click the Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom toolbar you want to delete, and then click Delete.

Related Topics • Customizing Toolbars: An Overview, page 405 • Reset a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392

Reset a Toolbar 1. On the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click Customize. 2. Click the Toolbars tab. 3. In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar you want to reset. 4. Click Reset.

Related Topics • Create a Toolbar, page 408 • Toolbars: An Overview, page 392



Using the Status Bar: An Overview The status bar is the horizontal strip at the bottom of the window for the active software application on your computer. The status bar is an information tool because it provides text that describes the current state of the data that you are viewing in the window and any other contextual information.

One example of the use of the status bar in SmartPlant Review concerns collision detection. When collision detection runs, the status bar updates periodically to show the number of collisions and objects compared.

Brief command descriptions relate the basic function of a command. When you point to a command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the status bar. Also, messages explain the next action for you to take during a workflow in the command

Related Topics • Show or Hide the Status Bar, page 409 • Status Bar Command (View Menu), page 409

Status Bar Command (View Menu) View > Status Bar

Displays the Status Bar, which provides text that describes the current state of the data that you are viewing in the window and any other contextual information.

Related Topics • Using the Status Bar: An Overview, page 409

Show or Hide the Status Bar 1. Click View. 2. Click Status Bar to change the setting - from on to off, or off to on. When the

status bar is active, a checkmark appears to the left of the Status Bar command name on the View menu.

Related Topics • Status Bar Command (View Menu), page 409 • Using the Status Bar: An Overview, page 409



Project Manager Command (View Menu) View > Project Manager

Displays the Project Manager window, usually on the left side of the Main view. However, you can undock Project Manager and move it around in the window to a more convenient spot.

Project Manager allows you to easily look at an overview of the model and manage its parts in the following tasks:

• View all project files associated with the model.

• Add, manage and edit the display sets.

• Review construction sequences by using a ScheduleReview project.

Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model with Project Manager, page

169 • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164



Tools Menu

Show Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Show

Switches the visible or hidden display of the selected display set.

Note

• You can also right-click on the display set in Project Manager, then select a manipulate command.

Shade Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Shade

Switches between shaded or wireframe display of the selected display set.

Note

• You can also switch between shaded or wireframe by clicking View > Settings or View > Display.

Related Topics • Defining Display Sets: An Overview, page 174

Dim Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Dim

Decreases the brightness of the selected display set. You can switch from a dimmed level to normal brightness. This setting applies to all display sets (that is, you cannot isolate a portion of the display sets and apply a different setting). You can never have some display sets in low brightness (or dimmed) and others in high brightness.

Related Topics • Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 180



Material Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Material

Turns on or off the display of the material application assigned to the selected display set. If no material is assigned, the Assign Material dialog box appears for you to specify material for the display set.

Note

• If an element is a member of more than one display set with different display properties, the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.

Related Topics • Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 418

Move Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Move

Switches the display set position from the moved position to the unmoved position. Using the Move command in conjunction with the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, you can move an entire display set of objects rather than moving each object separately.

Note

• You can access the Edit Display Set Position dialog box by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position.


Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position, page 199 • Rotate Display Set, page 201



Show Only Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Show Only

Allows you to show all selected display sets and hide all other display sets.

Notes

• You can also select Show Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut menu. First, select the display set(s) in Project Manager, then right-click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.

• You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within the Project Manager. When a display set is "On", or visible, a check mark appears next to the yellow cube . When a display set is "Off", or transparent, a check mark does not appear.

Related Topics • Display Sets - Show Only, page 172

Hide Only Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only

Allows you to hide all selected display sets and show all other display sets.

Notes

• You can also select Hide Only from the SmartPlant Review shortcut menu. First, select the display set(s) in Project Manager, then right-click on the display set name to display the shortcut menu.

• You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within the Project Manager. When a display set is "On", or visible, a check mark appears next to the yellow cube . When a display set is "Off", or transparent, the check mark does not appear.

• Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there are some display sets already created.

Related Topics • Display Sets - Hide Only, page 173



Edit Definition Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition

Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box, which allows you to create a new or edit an existing display set definition.

Options are provided for editing the description, name, ID, and material for the display set definition.

Related Topics • Edit a Display Set Definition, page 177 • Edit Display Set Dialog Box, page 181

Display Sets Assign Material Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material

Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, which allows you to assign materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You must select the desired display set in the Project Manager display set control before running this command.

You can also select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere.

The following conditions must be met in order to assign materials to a 3D model:

• The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be created. They must be in a directory path that you can access from SmartPlant Review.

• When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is applied to every model element that is in that display set. If an element is a member of more than one display set with different display properties, the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.

• If a material assignment is not made to a display set, SmartPlant Review uses the default material value for that surface or any materials assigned to its elements.

Notes






Related Topics • Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box, page 187 • Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu), page 418 • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242

Edit Position Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position

Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, which allows you to change the position of the selected display set. However, moving display sets requires special considerations. Moved display sets that contain special elements such as pipes, valves, flanges, and elbows may sometimes not display properly unless the Backfaces flags and Endcaps flags are turned on.

The Edit Display Set Position dialog box works in conjunction with the Tools > Display Sets > Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of their default location. This functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances and provides the ability to temporarily move a group of objects around in the model.

Note


Related Topics • Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box, page 195 • Edit Display Set Position, page 199



Auto-Define Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define

Displays the Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box, which allows you to pick items by label to include in a new display set.

Related Topics • Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box, page 188 • Automatically Define Display Sets, page 179

Folder Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > New > Folder

Creates a New Display Set folder in the Project Manager.

Note

• You can also create a new folder by clicking View > Project Manager > Display Sets.

Related Topics • Manage Display Sets in the Project Manager, page 167

Display Set Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set

Allows you to create a new display set definition.

Important

• If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, the display set name is defaulted to "Copy of" and the selected display set name (i.e. "Copy of Reboiler System").

• If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in the Project Manager, BUT the current criteria definition in memory for the Find Object command is not empty, then the new display set's name is set to "Copy of Find Object".

Related Topics • Create a Display Set Definition, page 175 • Edit Display Set Dialog Box, page 181



Display Sets Delete Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Delete

Allows you to delete selected display sets.

Related Topics • Delete Display Sets, page 174

Rename Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Rename

Allows you to change the name of an existing display set.

Note

• You can also change the name of a display set by clicking View > Project Manager > Display Sets. Then, right click and choose Rename from the shortcut menu.

Related Topics • Display or Hide the Project Manager, page 164 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

By Name Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Arrange > By Name

Allows you to sort your display sets in alphabetical order by name.

Note

• You can also change the order of your display sets by clicking View > Project Manager > Display Sets. Then, right click and choose Arrange > by Name from the shortcut menu.




By ID Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Arrange > By ID

Allows you to sort your display sets by the ID number.

Note

• You can also change the order of your display sets by clicking View > Project Manager > Display Sets. Then, right click and choose Arrange > by ID from the shortcut menu.


Reverse Dim Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Sets > Reverse Dim

Allows you to reverse the brightness rendering state for all dimmed display sets. When checked, all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Highlight brightness state. When un-checked, all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Dim brightness state.

Important

• To use the Reverse Dim command, you must first select a display set from the list in Project Manager.

Related Topics • Display Sets - Reverse Dim, page 180

Assign Materials Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Assign Materials

Displays the Assign Material to Elements dialog box allowing you to assign materials in a palette file to elements in a 3D model file. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You can also select model elements by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. In the SmartPlant Review environment, you can also select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.

The following conditions must be met in order to assign materials to a 3D model:

• The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be created. They must be in a directory path that you can access from the SmartPlant Review product.



• When you built the 3D model, you must have used different levels and colors to distinguish between the different surfaces in the model. As you assign materials to the model, identify the model elements by specifying the color and level numbers used in the model file. When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is applied to every model element that is on the same level and color as that element. If every part of the model is on one level and uses only one color, you can assign only one material definition to the entire model.

• If a material assignment is not made to a surface, SmartPlant Review uses the default material value for that surface.

Notes




Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242

Edit Materials Command (Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box)

Tools > Assign Materials > Edit Materials

Creates and edits material definitions. If you want to assign an existing material to your model, you do not need to use this dialog box. Go directly to the Tools > Assign Material command.

Important


Select the Edit Material command on the Assign Material to Elements dialog box to create new material definitions and edit existing ones. A material definition consists of all the material's display properties: colors and patterns, diffuse and specular reflectance, finish, ambient reflectance, transmittance, refraction, bump maps, and pattern maps. Using the Edit Material dialog box, you can mix colors, define surface characteristics, and select patterns and bump maps to create materials. You can then save the materials in palette files.



When you create new materials, the software stores them in palette files. Palette files contain groupings of materials and are assigned a .pal extension. By saving material definitions in palette files, you can use them again, as needed, on many different models. Several palette files are supplied with SmartPlant Review and can be found in the ..\review\sample\projects\example folder.

If you delete or move materials that are used in a model, SmartPlant Review prompts you to provide directories to search in for the missing files when it opens the model.

Related Topics • Assign Materials to Elements, page 242

Create Materials Command (Tools Menu) Tools> Create Materials

Creates a palette (.pal) and material table (.mat) file from an existing IGDS or MicroStation color table (.tbl). A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the .tbl table are used in the material definition, and default values are given to the remaining display properties and rendering parameters. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the .tbl colors. You can also edit the resulting palette through the Edit Materials command.

The Create Materials command is most useful if you have a standard .tbl table to start from. It offers a quick start to creating a palette and material table. Identify the surfaces in the model to which you want to assign the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The surfaces are specified by the color and level numbers in the model file. A material table (.mat) file is created for each model file you select, with material assignments based on the surfaces you identified.

Note

• To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module

• This command overwrites any existing material table.

• To display similar colors in SmartPlant Review and MicroStation, you must use the "ct" key-in command when attaching the color table. Attached color tables, by means of the MicroStation Color Table dialog box, are not supported and colors will not display identically if the color table is attached using this dialog box.

Related Topics • Create Materials from Color Table, page 243



Snaplock Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Snaplock

Allows you to measure from a repeatable point on a selected piece of geometry.

SmartPlant Review generates snaplock points at fixed locations on a given piece of geometry for use during snaplock measurement. A snaplock point is displayed as either a small square or round tag point on a surface, as shown in the picture below. The location of a given snaplock point is always in the same place for a specific type of geometry, making snaplock measurement more precise because it is repeatable.

Related Topics • Snaplock Measurement, page 207

Surface Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Surface

Allows you to measure from any point on a piece of geometry.

Surface points can be any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode, not including background points. While they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects, surface point measurements are difficult to repeat precisely since they can be at any point on a given surface.

Related Topics • Surface Measurement, page 208



Move Measurement Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Move Measurement

Allows you to reposition measurement labels. When clicked, the Move Measurement command displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position marker for the measurement you want to move and then click where you want the new position to be. The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line.

Related Topics • Move Measurement, page 209

Restore Position Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Restore Position

Allows you to reposition a measurement label. When clicked, the Restore Position command displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position marker for the measurement you want to restore.

Related Topics • Restore Position, page 210



Edit Collections Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Edit Collections

Groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. A measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each collection. One collection is independent of all other collections, allowing you to display or hide measurement collections independently in the model. For example, one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of footings measurements. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the I-Beam measurement collection.

The Edit Collections command allows you to customize the measurement symbology (for example, lines, snaplock points, measurement units, and text, etc.) for each measurement collection in your project.

Related Topics • Creating Measurement Collections: An Overview, page 212 • Edit a Measurement Collection, page 217 • Measurement Collections Dialog Box, page 213

New Collection Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > New Collection

Generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the active collection automatically. The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the project site name and an incremented integer (for example, AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). This name cannot be edited.

Note

• You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl + Shift + F8 or by clicking New Measurement Collection on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Create a New Measurement Collection, page 217

Delete Last Measurement Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Delete Last Measurement

Allows you to remove the last measurement added to the currently active collection.

Related Topics • Delete Last Measurement, page 210



Delete Active Collection Measurements Command (Tools Menu)

Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements

Allows you to remove all of the measurements in the active collection, but does not delete the collection itself.

Related Topics • Delete Active Collection Measurements, page 211

Delete All Measurements Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements

Removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections, but does not delete the collections themselves.

Related Topics • Delete All Measurements, page 211

Delete All Collections Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections

Removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all of collections.

Related Topics • Delete All Collections, page 212

Hide Level Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Hide Level

Allows you to select an object to hide and then determine the views in which to hide the item.

Note

• You can also access this command by pressing F + 4 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Hide Level Dialog Box, page 101 • Hide Levels, page 99



Level Settings Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Level Settings

Displays the Level Settings dialog box, which allows you to select the categories (or levels) you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category; or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number. You can also read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or Main view and change the level settings for designated views.

Related Topics • Edit Levels, page 100 • Level Settings Dialog Box, page 102 • View Current Level Settings, page 100

Collision Detection Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Collision Detection

Displays the Collision Detection dialog box, which allows you to select options for running the collision detection program.

The Collision Detection command supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic. Static collision detection is performed by comparing each object in a specified model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too close together or intersecting.


Important


• SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space in your TMP directory to run collision detection.



Note



Display Order Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Display Order

Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are interested in particular elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to display first.

Notes

• Only one list can exist at a time. Each time you select this command you are prompted to either create a new list or add to the existing list.

• You can also access this command by pressing Display Order on the Tools toolbar.

Related Topics • Define Display Order, page 59



ScheduleReview Settings Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings

Displays the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, which allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. You can also reverse the action, so that you can display the deconstruction sequence.

Important


Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box, page 312

Query New Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New

Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to selected options. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.

Notes





Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323 • New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box, page 326



Query Edit Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit

Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements according to the options selected. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.

Notes





Related Topics • Create a ScheduleReview Query, page 323

Review Play Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Play

Starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the Settings dialog box. When you click Play, the review process starts on the Start Date you defined and stops on the End Date.

Notes


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Play, page 331



Review Pause Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Pause

Interrupts the current ScheduleReview session.

Tip

• You can also use the Go To Start, Back, Forward, Go To End or Stop command when Pause is activated.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Pause, page 332

Review Stop Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Stop

Stops the current ScheduleReview session.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Stop, page 332

Forward Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Forward

Allows you to step forward through the current ScheduleReview session.

Notes

• Forward is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Forward, page 333



Back Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Back

Allows you to step back through the ScheduleReview session in one-day increments.

Notes

• Back is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Back, page 333

Go To Start Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To Start

Takes you back to the initial start date defined for the ScheduleReview session.

Notes

• Go To Start is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Go To Start, page 334

Go To End Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To End

Allows you to go directly to the last date defined in the current session.

Notes

• Go To End is only available when ScheduleReview is paused.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Go To End, page 334



Go To Date Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go To Date

Allows you to jump to a specific date within the current ScheduleReview session.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Go To Date, page 335

Record Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Record

Allows you to take snapshots of the ScheduleReview animation during playback.

Note


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Record, page 335

Task Symbology Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Task Symbology

Allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task.

Notes

• If you do not use this command to assign symbology, the Review command uses the default symbology.


Related Topics • ScheduleReview Task Symbology, page 318 • Using ScheduleReview: An Overview, page 311



Auto-Association Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto-Association

Associates tasks with a group automatically. It works by comparing the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks. For example, you may have a group called steel pipe associated with all the steel pipes in your model. You may also have several tasks in your project file named install steel pipe, paint steel pipe, and inspect steel pipe. When you use this command, ScheduleReview looks for group names that match task names. The task names listed above have a text string (steel pipe) that match the group name steel pipe. As a result, ScheduleReview can associate all the tasks that contain the text string steel pipe with the group steel pipe.

Note

• Before using this command define all of the groups and tasks that you will use to review the model.

Related Topics • Auto-Association Dialog Box, page 329 • ScheduleReview Auto Association, page 322

Add Association Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association

Allows you to manually create an association between a task and one or more display sets.

Note

• This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you import a file.

Related Topics • Add a ScheduleReview Association, page 323



Remove Association Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association

Disassociates a task from one or more display sets.

Notes


• You can restore the associations you just removed by dragging the display set name and dropping it on the recently unassociated display set.

Related Topics • Remove a ScheduleReview Association, page 323

New Project Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project

Allows you to enter a unique name for a new session.

Note

• Once a project is created you must then define ScheduleReview Settings.

Related Topics • Create a New ScheduleReview Project, page 320 • New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box, page 330

Delete Project Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project

Allows you to remove a previously defined ScheduleReview project from the session.

Caution

• When you delete a project, this action cannot be reversed.

Important


Related Topics • Delete a ScheduleReview Project, page 321 • Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box, page 330



Set Active Project Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Set Active Project

Identifies which ScheduleReview project will be used in the current review session.

Important


Related Topics • Set Active ScheduleReview Project, page 321

Refresh Active Project Command (Tools Menu) Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project

Updates the active project with current data. Using it ensures that the most recent data is available for the ScheduleReview session.

Note

• You must have project planning software such as MS Project or Primivera loaded to use this command.


Data Annotation Display Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Data Annotation > Display

Starts or stops the display of data annotations.

Note

• The Annotations command on the View > Display menu is a global toggle. It controls the display of all annotations, regardless of the program that created them. The Tools > Data Annotation > Display command controls only annotations created by the Data Annotation command.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Display Data Annotations, page 232 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228



Data Annotation Edit Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Data Annotation > Edit

Allows you to edit the selected data annotation.

Related Topics • Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box, page 228 • Edit a Data Annotation File, page 231 • Edit a Data Annotation Position, page 231 • File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box), page 228 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Delete One Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Data Annotation > Delete > One

Deletes one selected data annotation from the current project.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Delete All Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Data Annotation > Delete > All

Deletes all data annotations from the current project.

Related Topics • Create a Data Annotation, page 230 • Delete Data Annotations, page 232 • Placing Data Annotations: An Overview, page 228

Refresh Data Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Refresh Data

Updates views with changed data. The software refreshes information such as measurements, tags, and display sets. The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, provides brief messages that state the actions of the software during the refresh operation.

Related Topics • Refresh Data, page 39



Edit Attachments Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments

Displays the Edit Attachments dialog box that allows you to add, edit, or remove entries that are below the first separator on the menu. The Edit Attachments command then writes the changes to the Microsoft Access Get External Data database file for the project. You can attach Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files, text files from Notepad or from the SmartPlant Review text window, MicroStation files, sound, animation, and Video Engine files. You can attach virtually any file type. Executables and their associated files must exist before you attach them. If you select an object that contains no label data and no attached data, the Edit Attachments button is disabled.

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Attachments Dialog Box, page 238 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

Edit Types Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types

Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the application used to open files of a selected type when using the Get External Data command. You can also use the Edit Types dialog box to delete associations.

Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • Edit Types Dialog Box, page 238 • Edit Types, page 237 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

Open Database Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Get External Data > Open Database

Allows you to open or create a data attachment database. The end result is attaching external data to elements within the SmartPlant Review application.

You can access the Open Database command from the Tools menu or from the shortcut menu for an object in the Main view. You can use the Edit Attachment and Edit Types commands, which appear with the Open Database command on the Tools menu.



Related Topics • Attaching External Data: An Overview, page 233 • The Get External Data Database, page 233

Collaboration Run Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Collaboration > Run

Starts the Collaboration module and NetMeeting. Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously.

All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date version. A collaboration session accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference.

Important



• Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.



Related Topics • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308

Collaboration Edit Command (Tools Menu) Tools > Collaboration > Edit

Displays the Collaboration Settings dialog box, which allows you to update details for the data sets and participants in the collaboration.

You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The Conference members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting profile of the user.

The Driver options box lets you establish settings for the driver of the conference.



Important



• Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger machines. This will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.



Related Topics • Collaborating with Others: An Overview, page 304 • Collaboration Settings Dialog Box, page 307 • Establish a Collaboration Session, page 308

Motion Menu

Eye Point Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Eye Point

Allows motion commands to affect the graphic views.

Note

• The Eye Point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode.

Related Topics • Customizing Motion Settings: An Overview, page 144 • Set Motion Control to Eye Point, page 153



Display Set Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Display Set

Allows motion commands to affect display sets.

Notes

• The Display Set motion setting is relative to the defined display set.


Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Display Options, page 150 • Using Project Manager: An Overview, page 162

Continuous Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Move > Continuous

Moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input. When Continuous Step is off, you move through the model only by command from the mouse, keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode also allows you to use other commands while in motion.

Notes

• You can also click Continuous on the Motion toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start Continuous motion.

• If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last keypad motion command is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion Settings > Rates tab. For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions.

• Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step, then select Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous motion does not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a step.

Related Topics • Set Continuous Motion, page 137



Single Step Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Move > Single Step

Moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer.

Notes

• You can use the Motion Settings dialog box to specify the step size.

• You can also click Step on the Motion toolbar or press period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move in MU:SU:PU on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.

Related Topics • Set Single Step Motion, page 137

Toggle Step Direction Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction

Switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again.

Note

• You can also click Toggle Step Direction on the Motion toolbar or press 5 on the keypad.

Related Topics • Set Toggle Step Direction, page 138



Motion Settings Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Settings

Displays the Motion Settings dialog box, which defines the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. You can also use this command to set up a joystick.








Related Topics • Motion Settings Dialog Box, page 145 • Set Bearing Angles, page 151 • Set Display Options, page 150 • Set Joystick Options, page 135 • Set Motion Rates, page 150

Auto-Highlight Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight

Allows you to display object label data instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single Pane Layout, you can see label data by clicking and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up window.

When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight mode to view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys to temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode.

Related Topics • Auto-Highlight, page 124 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122



Forward/Back, Left/Right Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right

Moves the View Cone forwards or backwards toward the object you are looking at in the model when moving the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to rotate about the eye point left or right. When using any of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the View Cone.

You can activate this mode by pressing the Ctrl key, clicking the command on the View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right.

Note

• The Positioning Mode and Directional Mode you select affects this Mouse Drag Mode.

Related Topics • Forward/Back, Left/Right, page 125 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

Pan Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan

Increases and decreases the View Cone elevation when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping plane. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways. When using any of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the View Cone.

You can activate this mode by pressing the Shift key, clicking the command on the View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.

Note


Related Topics • Pan, page 125 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122



Rotate Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate

Tilts the View Cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the View Cone to rotate left and right. When using any of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the View Cone. Rotate mode is similar to standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and looking left and right. The View Cone eye point does not move using this mode.

You can activate this mode by pressing the Alt key, clicking the command on the View toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.

Note


Related Topics • Rotate, page 125 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122

View Cube Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes >View Cube

Points the View Cone in a direction you define interactively. When using any of the motion commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the View Cone. View Cube mode is similar to standing in one place and looking in any direction. The View Cone eye point does not move using this mode.

You can activate this mode by clicking the command on the View toolbar or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube.

Related Topics • Manipulate the View Cube, page 126 • Understanding Mouse Drag Modes: An Overview, page 122



Priority Mode Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Mode > Priority Mode

Sets the mouse drag motion to allow a combination between north and east axis translation.

Notes

• Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north and east axis translation (thus diagonal movements are possible).

• Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the greatest move amount (thus only non-diagonal movements are possible).

Related Topics • Set Priority Mode, page 126

Center Mode Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode

Sets the mouse drag origin to always be the center of the view instead of the point where the mouse drag began. The Center Mode command allows you to use motion with a selected object based at the center.

Related Topics • Set Center Mode, page 126

Positioning Modes Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes

This command provides options for controlling the movement of the View Cone eye point.

With Positioning Modes, you can set the View Cone eye point for the following movements:

• Move freely in any direction in the model. • Restricted to a circular track parallel to the Plan View. • Restricted to a circular track perpendicular to the Plan View. • Restricted to a circular track that can be moved in any orientation.

Related Topics • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 140



Lateral Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes >Lateral

Allows you to move through the model in any direction you choose using any combination of Mouse Drag and Directional modes.

You can define the current eye point location using the Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Eye Point Only command.


138 • Using Lateral Motion, page 139

Horizontal Encircle Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle

Restricts the movement of the View Cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. In the Horizontal Encircle mode, the blue track is always parallel to the Plan view and perpendicular to the Elevation view.

The eye point always looks toward the center point, the green cross, of the sphere. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the elevation of the track in the Elevation view changes the direction of the View Cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.

The Rotate Mouse Drag Mode is useful when using this positioning mode because you can control both the rotation of the eye point around the track and elevation of the track.

Notes

• You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to rotate around either the center point or eye point. Rotating around the center point is the default. To rotate around the eye point, press Ctrl while using these controls.







138 • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139

Vertical Encircle Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle

Restricts the movement of the View Cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. In the Vertical Encircle mode, the blue track is locked to the center point of the Plan View. The track is always perpendicular to the Plan view.

The eye point always looks toward the center point, the green cross, of the sphere. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar or the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the location of the track in the Plan view changes the direction of the View Cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.

Notes








138 • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 140

Surface Encircle Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle

Locks the View Cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two views. In the Surface Encircle mode, you can reposition the track in either view. The eye point always remains in the center of the track as seen in the Plan view.

The eye point always looks toward the center point, the green cross, of the sphere. You can define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the location of the track changes the direction of the View Cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.

Notes








138 • Position Control Toolbar, page 113 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141

Clip to Encircle Sphere Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere

Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the Encircle positioning modes. When toggled On (the default), the Far clipping plane clips to the encircle sphere whenever you enter one of the Encircle positioning modes. When toggled Off, the Far clipping plane will not be reset when entering one of the Encircle positioning modes.

Related Topics • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 140

Maintain Encircle Clipping Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere

Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the Encircle positioning modes. When toggled On (the default), all clipping plane values set in any of the Encircle positioning modes are maintained when you return to the Lateral positioning mode. When toggled Off, when you return to the Lateral positioning mode all clipping plane values set in any of the Encircle positioning modes are reset to the values they had before entering any of the Encircle positioning modes.

Related Topics • Lateral Command (Motion Menu), page 445 • Set Horizontal Encircle Motion, page 139 • Set Surface Encircle Motion, page 141 • Set Vertical Encircle Motion, page 140



View Dependent Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent

Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction you are looking. This direction is defined by the eye point to center point vector of the View Cone. Using the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves you towards where you are looking, back moves you away. Your elevation in the model changes using the View Dependent mode if the View Cone is pointed up or down.

The View Dependent mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking. The Mouse Drag Modes, Positioning Modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how this Directional Modes operate.

Related Topics • Set View Dependent Mode, page 142

View Dependent, Level Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, Level

Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction you are looking. This direction is defined by the eye point to center point vector of the View Cone. Using the Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves you towards where you are looking, back moves you away. However, your elevation in the model does not change if the View Cone is pointed up or down.

The View Dependent Level mode allows you to move toward where you are looking but keep the same elevation.


Related Topics • Set View Dependent Level Mode, page 143

View Independent Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent

Gives you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation indicators on the Position Control toolbar. You can define different view bearing and elevation values. This gives you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in another arbitrary direction.



For example, you could define the motion bearing as 135 degrees and the view bearing as 45 degrees. Moving forward would cause the eye point to move southeast, while looking northeast.

The Mouse Drag Modes, Positioning Modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how this Directional Modes operate.

Related Topics • Set View Independent Mode, page 143

Plant North Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North

Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on north in the model. Forward moves north, back moves south, right moves east, and left moves west. North in the model is always the top of the Plan view. Watch the Plan view when using this mode until you become familiar with the mode.

The Plant North mode allows you to look in one direction, defined by the View Cone, while moving in another direction. This mode is similar to View Independent mode with the exception that forward is always north.


Related Topics • Set Plant North Mode, page 143

Key Frame Display Command (Motion Toolbar) Motion > Key Frame > Display

Displays the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box, which allows you to set movie definition items you created with the Save and Recall Views command. This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.

Important


Related Topics • Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box, page 157 • Display Key Frame Motion, page 153



Key Frame Play Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Key Frame > Play

Plays the selected key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused frame.

Note

• You can also access the Play command by pressing Ctrl + R on your keyboard.

Important


Related Topics • Play Key Frame Motion, page 154

Key Frame Pause Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Key Frame > Pause

Pauses the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resumes the currently PAUSED key frame motion.

Note

• You can also access the Pause command by pressing Ctrl + Space on your keyboard.

Important


Related Topics • Pause Key Frame Motion, page 155

Key Frame Stop Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Key Frame > Stop

Stops the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.

Note

• You can also access the Stop command by pressing Esc on your keyboard.



Important


• Clicking the Play command will resume the key frame animation at the starting frame, not the frame at which you stopped.

Related Topics • Stop Key Frame Motion, page 155

Snapshot Command (Motion Menu) Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot

Displays the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box, which provides options for saving your key frame snapshots.

Important

• Press ESC to stop the Snapshot process once it is started. You will be given the option to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the moment the process stopped.


Related Topics • Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box, page 158 • Snapshot Key Frames, page 156



Tags Menu

Leader Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Place > Leader

Places a new tag in the model with a leader line. The new tag is assigned the next available tag number, and the tag becomes the active tag. When you place the new tag, the software saves the corresponding view.

Important

• If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags > Display > None command is active. This means that the actual tags do not appear in the design.

Note

• You can also access the Leader command by pressing F9 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Place Tag With Leader, page 219

No Leader Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Place > No Leader

Places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three views. The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag then becomes the active tag.

Notes

• You can also access the No Leader command by pressing Ctrl + F9 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Place Tag Without Leader, page 220



Tags Edit Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Edit

Displays the Edit Tags dialog box, which allows you to change the text for the active tag.

Note

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > All to view tags in the view.

Related Topics • Edit Tag, page 221 • Edit Tags Dialog Box, page 226

Tags Delete Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Delete

Deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. When you delete a tag, the tag number is also deleted and is not assigned to a new tag.

Related Topics • Delete Tag, page 221

Tags Find Command (Tag Menu) Tags > Find

Displays the Find Tags dialog box, which searches for matching criteria for specified data. This command allows you to match exactly one character or multiple characters.

Notes

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Displays > All to view tags in the design file.

Related Topics • Find Tag, page 222 • Find Tags Dialog Box, page 227



Next Command (Tag Menu) Tags > Next

Allows you to move to the Next tag number following the active tag. If the active tag number is the last tag in the tag list, the Next tag number is the first tag number in the tag list.

Notes

• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tag > Display > All.

• You can also access the Next command by pressing F10 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Next Tag, page 222

Previous Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Previous

Allows you to move to the Previous tag number preceding the active tag. If the active tag number is 1, the Previous tag number is the last tag number in the tag list.

Notes

• If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the design. To display the tags, click Tags > Display > All.

• You can also access the Previous command by pressing Ctrl + F10 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Previous Tag, page 223



Go To Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Go To

Displays the Go To Tag dialog box, which allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its number. The tag you go to becomes the active tag.

Note

• If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > Active Only to display the tags in the model.

Related Topics • Go To Tag Dialog Box, page 227 • Go To Tag, page 223

Display Activate Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Display > Activate

Activates the selected tag.

Related Topics • Activate Display of Tags, page 224

Active Only Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Display > Active Only

Allows you to display only active tags.

Note


Related Topics • Display Active Tag Only, page 224



Display All Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Display > All

Allows you to display all the tags in the view.

Note

• You must have tag display turned on to use the All command.

Related Topics • Display All Tags, page 224

Display None Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Display > None

Allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model.

Related Topics • Display No Tags, page 225

Action Comments Command (Tags Menu) Tags > Display > Action Comments

Allows you to display the action comments for the current tag.

Related Topics • Display Action Comments, page 225



Accessories Menu

Load Accessories Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Load Accessories

Allows the software to read the ACCESSRY.TXT file. If the file contains entries, the software puts the entries under the Accessories menu between the Tags and Windows menus.

Important

• If you move or delete ACCESSRY.TXT, the only command available on the Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command.

Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu, page 344 • Starting Programs Automatically, page 346 • Using Accessories: An Overview, page 344

Manipulating Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE): An Overview

The Text Annotations add-in allows you to place, edit, turn on and off, and delete text annotations. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as leader lines. Annotations are not saved when you exit the software.

Tip


Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349 • Display Text Annotations, page 350 • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Place Text Annotations, page 347



Move Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Move

Allows you to relocate annotations. After clicking the Move command, a message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection.

Then, the Move Annotation dialog box appears. You can change the values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes. You can use the Apply button if you need to move other annotations. The Select button causes the software to return to the model for you to choose the next annotation.

Related Topics • Move Text Annotations, page 348

Text Annotations Edit Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit

Allows you to change the details that you recorded when you created an annotation.

The Edit command is available after you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations. A message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection.

After confirmation, the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. You can select a different item from the Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes for Arrow, Background, and Positional units. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text, Background, and Line boxes. You can use the Apply button if you need to change other annotations.

Related Topics • Edit Text Annotations, page 349

Moving or Editing Text Annotations After you have added text annotations in the model, SmartPlant Review allows you to relocate those annotations or change the details that you recorded when you created the annotation.

The Move command is available after you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations. A message onthe status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection.



After confirmation, the Move Annotation dialog box appears. You can change the values in the North, East, and Elevation boxes. You can use the Apply button if you need to move other annotations. The Select button causes the software to return to the model for you to choose the next annotation.

The Edit command is available after you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations. A message on the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm your selection.

After confirmation, the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. You can select a different item from Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes for Arrow, Background, and Positional units. The Colors group box allows you to change settings in the Text, Background, and Line boxes. You can use the Apply button if you need to change other annotations.

Related Topics • Edit Text Annotations, page 349 • Move Command (Accessories Menu), page 459 • Move Text Annotations, page 348 • Text Annotations Edit Command (Accessories Menu), page 459

Placing One or More Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to attach textual annotations to your model.

You can use the text annotation feature to place, edit, and move textual information, such as equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.

After you click Place on the Accessories menu, two commands are available: One or Many. After you select one of these commands, the software displays the Place Annotation dialog box that allows you to approve the settings for the text.

If you are adding several annotations, click the Apply button. The software adds the descriptive phrase and then refreshes the Place Annotations dialog box for you to add other phrases.

Click OK after you place the last annotation that you need to add.

Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box, page 347 • Place Many Command (Accessories Menu), page 461 • Place One Command (Accessories Menu), page 461 • Place Text Annotations, page 347



Place One Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > One

Allows you to attach one textual annotation to your model. After you select the command, the software displays the Place Annotation dialog box, which allows you to approve settings for the text.

Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box, page 347 • Place Text Annotations, page 347

Place Many Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > Many

Allows you to attach several textual annotations to your model. After you select the command, the software displays the Place Annotation dialog box, which allows you to approve settings for the text.

Related Topics • Place Annotation Dialog Box, page 347 • Place Text Annotations, page 347

Deleting One or More Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to delete textual annotations that you have placed in your model.

You can use the text annotationfeature to place, edit, and move textual information, such as equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.

After you click Delete on the Accessories menu, two commands are available: One or All.

If you click One, the status bar prompts you to select the item to delete. Then, a message prompts you to confirm the deletion and states the positional attributes for the item that you are deleting.

If you click All, you also receive a message that prompts you to confirm deletion of the entire range of annotations.

Related Topics • Delete All Command (Accessories Menu), page 462 • Delete One Command (Accessories Menu), page 462 • Delete Text Annotations, page 349



Delete One Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > One

Allows you to delete one text annotation. After selecting the annotation you want to delete, a Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the text annotation.

Note

• Click View > Display > Annotation, to turn the annotation display on.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349

Delete All Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > All

Allows you to delete all text annotations in a range. After selecting the annotation range you want to delete, a Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete ALL text annotations in the range.

Note

• Click View > Display > Annotation, to turn the annotation display on.

Related Topics • Delete Text Annotations, page 349

Displaying Text Annotations: An Overview SmartPlant Review allows you to show textual annotations in your model, or you can turn off the display of the annotations.

After you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations, two commands are available: On or Off. If the annotations currently are shown, click Off to turn off the display. If the annotations currently are not displaying, click On to view the information. If you click On but annotations do not exist, the software displays a reminder that you first must add annotations.

Related Topics • Display Off Command (Annotations Menu), page 463 • Display On Command (Annotations Menu), page 463 • Display Text Annotations, page 350



Display On Command (Annotations Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On

Allows you to show textual annotations in your model. Simply click Accessories, point to Text Annotations, then click On to view the information. If you click On but annotations do not exist, the software displays a reminder that you first must add annotations.

Related Topics • Display Text Annotations, page 350

Display Off Command (Annotations Menu) Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > Off

Allows you to turn off the display of textual annotations in your model.

Related Topics • Display Text Annotations, page 350

Set Window Size Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Set Window Size

Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this add-in to set a window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation. This add-in ensures the aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the animation view, providing a What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) animation sequence.

Related Topics • Set Window Size, page 351



Move Display Set Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Move Display Set

Displays the Move Display Set dialog box, which allows you to create "scripts" of movements and rotations that can then be "played" on any selected display set. This program is useful when you need to see how an object fits in a space in the design. For example, you can use this program to help plan equipment removal. This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.

Related Topics • Move and Rotate Display Sets, page 354 • Move Display Set Dialog Box, page 353

Paint Command (Accessories Menu) Accessories > Paint

Displays the Paint Shop Pro program, which can be used for editing images.

Related Topics • Modifying the Accessories Menu, page 344



Window Menu

Arrange All Command (Window Menu) Window > Arrange All

Returns all toolbars and views back to the default configuration.

Related Topics • Arrange All Views, page 50 • Function Keys, page 128 • Window Toolbar, page 402 • Working with Views: An Overview, page 49

Refresh All Command (Window Menu) Window > Refresh All

Redraws all of the views to update the current window contents.

Note



Related Topics • Refresh All Views, page 50

Refresh Command (Window Menu) Window > Refresh

Refreshes all views.

Note





Related Topics • Refresh View, page 51

Pane Layout Command (Window Menu) Window > Pane Layout

Allows you to determine which views - Main, Plan, Elevation, or Text - of the 3D model are displayed. You can choose from Single, Three, or Four pane layout.

Related Topics • Full Screen Display Mode, page 53

Single Command (Window Menu) Window > Pane Layout > Single

Closes the Plan, Elevation, and Text views leaving only the Main view active. Project Manager remains displayed if active. The Single Pane Layout is useful if you are viewing the model using Full Screen mode.

Note

• You can also access the Single command by clicking the Single Pane Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 1 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Single Pane Layout, page 51



Three Command (Window Menu) Window > Pane Layout > Three

Displays the Plan, Elevation, and Main views while hiding the Text view if active. Project Manager remains displayed if active.

Note

• You can also access the Three command by clicking the Three Pane Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 3 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Three Pane Layout, page 52

Four Command (Window Menu) Window > Pane Layout > Four

Opens the Plan, Elevation, Main, and Text views. Project Manager remains displayed if active.

Note

• You can also access the Four command by clicking the Four Pane Layout button on the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 4 on your keyboard.

Related Topics • Four Pane Layout, page 52

Restore Command (Window Menu) Window > Pane Layout > Restore

Resets the size of all open views to the current default sizes. The default sizes are set to the view sizes you were using when you exited the application.

You can set the view sizes using the splitter window bars and/or window resize controls, or by using the Accessories > Set Window Size command.

Related Topics • Window Toolbar, page 402

Troubleshooting


Troubleshooting

Solutions to Common Problems The following tables lists solutions to common problems that you may have when using SmartPlant Review. If the problem is not listed here, open and read the README file.

Problem Solution See . . .

You are lost in the view.

Cick View > Fit > View to Model. The current active view will be updated.

Working with Views > Fit (View to Model)

Part of the model appears cut off.

Adjust the Front and Back Clipping Planes.

Set Clipping Planes

Main view is blank but Plan and Elevation views display the model.

Move the Eye Point and adjust the View Cone.

Set Eye PointSet Clipping Planes

Views are blank or objects seem to be missing or hidden.

Check View Settings (turn on Backface, Endcaps, or increase Tolerance).

Make sure that the Eye Point and the Center Point are not set to the same, or nearly the same, values.

Check the settings for Levels and Display Sets.Check the Range Rejection settings.

View SettingsLevel SettingsDisplay Set Settings

Set Eye Point

Set Center Point

Range Rejection

Navigation speed is too fast or too slow.

Increase or decrease Dynamic Motion speed.

Motion Settings

Changes do not appear in the view.

Refresh the view. Working with ViewsRefresh

Troubleshooting


Saved image contains overlapping image that you do not want.

Make sure windows, dialog boxes, toolbars, etc. are not overlapping the view. Then, press Ctrl+F5 to Redraw on Refresh.

Working with ViewsRefresh

Text Annotations disappear after you exit the program.

Do not exit (Text Annotations are not saved).

Text Annotations

Annotations do not display.

Turn on all Annotations. Globally Displaying AnnotationsDisplaying Data AnnotationsDisplaying Text Annotations

When using Keypad motion, movement does not occur.

Make sure Num Lock is turned on and that the focus is on either the Main, Plan, or Elevation view (the title bar displays which view has focus). Check Motions Settings.

Keypad Motion Settings

When using Keypad motion, movement still continues after releasing keypad keys.

When using Mouse motion, movement continues after releasing left mouse button. Click the left mouse button in the Main view to stop the motion.

Turn off Continuous Motion.

Continuous Motion Keypad

Objects in my new display set don't appear.

Possible overlapping display sets. The last action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins.

Create Display Set

I got dropped from a Collaboration session.

Exit NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review, then bring them back up.

Rejoin Collaboration Session

Collaboration sessions lock up on Windows 98.

Because of poor resource and memory support by Windows 98, do not use Collaboration on Windows 98 machines, unless the Windows 98 machine is driving.

Readme.txt

Microsoft MSDN

Troubleshooting


Performance is extremely slow when using Windows NT 4.0.

A known issue with NT 4.0 Virtual Memory will slow your system to a crawl once 63% of committed memory is reached. Set the Virtual Memory to 1.5 times the number of processors times the RAM on your machine OR to 1.5 times the number of processors times the largest data set used by the largest application.

System Performance Tips

Performance appears sluggish when opening a dataset over the network.

Modify the registry entry for the Microsoft Jet database Page Timeout setting to a value less than the default 5000 milliseconds (for example, set the value to 5 milliseconds).


Performance seems to be dragging or a "Low on System Resources" message appears.

Increase the minimum Page file settings.


Error messages appear when I try to open a model file using SmartPlant Review 4.2.1, but the file worked in previous versions of SmartPlant Review.

To improve performance of label data queries, the format for the label database (.mdb2 file created when SmartPlant Review first reads-in your model) has been changed.

Changes to Label Database Format

Stereo Viewing depth perceptions appear mostly flat or turning the glasses upside down corrects the view.

Change the stereo polarity in SmartPlant Review by clicking View > Advanced > Stereo, and then selecting either polarity direction. Right is the normal and default polarity direction setting. However, left may be necessary on some setups, particularly projection system.

Stereo Viewing

Troubleshooting


Related Topics • Command Reference: An Overview, page 356 • Help for DesignReview Users: An Overview, page 26 • What's New in SmartPlant Review Version 4.2.2?, page 18

System Performance Tips • Virtual Memory (Swap Space) - Make sure you have enough Virtual

Memory. NT 4.0 takes half of the system's memory for the operating system, leaving you without as much available memory for your model. Also, a known issue with NT 4.0 Virtual Memory will slow your system to a crawl once 63% of committed memory is reached. While it is important to have sufficient swap space for all operating systems, for NT 4.0 sufficient swap space is critical for good performance.

Calculate the minimum Virtual Memory (swap space) by taking the larger of these two calculations:

(1.5 * RAM) * the number of processors on the machine, or

(1.5 * the largest dataset used in the application) * the number of processors.

Set the minimum and maximum Virtual Memory (swap space) settings to the same value for best performance. If the swap file has to grow, it can become very fragmented.

• Disk fragmentation - De-fragment your disks regularly. File fragmentation on the disk will slow down the system and SPR. Use a tool like DiskKeeper to avoid disk fragmentation.

• Page Timeout - Check the Microsoft Jet database Page Timeout settings in the registry. These settings can affect database performance over the network. The Page Timeout value for the Microsoft Jet database 3.5 and 4.0 versions is set to 5000 milliseconds by default. Set this value to 5 milliseconds for best performance, especially over a Novell network. Make sure that you find and set all values of the Page Timeout setting.

Here are some examples of where the Page Timeout settings can be found in the registry:

\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3.5\Engines\Jet 2.x\Page Timeout

\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3.5\Engines\Jet 3.5\Page Timeout



\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\4.0\Engines\Jet 4.0\Page Timeout

Troubleshooting


Warning

• Any changes to the registry are at your own risk.

• File System - Make sure the system is using the fastest file system. For NT and Windows 2000, studies have shown that the NTFS file system with a 4K cluster size provides better performance than a FAT or FAT32 file system. The NTFS file system is not available for Windows 98.

• Database Format - Use the Access 2000 format databases instead of the Access 97 format. Access 2000 databases are faster than Access 97.

Related Topics • Solutions to Common Problems, page 468

Accessing Support Resources Web Site The Intergraph web site brings you fast, convenient, and up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph's support, products, services, and direction. Our web address is www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph's Knowledge Base If you have Internet access and have bought product maintenance, you may want to try our knowledge base at smart.intergraph.com.

Telephone Support All Intergraph Process and Building Solutions' products are delivered with a 30-day warranty for full coverage of physical media. Intergraph also provides free software support during the warranty period, including full support of product installation and configuration, documented features, and anything received with the purchase of a support plan.

In the United States, call Intergraph Process and Building Solutions' standard support number at 1-800-766-7701 Monday through Friday, except holidays. If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. An up-to-date list of all international offices is available on the Intergraph web site, www.intergraph.com.

Please have the following information when you call:

• The product's name, version, and serial number.

• Your name and telephone number.

• A brief description of the problem.

Troubleshooting


Index


Index accessories

annotations, 347, 348, 349, 350, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463

commands, 458, 464 customizing, 344 loading, 458 menu, 344 paint, 464 programs, 346 starting, 346 using, 344 windows, 350, 351, 463, 467

activating commands, 456 display, 224, 456 Elumens, 386 joystick, 135, 151 lighting, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 279 range rejection, 56, 65, 380 stereo, 104, 383 tags, 224, 456

active measurements, 211, 423, 424 project, 311, 320, 321, 331, 434 project,, 316 tags, 218 viewing, 74, 76, 367

adding associations, 311, 323, 330, 432 display sets, 168 game controller, 134 project manager, 168, 169 projects, 169 ScheduleReview, 168, 169 views, 84, 87

adjusting bump, 250 gamma, 260 patterns, 249 views, 367

advanced commands, 382, 383 settings, 57, 58, 66, 94, 106

allowing joystick, 134, 135, 151 texturing, 146

angles bearing, 144, 147, 151, 441 perspective, 159

animation save and recall, 78 ScheduleReview, 314, 318, 335 ScheduleReview,, 312

settings, 314, 318 snapshot, 25

annotations arrowheads, 231 colors, 228, 231 creating, 230 data, 218, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 434, 435 deleting, 232, 349, 435, 461, 462 displaying, 59, 232, 350, 377, 434 editing, 228, 231, 346, 348, 349, 458, 459, 462,

463 files, 228, 231 hiding, 232, 434 leader lines, 231 placing, 228, 230, 347, 348, 349, 459, 460, 461 properties, 228, 229 text, 218, 346, 458

anti-alias key frames, 156 raytrace, 261 settings, 261 snapshot, 158, 203

applications programming interface, 19 sharing, 305 windows, 202, 351

arranging display sets, 417, 418 views, 50, 465 windows, 50, 465

aspect ratio, 340 settings, 70

assigning materials, 178, 187, 240, 242, 244, 398, 414, 418 properties, 240, 242, 414, 418

associations adding, 323, 330, 432 auto, 322, 432 removing, 323, 433 ScheduleReview, 323, 330, 432, 433

background colors, 54, 61, 90, 159, 256, 378 editing, 255 settings, 54, 256

bearing compass, 113, 404 motion, 147, 151 settings, 147, 151 sun, 64, 93, 379

buffer updates,, 57

bump

Index


adjusting, 250 map, 246

center modes, 126, 444 view, 397

changing annotations, 346, 458 collaboration, 437 collections, 207, 208, 209, 213, 214, 215, 216, 422 display sets, 172, 177, 181, 195, 196, 197, 198,

199, 201, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415 environments, 255 lighting, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 274,

275, 276, 389, 411 measurements, 207, 208, 209, 213, 214, 215, 216,

422 page setup, 337 positions, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201, 415 settings, 255

coarse facets, 146 collaborations

conference members, 306 drivers, 306, 307, 310 editing, 310 modules, 20 NetMeeting, 20, 22 passengers, 306, 307, 310 running, 308, 309, 437 sessions, 307, 310 settings, 304 snapshots, 20 track mouse cursor, 304 work offline, 304

collections creating, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217, 423 deleting, 212, 213, 398, 424 editing, 398 formatting, 214, 215 measurements, 212, 213, 214, 215 positioning, 422 restoring, 422 snaplock, 421 surface, 421

collision detection colors, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293, 294, 296,

297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 425 construction, 22 dynamic, 286, 288, 289, 291, 293, 294, 295, 296,

297, 299, 300, 301, 302, 425 modules, 22 reports, 293, 294, 299, 300, 301, 302 ScheduleReview, 22 selections, 289, 293, 294, 297, 299, 300, 301 single step, 293, 299, 300 snapshot, 22 sounds, 293, 299

static, 286, 288, 289, 291, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 299, 300, 301, 302, 425

type filter, 288, 295, 298, 299, 302 colors

background, 54, 61, 90, 159, 256 collision detection, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293,

294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 425 indexes, 276 lighting, 266, 267, 272 points, 207, 216 settings, 54 symbology, 313, 328 tables, 241, 243, 251, 419, 420

comamnds Photo-Realism, 387, 388

commands accessories, 458, 459, 461, 462, 463, 464 advanced, 383, 384, 385 annotation, 377, 434, 435, 459, 461, 463 collaboration, 437 collections, 421, 422, 423, 424 delete, 389, 433, 454, 462 display, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 392,

434, 463 display sets, 358, 359, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415,

416, 417, 418, 439, 464 edit, 363, 364, 435, 436, 437, 454, 459 Elumens, 108, 386 export, 359, 360 file, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 361, 362 functions, 128, 129 import, 358, 359 levels, 100, 425 lighting, 379, 388, 389 materials, 414 measurements, 377, 421, 422, 423, 424 motion, 124, 391, 438, 439, 440, 441, 444, 450,

451, 452 positioning, 444 ScheduleReview, 359, 360, 427, 428, 429, 430,

431, 432, 433, 434 ScheduleReview,, 429 stereo, 383, 384, 385 tags, 359, 360, 453, 454, 455, 456, 457 toolbars, 408 tools, 100, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 418,

421, 422, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 428, 429, 430, 431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 436, 437

tools,, 434 view, 75, 366, 367, 368, 369, 372, 374, 375, 376,

377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392

window, 465, 466, 467 compatibility

software,, 26 construction

Index


collision detection, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 425

modules, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 326, 327, 330, 425

sequence, 170 controlling

display sets, 152, 439 keys, 128 lighting, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 274,

275, 389 motion, 152, 439 movements, 142, 143, 449, 450 ScheduleReview, 331

creating animation paths, 78 annotations, 230 collections, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217, 423 display sets, 175, 416 folders, 416 groups, 81, 87, 89 lighting, 254, 273, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 282,

387, 388 materials, 241, 243, 251, 419, 420 measurements, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217,

377, 423 projects, 31, 32, 33, 37, 40, 330 queries, 326, 327 snapshots, 156, 158, 452 toolbars, 407, 408

creating,definitions, 176 criteria

queries, 326, 327 searching, 194, 365

current date, 316, 320 levels, 103 view, 87

customizing accessories, 344 settings, 60, 280 toolbars, 405, 406, 407, 408

dashed line, 378 pattern, 214 view cone, 117, 372, 378, 404

data annotations, 218, 228, 229, 230, 377 attributes, 347 points, 118 refresh, 39, 435 sets, 304 tags, 227

databases formatting, 471 opening, 436

project, 26 using, 31, 32, 33, 37, 40

defining animation paths, 78 bore sight, 118 criteria, 365 display sets, 144, 145, 174, 175, 416, 441 search path, 34, 244, 252

deleting annotations, 232, 349, 435, 461, 462 collections, 212, 213, 398, 424 display sets, 174, 417 groups, 80 lighting, 275, 389, 403 measurements, 210, 211, 212, 213, 398, 423, 424 projects, 311, 330 source lights, 283 tags, 221, 226, 395, 401, 454 views, 82, 87

descriptions editing, 89 viewing, 89

DesignReview changes from, 26 display set changes, 27, 171 function key changes, 28 measurement changes, 29 position control changes, 29 VUE file changes, 30

directional modes plant north, 143, 450 view dependent, 142, 449 view dependent level, 143, 449 view independent, 143, 449

display action comments, 225, 457 activating, 224, 456 annotations, 232, 350, 372, 377, 434, 462, 463 axis, 377 commands, 55, 372, 375, 376, 377, 384, 456 Elumens, 108, 382, 383 key frames, 153, 157, 450 lighting, 56, 372 measurements, 372, 377 model, 74, 366 motion, 130, 145, 146, 148, 152, 153, 157, 438,

439, 450 order, 59, 398, 426 project manager, 162, 164, 410 quality, 61, 73, 90, 159, 374, 385 query, 323, 324 range rejection, 56, 381 settings, 53, 56, 58, 62, 70, 71, 72, 73, 92, 144,

145, 146, 148, 152, 153, 374, 378, 379, 380, 381, 392, 438, 439, 441

status bar, 409

Index


stereo, 384, 385 tags, 54, 159, 218, 222, 223, 224, 225, 455, 456,

457 view cone, 372, 378

display sets adding, 168 assigning materials, 178, 187 auto-define, 179, 188, 416 brightness, 180, 411, 418 changes from DesignReview, 27 color correction utility, 18 creating, 175, 416 databases, 27 defining, 174, 175, 189, 416 deleting, 174, 323, 417, 433 editing, 168, 169, 172, 177, 181, 195, 196, 197,

198, 199, 201, 398, 411, 413, 414, 415 exporting, 180, 190, 359 hiding, 165, 166, 173, 413 importing, 179, 189, 358 materials, 412 positioning, 130, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201,

351, 353, 354, 412, 415, 464 project manager, 167, 168, 169 ScheduleReview, 168, 169, 323, 433 showing, 165, 166, 172, 173, 411, 413 sorting, 417, 418 user IDs, 27 viewing, 75, 166, 172, 173, 367, 413

displaying motion, 150 settings, 150

drawing backfaces, 376 on-site drawing generation, 23

dynamic collision detection, 286, 288, 289, 291, 293, 294,

295, 296, 297, 299, 300, 301, 302, 425 updating, 316, 320

editing annotations, 231, 346, 348, 349, 435, 458, 459,

461, 462 attachments, 190, 233, 235, 237, 238, 436 collaborations, 310, 437 collections, 207, 208, 209, 213, 214, 215, 216, 398,

422 commands, 363, 364, 435 display sets, 75, 168, 169, 177, 181, 195, 196, 197,

198, 199, 201, 367, 398, 411, 414, 415 files, 233, 235, 237, 238, 436 frames, 84, 97 levels, 61, 90, 100, 101, 103 lighting, 254, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272,

273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 282, 387, 389, 403

materials, 240, 242, 414, 418, 419

measurements, 207, 208, 209, 213, 214, 215, 216, 398, 422

motion, 144, 145, 441 Photo-Realism, 255, 285 positions, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201, 415 queries, 324, 327, 428 settings, 255, 285 tags, 221, 395, 401, 454 undoing, 363 views, 82, 84, 87, 89, 97

elements assigning materials, 242, 244, 398, 414 auto-highlight, 124 display order, 59, 426 off, 65 snapping to, 118, 119

elevation compass, 113, 404 eye point, 114, 368 view, 49, 53

Elumens activating, 382, 383 commands, 108 modes, 108, 382, 383 settings, 109, 111, 382, 383, 386

encircle horizontal, 138, 139, 445, 448 radius toolbar, 405 surface, 138, 141, 447 vertical, 138, 446

end caps, 59, 61, 90, 372, 377 date, 316, 320 frame, 314, 318

exporting display sets, 180, 190, 359 projects, 360 ScheduleReview, 360 tags, 360

eye point adjusting, 18 motion, 153, 438 placing, 367 settings, 114, 153, 368, 438 view cone, 138, 445, 448

far clip ratio, 382, 385 clipping plane, 116

features Elumens, 107 Microsoft IntelliMouse, 122, 127

files annotations, 228, 231 AutoCAD, 45 defaults, 241 designing, 35

Index


editing, 233, 235, 237, 238, 436 exporting, 360 formats, 46 images, 255 importing, 179, 189, 225, 322, 331, 358, 359 matching, 101, 103 material, 34, 244, 252 opening, 31, 36, 37, 356 printing, 337, 338, 339, 361 projects, 42, 162 SAT, 46 saving, 20, 39, 357 ScheduleReview, 315, 360 searching, 35 systems, 471 types, 42, 46, 87, 98, 233, 235, 237, 238, 315, 436

find,object, 176 finding

display sets, 181 objects, 180, 365, 395, 398 tags, 218, 222, 223, 227, 401, 454, 456 volume, 186, 187

fitting queries, 323, 324 views, 74, 75, 76, 366, 367, 397

formatting collections, 213 databases, 471 files, 46, 47 measurements, 213, 215

forward mouse modes, 122, 125 ScheduleReview, 333 ScheduleReview,, 429

frames copying, 83 displaying, 153, 157, 450 key frames, 153, 154, 155, 157, 450, 451 modifying, 84, 97 motion, 153, 155, 157, 450, 451 moving, 83 settings, 314, 318 snapshot, 315, 319

full shading, 71, 372, 375 view,, 338

function changes, 28 keys, 128, 130

functionality new,, 26

generating modelview view files, 87, 98 shadows, 256, 263

getdata arguments, 233, 235, 237, 238, 436

getting data, 233, 235, 237, 238, 436

go to date, 335, 396, 431 end, 334, 396, 430 start, 334, 430 start,, 396 tags, 218, 223, 227, 395, 401, 456

graphics card, 104, 383 display sets, 171 objects, 171 viewing, 202

groups creating, 81, 89 renaming, 80, 89 views, 81

hiding display sets, 165, 166, 173, 413 levels, 99, 101, 102, 424 objects, 99, 102, 424 project manager, 164 status bar, 409

horizontal encircle, 139 printing, 340

images files, 255 lighting, 64, 93, 379 raytracing, 283 resolutions, 340 sizes, 340

importing display sets, 179, 189, 358 files, 322, 331 projects, 322, 359 ScheduleReview, 322, 331, 359 tags, 225, 359

information display sets, 195, 196, 415 editing, 196 lighting, 276

joystick activating, 134, 135, 151 installing, 134 motion, 135, 148, 151 settings, 134, 135, 144, 145, 148, 151, 441

keeping ratio, 340

key frames displaying, 153, 157, 450 motion, 153, 154, 155, 157, 450, 451

keyboard functions, 130 keypad keys, 130

keys

Index


changes, 28 shortcut, 128, 129, 130

labels data, 47 on-site drawing generation, 23 positioning, 210 restoring, 210

levels anti-alias, 261 current, 100, 101, 103 editing, 61, 90, 101 hiding, 99, 101, 424 indexes, 276 lighting, 68, 69 settings, 61, 90, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 159, 395,

398, 425 lighting

controlling, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 274, 275, 389

deleting, 274, 275, 389, 403 distant, 273, 276, 279, 280, 282, 403 editing, 403 levels, 68, 69 new, 273, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 282, 388 OpenGL, 264 Photo-Realism, 24 point, 273, 276, 279, 280, 282, 403 settings, 56, 69, 159, 266, 271, 277, 403 shadows, 275 source, 273, 276, 279, 280, 282 spot, 273, 276, 279, 280, 282, 388, 403

lines collections, 213 colors, 214 dashed, 117, 378, 404 measurements, 213, 214 patterns, 214 view cone, 117, 378, 404 width, 214

loading accessories, 458 commands, 458

manipulating annotations, 346, 348, 349, 458, 459, 461, 462,

463 collaborations, 437 display sets, 172, 177, 181, 195, 196, 197, 198,

199, 201, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415 environments, 255 lighting, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 274,

275, 276, 389, 411 measurements, 398 page setup, 337 Photo-Realism, 255 project manager, 162, 164 settings, 130, 255

matching files, 101, 103 tags, 227

materials adjusting, 249, 250 annotations, 218 assigning, 178, 187, 240, 242, 244, 414, 418 backgrounds, 256 creating, 241, 243, 246, 251, 419, 420 display sets, 178, 187 editing, 240, 242, 246, 263, 414, 418, 419 files, 34, 244, 252 Photo-Realism, 24

measurements changing, 29 collections, 207, 208, 209, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216,

217, 422, 423 creating, 23, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217,

377, 423 deleting, 210, 211, 212, 213, 398, 423, 424 editing, 209, 213, 214, 215, 422 formatting, 213, 215 lines, 213, 214 point-to-point, 207 positioning, 209, 398, 422 restoring, 210, 422 snaplock, 207, 213, 216, 395, 398, 421 surface, 208, 398, 421 text, 213, 214

menu accessories, 344 customizing, 344 using, 344

MicroStation color table, 241, 243, 251, 419, 420 design files, 45

models fitting, 74, 75, 76, 366, 367 opening, 31, 36, 37, 356 saving, 39, 357 viewing, 74, 75, 76, 165, 166, 366, 367

modes application sharing, 305 backfaces, 376 coarse facets, 375 directional, 142, 143, 449, 450 display, 53, 377, 392 Elumens, 108 mouse drag, 122, 125, 126, 127, 442, 443, 444 positioning, 138, 139, 140, 141, 444, 445, 446,

447, 448 priority, 126, 444 rendering, 61, 71, 72, 73, 90, 374, 375, 376, 377

modules API, 20 collaboration, 20

Index


collision detection, 22, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 425

construction, 22, 25, 286, 288, 289, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 326, 327, 330, 331, 425

on-site drawing generation, 23 Photo-Realism, 24, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271,

272, 274, 275, 283, 389 ScheduleReview, 22 Simulation and Visual Effects, 25, 96, 155, 451 snapshot, 22

motion bearing, 144, 145, 147, 151, 441 controlling, 136, 152, 153, 438, 439, 451 directional, 142, 143, 449, 450 displaying, 146, 148, 150, 152, 153, 157, 439, 450 encircle, 138, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448 joystick, 121, 135, 148, 151 key frames, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 159, 450,

451, 452 keyboard, 121, 130 lateral, 138, 139, 445 modes, 139 mouse, 121, 122, 124, 125, 126, 127, 441, 442,

443, 444 priority, 126, 444 rates, 144, 145, 150, 441 settings, 135, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 150, 151,

152, 153, 438, 439, 441 snapshot, 156, 452 steps, 136, 137, 138, 440 toolbars, 399 types, 136

mouse auto-highlight, 122, 441, 442 modes, 122, 124, 125, 126, 139, 141, 142, 143,

441, 442, 443, 444, 449, 450 motion, 120, 122, 124, 125, 127, 441, 442, 443 rotating, 125 scrolling, 122, 127 stepping, 127

movements controlling, 142, 143, 449, 450 joystick, 135, 151, 354

moving annotations, 348, 349, 459 display sets, 195, 197, 199, 351, 353, 354, 412,

415, 464 measurements, 209, 398, 422 motion, 137, 138, 440 project manager, 164 save and recall, 87 speed, 144, 145, 150, 441 view, 83 with mouse, 122, 124, 125, 127, 441, 442, 443

navigating joystick, 132 on-site drawing generation, 23

NetMeeting collaboration, 20, 57, 304, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310,

383, 385, 437 using, 305

new collections, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217, 423 display sets, 175, 416 folders, 167 groups, 81, 89 measurements, 207, 208, 212, 213, 214, 216, 217,

423 projects, 168, 169, 311, 320, 330, 433 queries, 323, 326, 330, 427 source lights, 254, 273, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280,

282, 387, 388 toolbars, 407

next lighting, 69 printing, 341 range rejection, 69 tag, 222, 227, 395, 401, 455

north directional mode, 143, 450 eye point, 114, 368

number go to, 227 keys, 130 tags, 227

objects annotations, 435 assigning materials, 178, 187, 240, 242, 244, 414,

418 auto-highlight, 124, 441 collision detection, 289, 297 deleting, 232, 435 display order, 59, 426 finding, 180, 365, 395, 398 fitting, 75, 366 hiding, 99, 101, 102, 424 label data, 441 linking, 230 pick, 189 range rejection, 65 textures, 55, 61, 90, 372, 376

on-site drawing generation annotations, 23 drawing, 23 labels, 23 measurements, 23 modules, 23 navigating, 23 SmartSketch, 23 snapshot, 23

Index


tags, 23 opening

databases, 40, 436 files, 31, 36, 37, 356 models, 31, 36, 37, 356

options bounce, 258 display, 59 gamma, 260 printing, 340, 342 raytrace, 263 settings, 59 tags, 54 threshold, 257 transmittance, 258, 260

overviews accessories, 344 annotations, 218, 228, 346, 458, 462 attachments, 233 collaborations, 304 collision detection, 286 commands, 356 data, 233 display, 372 display sets, 171, 174 joystick, 132 keyboard, 128 keyframes, 153 levels, 99 lighting, 266 materials, 218, 240, 242, 414, 418 motion, 120, 121, 136, 142, 153, 450 mouse, 122, 127 Photo-Realism, 254 printing, 337 project manager, 162 raytracing, 283 SmartPlant Review, 31 snapshot, 202 stereo, 104 tags, 218 toolbars, 392, 393, 395, 397, 398, 402, 405, 409 views, 49, 53, 70, 74, 78, 112

page setup, 337, 361 timeout, 471

palettes, 244 pane

layout, 49, 51, 52, 402, 466, 467 restoring, 467

partial recall, 85, 86, 97 setup, 87, 97, 158 view, 85, 86, 97

passengers collaborations, 307, 310

settings, 306 patterns

adjusting, 249 weight, 246

pausing key frames, 155, 451 motion, 155, 451 ScheduleReview, 332, 333, 334, 429

performance anti-alias, 261 enhancing, 471 raytrace, 261, 263 settings, 260 system, 42, 60 tips, 471

perspective angles, 159, 372, 378, 404 view cone, 117, 378, 404

Photo-Realism deleting, 283 lighting, 24, 254, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271,

272, 273, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 282, 283, 387, 388

modules, 24, 25 raytrace, 256, 257, 258, 260, 284, 389 raytracing, 283 settings, 57, 254, 255, 256, 260, 261, 263, 284,

285, 386 snapshot, 24 stereo, 24 textures, 24 threshold, 257, 258 toolbars, 403 transmittance, 258, 260

pick objects, 189 point, 105, 106, 277, 384

placing 3D points, 118 annotations, 228, 347, 460, 461 collections, 207 data points, 118 eye point, 114, 368 lighting, 254, 273, 275, 276, 277, 279, 280, 282,

387, 388 measurements, 207 tags, 219, 220, 226, 395, 401, 453 views, 367

play key frames, 154, 451 ScheduleReview, 170, 331, 333, 334, 428 ScheduleReview,, 332

points colors, 207, 216 measurements, 207 sizes, 207, 216

Index


styles, 207, 216 positioning

annotations, 228, 229, 231 controlling, 29, 113, 404 data, 231 display sets, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201, 412,

415 editing, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201, 415 labels, 210 lighting, 276 measurements, 398 modes, 138, 139, 140, 141, 444, 445, 446, 447,

448 modes,, 120 restoring, 210, 398, 422

previous printing, 341 tag, 223, 227, 455

printing options, 341, 342 previewing, 341, 361 properties, 342 quick print, 338, 342 resolutions, 339, 342 settings, 340 views, 338, 339

programs accessories, 346 starting, 346

project active, 331 creating, 320, 433 deleting, 321, 433 ScheduleReview, 312, 321, 327, 331, 433

project manager adding, 168, 169 display sets, 75, 167, 168, 172, 201, 367 displaying, 164, 410 editing, 168, 169 hiding, 164, 165 moving, 164 ScheduleReview, 169 viewing, 162, 164, 165, 166, 167

projects creating, 31, 32, 33, 37, 40, 168, 169 deleting, 330 files, 162, 312 importing, 359 opening, 31, 37, 40 ScheduleReview, 312, 326, 330, 359

properties assigning, 240, 242, 414, 418 editing, 240, 242, 414, 418 printing, 337, 342 settings, 134

queries, 427

creating, 323, 326, 330, 427 editing, 324, 327, 428 executing, 326, 327 ScheduleReview, 311, 316, 320, 323, 427

range cube, 289, 297 raytrace, 403 rejection, 56, 65, 69, 372, 380, 381

rates animation, 314, 318 motion, 144, 145, 150, 441 settings, 144, 145, 150, 441

raytrace anti-alias, 261 bounce, 258 gamma, 260 performance, 261, 263 range, 284, 390, 403 settings, 261, 263, 284 shadows, 263 snapshot, 158, 203 threshold, 257 transmittance, 258, 260 viewing, 256, 284, 389

recalling keyframes, 156, 159 partial, 85, 86, 87 views, 78, 85, 86, 87, 96, 97, 391

redraw on refresh, 66, 94 reflective

bounce, 258 threshold, 257

refreshing data, 39, 435 projects, 311, 321, 434 views, 402 windows, 50, 51, 465

removing associations, 311, 323, 433 collections, 212, 213, 424 measurements, 210, 211, 212, 213, 423, 424

rendering modes, 71, 72, 374, 375, 376, 377 raytracing, 283 textures, 376

restoring collections, 422 labels, 210 measurements, 422 panes, 402, 467 positions, 210, 398, 422 windows, 467

results displaying, 326, 327 queries, 326, 327

review

Index


construction sequence, 170 play, 428 ScheduleReview, 311 ScheduleReview,, 312

rotating display sets, 195, 198, 199, 201, 353, 354 motion, 125 snapshot, 203 using keypad, 130 using mouse, 122, 443 view cone, 125

running collaborations, 308, 309, 437 collision detection, 288, 289, 291, 293, 294, 295,

296, 297, 299, 300, 301, 302 save and recall

renaming groups, 80, 89 views, 78, 81, 83, 86

saving .mdb files, 357 .vue files, 39, 357 commands, 391 recall, 391 views, 78, 96, 391

ScheduleReview active project, 316, 320, 321, 434 animation, 312, 314, 318 associations, 322, 323, 329, 330, 432, 433 collision detection, 22 construction, 22 controls, 331, 332, 334, 429 deleting, 321, 330, 433 editing, 169 go to, 335, 430, 431 importing, 322, 331, 359 modules, 22 new, 320, 433 percent complete, 336 play, 428 project manager, 169 projects, 312, 317, 320, 321, 331, 359, 360, 433 queries, 323, 427 record, 335, 431 refresh, 321, 434 resetting, 312, 317 review, 316, 320 settings, 170, 311, 312, 314, 317, 318, 332, 333,

396, 427, 429, 430 snapshot, 22, 312, 315, 319 stop, 332, 429 symbology, 312, 313, 318, 328, 431

search path defining, 34, 244, 252 design file, 35 directories, 34, 244, 252

selecting

all, 81 collision detections, 288, 289, 297 queries, 316, 320 views, 81

sending driver's state, 304 snapshots, 205

settings advanced, 58, 263 angles, 56, 117, 151 collaboration, 306, 437 collision detection, 288, 293, 294, 295, 299, 300,

302 display, 54, 55, 58, 59, 61, 62, 70, 71, 72, 90, 92,

144, 374, 379, 381 Elumens, 109, 111, 386 joystick, 134, 144, 145, 441 levels, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 159, 395, 398, 425 lighting, 55, 64, 93, 180, 254, 273, 275, 379, 387,

388, 418 motion, 126, 137, 138, 140, 144, 145, 150, 153,

438, 439, 440, 441, 444 Photo-Realism, 254, 255, 256, 261, 263, 273, 275,

276, 277, 279, 280, 282, 284, 285, 384, 386, 388, 403

placing, 115, 369 print, 340 projects, 169, 311, 312, 316, 317, 320, 321, 434 range rejection, 56, 69, 380, 381 ScheduleReview, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316,

317, 318, 319, 320, 328, 332, 396, 427, 429, 431 steps, 137, 138, 440 stereo, 105, 106 tags, 54, 224, 225, 456, 457 view cone, 115, 116, 117, 126, 369, 378, 404 views, 53, 54, 56, 58, 59, 60, 70, 71, 72, 73, 372,

374, 378, 379, 380, 381, 404, 441 window, 350, 351, 463

setup keyframes, 156, 159 page, 361 partial, 87, 97, 159 recall, 85, 86, 97, 156, 159 snapshot, 158 view, 85, 86, 97

shading, 146 display sets, 411 modes, 375 view, 159

shortcut keys, 128 showing

display sets, 165, 166, 172, 411, 413 matches, 227 project manager, 164 range rejection, 381 settings, 381

Index


SmartPlant Review features, 18, 107 modules, 18, 107 netmeeting, 305

snaplock collections, 207, 213, 216, 421 measurements, 207, 213, 216, 395, 398, 421

snapshot animation, 25 calculations, 206 collaborations, 20 collision detection, 22 key frames, 156, 159 motion, 156, 452 on-site drawing generation, 23 Photo-Realism, 24 ScheduleReview, 316, 320, 335 ScheduleReview,, 312 sending, 205 sequencer, 315, 319 taking, 156, 158, 202, 452 view, 158, 202, 203, 391

starting accessories, 346 date, 314, 316, 318, 320 frame, 314, 318 number, 315 programs, 346

steps in days, 316 motion, 136, 137, 138, 440

stereo activating, 104, 382, 383 distances, 105, 106, 159, 382, 383, 384 eye separation, 159 left view, 382 Photo-Realism, 24 right view, 382 settings, 105, 106, 384 viewing, 383, 384, 385

stopping key frame motion, 155, 451 ScheduleReview, 332, 396, 429

surface collections, 208, 421 encircle, 141, 447 measurements, 208, 398, 421

tabs advanced, 66, 94 display, 61, 90 view cone, 62, 92

tags action comments, 225, 457 activating, 224, 456 commands, 456 deleting, 221, 226, 395, 401, 454

displaying, 54, 59, 159, 222, 223, 224, 225, 455, 456, 457

editing, 221, 226, 395, 401, 454 exporting, 218, 360 finding, 218, 222, 223, 227, 401, 454, 456 go to, 218, 223, 227, 395, 401, 456 importing, 218, 225, 359 merge tag utility, 18 on-site drawing generation, 23 placing, 218, 219, 220, 395, 401, 453 settings, 54

text annotations, 218, 377 collections, 213, 214 measurements, 213, 214 scrolling, 122, 127 viewing, 53, 441

text annotations deleting, 349, 461, 462 displaying, 350, 462, 463 editing, 349, 459 manipulating, 346, 458 placing, 347, 348, 459, 460, 461

textures displaying, 59 objects, 61, 90, 376 Photo-Realism, 24 rendering, 376 settings, 55

time display, 57, 66, 94 zone, 268

toolbars common, 393 customizing, 402, 405, 406, 407, 408 encircle, 405 motion, 399 Photo-Realism, 403 position control, 29, 113, 404 resetting, 406, 408 ScheduleReview, 396 standard, 392 tag, 401 tools, 395, 398 viewing, 397, 405, 406, 407, 408 window, 402

tools collaborations, 437 data, 39, 435 refresh, 39, 435

updating backing store, 79 buffer, 66, 79, 94, 383 position, 146 views, 39, 383, 435

using

Index


accessories, 344 auto-association, 329 ScheduleReview, 329

utilities display set color correction, 18 merge tag, 18

vertical encircle, 140, 446 printing, 340

view advanced, 58, 79, 379, 383, 385 commands, 368, 369, 372, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379,

381, 382, 383, 409, 425, 435 display sets, 172, 173, 413 displaying, 53, 55, 59, 61, 90, 99, 101, 255, 375,

376, 377, 381, 392, 424, 426 editing, 82, 84, 89, 97 fitting, 74, 75, 76, 366, 367, 397 groups, 80, 81, 82, 89, 156, 158, 314, 318, 335 levels, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 424, 425 lighting, 55, 64, 93, 379 measurements, 377 placing, 83, 367, 368, 369 printing, 338, 339 project manager, 162, 164, 165, 166, 410 range rejection, 65 raytrace, 256, 284, 389 refreshing, 39, 435 save and recall, 78, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,

89, 96, 97, 98, 159 settings, 49, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61, 64, 71,

72, 73, 90, 93, 114, 159, 368, 372, 374, 379 snapshot, 158, 202, 203, 206, 391 stereo, 104, 383

tags, 54, 223 toolbars, 397, 405, 406, 407, 408 view cone, 378 windows, 50, 51, 52, 53, 351, 392, 465, 466, 467 zooming, 76, 77, 369, 370, 371

view cone center point, 115, 369 eye point, 138, 445, 448 manipulating, 130 moving, 125 perspective, 117, 378, 404 rotating, 125 settings, 62, 92, 115, 126, 369, 378 settings,, 114, 368 toolbar, 404 using, 112

window arranging, 50, 465 pane layout, 51, 52, 466, 467 project manager, 164 refreshing, 50, 51, 465 restoring, 467 settings, 351 size, 351 toolbar, 402 views, 50, 465

wireframe background, 378 color, 378 hidden line, 372

zoom in, 75, 76, 77, 366, 369, 370, 371, 397 out, 76, 77, 369, 370, 371, 397 printing, 341

spr users guide

Documents

trademarks intergraph

intergraph logo

reliability of software

computer software clause

commercial computer

smartplant review version

smartplant review modules

dea517761 copyright